Renault Kadjar Handbook
Reklama
Reklama
Renault KADJAR
Vehicle user manual
Castrol, exclusive Renault partner
Renault recommends
Sans titre-6 1
Benefit from cutting-edge technology born out of competition to ensure the performance and longevity of your Renault thanks to wide range of engine lubricants developed specially by Renault and Castrol.
renault.com
08/11/2019 11:40
Welcome to your new vehicle
This driver’s handbook
contains the information necessary:
– for you to familiarise yourself with your vehicle, to use it to its best advantage and to benefit fully from the all the functions and the technical developments it incorporates.
– to ensure that it always gives the best performance by following the simple, but comprehensive advice concerning regular maintenance.
– to enable you to deal quickly with minor faults not requiring specialist attention.
It is well worth taking a few minutes to read this handbook to familiarise yourself with the information and guidelines it contains about the vehicle and its functions and new features. If certain points are still unclear, our Network technicians will be only too pleased to provide you with any additional information.
To help you, you will find the following symbols:
and
These appear in the vehicle and indicate that you should consult the manual for detailed information and/or limits on operations with respect to your vehicle’s equipment.
anywhere in the manual indicates a hazard, danger or a safety recommendation.
The descriptions of the models given in this handbook are based on the technical specifications at the time of writing.
This hand- book covers all items of equipment
(both standard and optional)
available for these models but whether or not these are fitted to the vehicle depends on the version, options selected and the country where the vehicle is sold.
This handbook may also contain information about items of equipment to be introduced later in the model year.
The diagrams in the user manual are provided as examples.
Enjoy driving your new vehicle.
Translated from French. Copying or translation, in part or in full, is forbidden unless prior written permission has been obtained from the car manufacturer.
0.1
ENG_UD57932_1
Bienvenue (HFE - Renault)
0.2
ENG_UD54816_1
Filler NU (HFE - Renault)
C O N T E N T S
Getting to know your vehicle
...............................
Driving
...................................................................
Your comfort
.........................................................
Maintenance
.........................................................
Practical advice
....................................................
Technical specifications
......................................
Alphabetical index
...............................................
Sections
0.3
ENG_UD35471_8
Sommaire Général (X06 - C06 - S06 - X35 - L35 - X44 - C44 - G44 - X45 - H45 - X65 - L65 - S65 - X73 - B73 - X74 - B74 - K74 - X77 - J77 - F77 - R77 - X81 - J81 - X84 -
0.4
ENG_UD54816_1
Filler NU (HFE - Renault)
Section 1: Getting to know your vehicle
1.1
ENG_UD68664_6
Sommaire 1 (HFE - Renault)
KEY, RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL: general information
(1/2)
3
1
2
5
4
1
Locks all the opening elements.
2
Unlocks all the opening elements.
3
Ignition and front door key.
4
Locking/unlocking the tailgate only.
Remote control with switchblade key:
5
Locking/unlocking using the switch- blade key. To release the insert from its housing, press button
5
, it comes out automatically. Press button
5
and guide the insert back into its housing.
Advice
Avoid leaving the remote control in hot, cold or humid areas.
The key must not be used for any function other than those described in the handbook (removing the cap from a bottle, etc.).
1.2
Driver’s responsibility when parking or stopping the vehicle
Never leave an animal, child or adult who is not self-suffi- cient alone on your vehicle, even for a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves or to others by starting the engine, activating equipment such as the electric windows or locking the doors.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather, please remember that the tempera- ture inside the passenger compart- ment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY.
ENG_UD39738_2
Clés / télécommande à radiofréquence: généralités (HFE - Renault)
Key, radio frequency remote control: general information, use, deadlocking keys ...........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) central door locking ...................................
(up to the end of the DU) remote control door locking unit ................
(up to the end of the DU) radio frequency remote control/key use .......................................................
(up to the end of the DU)
KEY, RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL: general information
(2/2)
Radio frequency remote control operating range
This varies according to the surroundings: take care not to lock or unlock the doors by inadvertently pressing the buttons on the remote control.
Note:
If a door or the boot is open or not closed properly, the doors and boot lock/unlock in quick succession.
Interference
Interference by factors in the immediate vicinity (external installations or the use of equipment operating on the same frequency as the remote control) may affect the operation of the remote control.
Replacement and additional keys or remote controls.
You must only contact an approved dealer:
– If you need to replace a key it will be necessary to take the vehicle and all of its keys to an approved
Dealer in order to initialise the system.
– Depending on the vehicle, you have the option of using up to four remote controls.
Remote control unit failure
Make sure that the correct battery type is being used, and that the battery is in good condition and inserted correctly. These batteries have a service life of approximately two years.
Refer to Section 5: “Radio frequency remote control: batteries” for the battery changing procedure.
ENG_UD39738_2
Clés / télécommande à radiofréquence: généralités (HFE - Renault)
1.3
RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL UNIT: use
The remote control
A
can be used to lock or unlock the doors and boot.
It is powered by a battery which must be replaced (refer to the information on
“Radio frequency remote control: bat- teries” in Section 5).
A
1
Locking the doors
Press locking button
1
.
The side indicator lights and hazard warning lights flash
twice
to indicate that the doors have been
locked
.
If a door or the boot is open or not prop- erly shut, they will lock and unlock in quick succession and the hazard warn- ing lights and indicator lights will not flash.
3
2
Locking/unlocking only the boot
Press the button
3
.
Unlocking the doors
Pressing button
2
unlocks the doors and tailgate.
The side indicator lights and hazard warning lights flash
once
to indicate that the doors have been
unlocked
.
Note:
With the engine running, the ignition switched on and in accessories position
(refer to “Ignition switch: vehicles with a key” in Section 2), the remote control buttons will be inactive.
Driver’s responsibility when parking or stopping the vehicle
Never leave an animal, child or adult who is not self-sufficient alone on your vehicle, even for a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves or to others by starting the engine, activating equipment such as the electric windows or locking the doors.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather, please remember that the temperature inside the passenger compartment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY.
1.4
ENG_UD39739_2
Clé, télécommande à radiofréquence : utilisation (HFE - Renault) doors/tailgate .............................................
(up to the end of the DU) locking the doors .......................................
(up to the end of the DU) keys ...........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) remote control door locking unit ................
(up to the end of the DU) radio frequency remote control/key use .......................................................
(up to the end of the DU)
RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL UNIT: deadlocking
To deactivate deadlocking
Unlock the vehicle using button
2
.
The hazard warning lights
flash once
to indicate that the doors have been un- locked.
1
To activate deadlocking
Press button
1
twice in quick succession.
The hazard warning lights and indicator lights give
two slow flashes
and three quick flashes to indicate locking.
Special note:
deadlocking is not possible if the hazard warning lights or the side lights are lit.
2
If the vehicle is equipped with a dead- locking function, this allows you to lock the opening elements and to prevent the doors from being unlocked using the interior handles (for example, by breaking the window and then trying to open the door from the inside).
Never use deadlocking if someone is still inside the vehicle.
1.5
ENG_UD39298_2
Télécommandes à radiofréquence : Super condamnation (HFE - Renault) keys ...........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) deadlocking the doors ...............................
(up to the end of the DU) central door locking ...................................
(up to the end of the DU)
CARD: general information
(1/2)
4
1
3
2
The card is used for:
– locking/unlocking the doors and boot
(see the following pages);
– switching on the vehicle lighting re- motely (refer to the following pages);
– automatically closing the electric windows and, depending on the ve- hicle, sunroof remotely (see the in- formation on “Electric windows” and
“Electric sunroof” in Section 3);
– starting the engine; refer to the in- formation on “Starting the engine” in
Section 2.
1
Unlocking the doors and tailgate.
2
Locking all doors and tailgate.
3
Unlocking/locking the boot.
4
Switching on the lighting remotely.
Battery life
Make sure that the correct battery type is being used, and that the battery is in good condition and inserted cor- rectly. Its service life is approximately two years: replace it when the mes- sage “Keycard battery low” appears on the instrument panel (refer to section
“Card: battery” in Section 5).
card operating range
This varies according to the surround- ings. It is important to make sure when handling the card that you do not lock or unlock the doors by inadvertently pressing the buttons.
When the battery is flat, you can still lock/unlock and start your vehi- cle. Please see the information on
“Locking and unlocking the doors” in Chapter 1 and “Starting, stopping the engine” in Chapter 2.
1.6
ENG_UD54718_1
Carte Renault : généralités (HFE - Renault)
Card: general information, use, deadlocking doors/tailgate .............................................
(up to the end of the DU) locking the doors .......................................
(up to the end of the DU) children ......................................................
(current page) emergency key ..........................................
(up to the end of the DU) children (safety) .........................................
(current page) card: use ....................................................
(up to the end of the DU)
CARD: general information
(2/2)
4
Distance lighting function
Pressing button
4
switches on the dipped beam headlights and the interior lighting for approximately 20 seconds.
This can be used, for example, to iden- tify the vehicle from a distance when parked in a car park.
Note:
Pressing button
4
again switches off the lighting.
Advice
Avoid leaving the card in hot, cold or humid areas.
Do not keep the card in a place where it could be bent or dam- aged accidentally, such as in a back pocket of a garment.
Replacement: need for an additional card
If you lose your card or require an- other, you can obtain one from an authorised dealer.
If a card is replaced, it will be neces- sary to take the vehicle
and all its cards
to an approved Dealer to ini- tialise the system.
You may use up to four cards per vehicle.
Driver’s responsibility when parking or stopping the vehicle
Never leave an animal, child or adult who is not self-sufficient alone on your vehicle, even for a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves or to others by starting the engine, activating equipment such as the electric windows or locking the doors.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather, please remember that the temperature inside the passenger compartment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY.
1.7
ENG_UD54718_1
Carte Renault : généralités (HFE - Renault)
“HANDS-FREE” CARD: use
(1/4)
There are two ways to unlock/lock the vehicle:
– the card in “hands-free” mode;
– the card in remote control mode.
1 1
Driver’s responsibility when parking or stopping the vehicle
Never leave an animal, child or adult who is not self-sufficient alone on your vehicle, even for a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves or to others by starting the engine, activating equipment such as the electric windows or locking the doors.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather, please remember that the temperature inside the passenger compartment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY.
1
Using the card in hands-free mode
In “hands-free” mode, it is possible to lock/unlock the vehicle without using any of the card buttons, as long as the card is within the access zone
1
.
Note:
It is possible to deactivate the hands-free system – please refer to the information on the “Vehicle settings customisation menu” in Section 1.
Do not store the card anywhere it may come into contact with other electronic equipment (computer, phone etc.) as this could hinder its operation.
1.8
ENG_UD54719_1
Carte Renault en mode mains libres : utilisation (HFE - Renault) central door locking ...................................
(up to the end of the DU) doors/tailgate .............................................
(up to the end of the DU) locking the doors .......................................
(up to the end of the DU)
»hands-free» card: use..............................
(up to the end of the DU) card: use ....................................................
(up to the end of the DU) remote control card: use ............................
(up to the end of the DU)
“HANDS-FREE” CARD: use
(2/4)
3
2
“Hands-free” unlocking
With the card in zone
1
, press the button
2
on the handle of one of the front doors: the vehicle unlocks.
Unlocking is indicated by
one flash
of the hazard warning lights and the indi- cator lights.
Pressing the button
3
unlocks the entire vehicle and releases the boot.
The “hands-free” system may experi- ence temporary difficulties if one of the sensors built into the inside of the door handle is obscured (by dirt, mud, snow, gritting salt etc.).
Clean the sensors. If there is still a problem, contact an approved dealer.
Remote “Hands-free” locking
(depending on vehicle)
With the card on you, and doors and tailgate closed, move away from the ve- hicle: it will lock automatically once you have left the access zone.
Note:
The distance at which the vehicle locks depends on the surroundings.
To indicate that the vehicle has been locked, the hazard warning lights and indicator lights
flash once
and then
light up
for approximately four sec- onds, and a beep sounds in confirma- tion.
Locking using button
2
With the doors and boot closed, press button
2
on one of the front door han- dles. The vehicle will lock. The indicator lights and hazard warning lights
flash twice
to indicate that the doors have locked.
Special features of the locking system
After locking by pressing button
2
, you have to wait approximately 3 seconds to be able to unlock the vehicle again.
During these three seconds, the door handles can be tried to make sure that the vehicle is locked properly. If a door is open or not properly closed:
– when locking by pressing the
2
button, the vehicle is locked then quickly unlocked without the hazard warning lights and side indicator lights flashing;
– the vehicle will not lock as you move away.
1.9
ENG_UD54719_1
Carte Renault en mode mains libres : utilisation (HFE - Renault)
“HANDS-FREE” CARD: use
(3/4)
4
5
6
Particular features of the locking system (continued)
If provided with the vehicle, if the card has been in the detection zone for about
15 minutes, remote locking is disabled.
The vehicle cannot be locked if the card is within the zone
4
.
If the vehicle is unlocked by pressing the button on the card, but the doors or boot are not then opened; remote
“hands-free” locking is disabled.
Using the card as a remote control
Unlocking with the card
Press button
5
.
Unlocking is indicated by
one flash
of the hazard warning lights and the indi- - cator lights.
Locking using the card
With the doors and boot closed, press button
6
: the vehicle locks.
The indicator lights and hazard warning lights
flash twice
to indicate that the doors have locked.
NB:
The maximum distance at which the vehicle locks depends on the sur- roundings.
Special features
If an opening element (a door or the luggage compartment) is open or not properly closed, the vehicle cannot be locked. The vehicle will lock/unlock in quick succession, but the hazard warn- ing lights and the side indicator lights will not flash.
The card buttons are deactivated when the engine is running.
1.10
ENG_UD54719_1
Carte Renault en mode mains libres : utilisation (HFE - Renault)
“HANDS-FREE” CARD: use
(4/4)
4
7
If,
while the engine is running,
a door is opened and closed, and the card is no longer in the zone
4
, the message
Keycard not detected indicates that the card is not inside the vehicle. This will, for example, prevent you from driving away after dropping off a passenger who has kept the card on them.
The warning disappears when the card is detected again.
Locking/unlocking only the boot
Press the button
7
to lock/unlock the boot only.
Driver’s responsibility when parking or stopping the vehicle
Never leave an animal, child or adult who is not self-sufficient alone on your vehicle, even for a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves or to others by starting the engine, activating equipment such as the electric windows or locking the doors.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather, please remember that the temperature inside the passenger compartment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY.
1.11
ENG_UD54719_1
Carte Renault en mode mains libres : utilisation (HFE - Renault)
CARD: deadlocking
1
2
If the vehicle is equipped with a deadlocking function, this allows you to lock the opening elements and to prevent the doors from being unlocked using the interior handles (for example, by breaking the window and then trying to open the door from the inside).
3
To activate deadlocking
Press button
2
twice in quick succes- sion.
With the vehicle unlocked, you can also press the button
3
on the driver’s door, passenger’s door or the boot twice in quick succession (or, depending on the vehicle, on the tailgate of the rear door).
In both cases, the indicator lights and hazard warning lights
flash five times
to indicate that the doors have locked.
Never use deadlocking if someone is still inside the vehicle.
Special feature
The deadlocking cannot be activated when the hazard warning lights or the side lights are lit.
To deactivate deadlocking
Unlock the vehicle using button
1
on the card.
Unlocking is indicated by
one flash
of the hazard warning lights and the indi- cator lights.
1.12
ENG_UD54720_1
Carte Renault : super condamnation (HFE - Renault) central door locking ...................................
(up to the end of the DU) doors/tailgate .............................................
(up to the end of the DU) locking the doors .......................................
(up to the end of the DU) deadlocking the doors ...............................
(up to the end of the DU) card: use ....................................................
(up to the end of the DU)
LOCKING, UNLOCKING THE DOORS
(1/3)
If the remote control or, depending on the vehicle, the card does not work
In some cases
, the radio frequency remote control or the card may not work:
– card/radio frequency remote control battery worn or run flat, vehicle bat- tery flat etc.
– use of appliances operating on the same frequency as the card (mobile phone, etc.);
– vehicle located in a high electromagnetic radiation zone.
It is then possible:
– depending on the vehicle, use the radio frequency remote control or the emergency key integrated in the card to unlock the front left-hand door;
– to lock each of the doors manually;
– to use the interior door locking/unlocking control (refer to the following pages).
1
2
Vehicles with key/remote control
Using the key
Insert the key
2
into the lock
1
and lock or unlock the front left-hand door.
Locking, unlocking the opening elements doors/tailgate .............................................
(up to the end of the DU) locking the doors .......................................
(up to the end of the DU) unlocking the doors ...................................
(up to the end of the DU) closing the doors .......................................
(up to the end of the DU) opening the doors ......................................
(up to the end of the DU) central door locking ...................................
(up to the end of the DU)
Never leave your vehicle with the key or card inside.
ENG_UD54721_1
Verrouillage / Déverrouillage des portes (HFE - Renault)
1.13
LOCKING, UNLOCKING THE DOORS
(2/3)
3
4
A
Vehicles with card
Access key 4 integrated in the card
Slide the rear casing
3
downwards while pressing on zone
A
.
4
1
Using the integrated key
Insert the key
4
into the lock
1
and lock or unlock the front left-hand door.
Once you are inside the vehicle, put the key back in its casing in the card.
1.14
ENG_UD54721_1
Verrouillage / Déverrouillage des portes (HFE - Renault)
LOCKING, UNLOCKING THE DOORS
(3/3)
5
If a door or the tailgate is open or not closed properly, the doors and tailgate lock/unlock quickly.
If transporting an object with the tail- gate open, you can still lock the doors:
with the engine stopped,
press and hold switch
5
for more than five sec- onds to lock the other doors.
Interior locking/unlocking door control
Switch
5
simultaneously controls the doors and the tailgate.
Unlocking:
press switch
5
, it goes out.
Locking:
press switch
5
, it comes on.
Locking the opening elements without the card or the key
For example, in the event of a dis- charged battery or the card or key tem- porarily not working etc.
With the engine switched off and a door or tailgate open,
press and hold switch
5
for more than five seconds.
When the door is closed, all the doors and the tailgate will be locked.
Unlocking the vehicle from the outside is only possible with the card in the ve- hicle access zone or by using the key.
Door and tailgate status indicator
When the ignition is on, the indicator light integrated in switch
5
informs you of the status of the opening elements:
– when the light is on, the doors and tailgate are locked;
– indicator light off, the doors and tail- gate are unlocked.
When you lock the doors from the out- side, the indicator light remains lit for a moment, and then goes out.
Driver’s responsibility
If you decide to keep the doors locked when you are driving, remember that it may be more difficult for those assisting you to gain access to the passenger compartment in the event of an emergency.
1.15
ENG_UD54721_1
Verrouillage / Déverrouillage des portes (HFE - Renault)
OPENING AND CLOSING THE DOORS
(1/2)
3
4
1
5
2
Opening the doors from the outside
With the doors unlocked, pull handle
1
.
Special feature on vehicles equipped with a card
With the doors locked, press button
2
on handle
1
of one of the two front doors and pull towards you.
Opening from the inside
Pull the handle
3
.
Lights-on reminder buzzer
If you have switched off the ignition and left the lights switched on, a re- minder buzzer will sound when a door is opened and if the light stalk is not in position AUTO.
As a safety precaution, the doors should only be opened or closed when the vehicle is stationary.
Door/tailgate open buzzer
At a standstill, the warning light
4
lights up on the instrument panel alongside the warning light
5
or incorrectly closed.
2
indicating the opening elements (door, boot) are open
Once the vehicle reaches a speed of approximately 12 mph (20 km/h), a warning light indicates the opening element(s) (door, boot) open of im- properly closed, alongside the mes- sage “Boot open” or “Door open” and a beep will sound for around 40 seconds or until the opening element is closed.
1.16
ENG_UD57443_2
Ouverture et fermeture des portes (HFE - Renault)
Opening and closing the doors doors/tailgate .............................................
(up to the end of the DU) locking the doors .......................................
(up to the end of the DU) closing the doors .......................................
(up to the end of the DU) opening the doors ......................................
(up to the end of the DU)
OPENING AND CLOSING THE DOORS
(2/2)
7
6
6
Child safety
Press switch
6
to enable or disable opening of the rear electric windows from the inside.
The indicator light in the switch lights up to confirm that the locks have been ac- tivated.
Operating faults
If there is a system fault:
– a beep sounds;
– the message “Check child safety device” is displayed on the instru- ment panel;
– the integrated warning light does not come on.
Vehicle with manual door locking
Move lever
7
and check from the inside that the doors are securely locked, to prevent the rear doors being opened from the inside.
As a safety precaution, the doors should only be opened or closed when the vehicle is stationary.
Driver’s responsibility when parking or stopping the vehicle
Never leave an animal, child or adult who is not self-suffi- cient alone on your vehicle, even for a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves or to others by starting the engine, activating equipment such as the electric windows or locking the doors.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather, please remember that the tempera- ture inside the passenger compart- ment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY.
1.17
ENG_UD57443_2
Ouverture et fermeture des portes (HFE - Renault) child safety.................................................
(current page)
AUTOMATIC LOCKING WHEN DRIVING
1
NB:
if a door is opened or closed, it will automatically lock again when the vehicle reaches a speed of 6 mph
(10 km/h).
Operating principle
After the vehicle is started, the system automatically locks the doors when you are driving at approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h) and over.
The door can be unlocked:
– by pressing the door unlocking switch
1
(the warning light goes out);
– at a standstill, by opening a front door from inside the vehicle.
Activating/deactivating the function
To activate:
with the vehicle at a stand- still and the engine running, press the switch
1
until a beep sounds.
To deactivate:
with the vehicle at a standstill and the engine running, press the switch
1
until you hear two beeps.
Depending on the vehicle, you can also deactivate/activate this function from the instrument panel or, depend- ing on the vehicle, from the multimedia screen.
Refer to “Vehicle settings customisation menu” in Section 1 for the “Auto door locking while driving” function:
Operating faults
If you experience an operating fault
(no automatic locking, the indicator light incorporated in switch
1
does not light up when trying to lock the open- ing elements etc.), first check that the opening elements are properly closed.
If they are properly closed, contact an approved dealer.
Driver’s responsibility
If you decide to keep the doors locked when you are driving, remember that it may be more difficult for those assisting you to gain access to the passenger compartment in the event of an emergency.
1.18
ENG_UD54723_1
Condamnation automatique des ouvrants en roulage (HFE - Renault)
Automatic locking when driving central door locking ...................................
(up to the end of the DU) doors/tailgate .............................................
(up to the end of the DU) locking the doors .......................................
(up to the end of the DU)
RENAULT ANTI-INTRUDER DEVICE
(RAID) ........................................................
(current page) closing the doors .......................................
(current page)
FRONT HEADRESTS
1
A
2
3
To raise the headrest
Pull the headrest upwards to the desired height. Check that it is correctly locked.
To lower the headrest
Press button
3
and guide the headrest down to the desired height. Check that it is correctly locked in place.
To raise the headrest
Raise the headrest to its highest po- sition (tilt the seatback backwards if necessary). Press button
3
and lift the headrest to release it.
To refit the headrest
Check that the headrest rods are clean
2
.
The rod with a notch should be in- serted into the slot
1
fitted with a lock- ing button
3
.
Insert the headrest rods into the holes
(tilt the seatback backwards if neces- sary).
Press the
3
button and push in the headrest as far as it will go, then adjust it to the desired height. Check that each rod
2
on the seatback is securely locked.
The headrest is important for safety. Ensure that it is in place and in the correct position: the top of the headrest should be as close as possible to the top of the head and there must be a minimal distance between the head and the headrest
A
.
1.19
ENG_UD36656_1
Appuis-tête avant (HFE - Renault)
Headrests - Seats headrest.....................................................
(up to the end of the DU) adjusting your driving position ...................
(up to the end of the DU) front seats adjustment ...........................................
(up to the end of the DU)
FRONT SEATS WITH MANUAL CONTROL
(1/2)
To raise or lower the seat base
Move lever
3
as many times as neces- sary upwards or downwards.
3
2
4
To tilt the seatback
Lift the lever
4
and move the seatback to the desired position.
5
1
To move the seat forwards or backwards
Lift handle
1
to unlock. Release the handle once the seat is in the correct position and ensure that the seat is locked.
Adjusting the seat length
Lift handle
2
to unlock. Release the handle at the desired position and make sure that it is locked.
For safety reasons, carry out any adjustments when the vehicle is not being driven.
We would advise you not to recline the seatbacks too far to ensure that the effectiveness of the seat belts is not reduced.
Nothing should be placed on the floor (area in front of driver) as such objects may slide under the pedal during braking manoeuvres, thus obstructing its use.
6
To adjust the lumbar support on the driver’s seat
Lower handle
5
to increase the support and lift to decrease it.
Heated seats
With the ignition on, press the switch
6
for the seat desired. The switch warn- ing lights come on.
The system automatically decides whether or not the heating is needed.
Pressing the button again lowers the temperature. Pressing a third time switches the heating off.
1.20
ENG_UD54725_1
Sièges avant (HFE - Renault) adjusting your driving position ...................
(up to the end of the DU) front seat adjustment .................................
(up to the end of the DU) front seats adjustment ...........................................
(up to the end of the DU) heated seats ..............................................
(current page)
FRONT SEATS WITH MANUAL CONTROL
(2/2)
When using the passenger seat in table position, you must not use the two rear seats immediately behind it.
Repositioning the seat
Make sure that nothing prevents the seat from moving.
– Pull the handle
7
and raise the seat- back, ensuring that it locks firmly in place.
– Reposition the seat base.
7
4
Be sure to hold the seat- back when placing it in the flat position.
Risk of injury
.
Table function
Depending on the vehicle, the passenger seatback may be folded down onto the seat base to create a table.
– Lower the headrest;
– move the seat back;
– lift the lever
4
and tilt the seatback forwards as far as possible;
– pull the handle
7
and fully lower the seatback.
When the front seat is in table position, the front pas- senger airbag airbag must be deactivated (see the in- formation on “Child safety: activat- ing/deactivating the front passenger airbag” in Section 1).
Risk of serious injury caused by items resting on the seatback table which may be dislodged when the airbagairbag is deployed.
The label (on the dashboard) and the markings (on the windscreen) remind you of these instructions.
For your safety, attach any transported objects when the seat is in the table position.
For safety reasons, carry out any adjustments when the vehicle is not being driven.
1.21
ENG_UD54725_1
Sièges avant (HFE - Renault)
DRIVER’S SEAT WITH ELECTRIC CONTROLS
4
Heated seats
With the ignition on, press the switch
5
for the seat desired. The switch warn- ing lights come on.
The system automatically decides whether or not the heating is needed.
Pressing the button again lowers the temperature. Pressing a third time switches the heating off.
1
3
2
Adjusting the seat squab:
– To adjust the length of the seat base
, operate the switch
1
.
– To move the seat forwards or back
Move switch
2
forwards or back- wards.
– To raise or lower the seat base
Move switch
2
upwards or down- wards.
Adjusting the seatback:
To tilt the seatback
, move the switch
3
forwards or backwards.
5
To adjust the seat’s lumbar position
Lower handle
4
to increase the support and lift it to decrease it.
For safety reasons, carry out any adjustments when the vehicle is not being driven.
Make sure that the seatbacks are correctly locked in place.
We would advise you not to recline the seatbacks too far to ensure that the effectiveness of the seat belts is not reduced.
No object should be placed on the floor (in front of the driver). such objects may slide under the pedals during sudden braking manoeuvres and obstruct their use.
1.22
ENG_UD54726_1
Sièges avant à commandes électriques (HFE - Renault) front seats with electric controls ............................
(current page)
SEAT BELTS
(1/4)
Always wear your seat belt when travelling in your vehicle. You must also comply with the legislation of the particular country you are in.
Incorrectly adjusted or twisted seat belts may cause injuries in the event of an accident.
Use one seat belt per person, whether child or adult.
Even pregnant women should wear a seat belt. In this case, ensure that the lap belt is not exerting too much pressure on the abdomen, but do not allow any slack.
Before starting, first adjust your driving position, then ask all occupants to adjust their seat belts to ensure optimum protection.
Adjusting your driving position
– Sit well back in your seat
(having first removed your coat or jacket).
This is essential to ensure your back is positioned correctly;
– adjust the distance between the seat and the pedals.
Your seat should be as far back as possible while still allowing you to depress the clutch pedal fully. The seatback should be adjusted so that your arms are slightly bent when you hold the steering wheel;
– adjust the position of your headrest.
For the maximum safety, your head must be as close as possible to the headrest;
– adjust the height of the seat.
This adjustment allows you to select the seat position which offers you the best possible view
;
– adjust the position of the steering wheel.
1
2
Adjusting the seat belts
Sit with your back firmly against the seatback.
Shoulder strap
1
should be as close as possible to the base of the neck but not on it.
Lap belt
2
should be worn flat over the thighs and against the pelvis.
The belt should be worn so that it is as close as possible to your body, i.e.: avoid wearing heavy clothing or keeping bulky objects under the belts, etc.
1.23
ENG_UD41228_2
Ceintures de sécurité (HFE - Renault)
Seat belts seat belts ...................................................
(up to the end of the DU) adjusting your driving position ...................
(up to the end of the DU) front seats adjustment ...........................................
(current page) driving position settings ................................................
(up to the end of the DU)
SEAT BELTS
(2/4)
1
3
5
5
4
Locking
Unwind the belt
slowly and smoothly
and ensure that buckle
3
locks into catch
5
(check that it is locked by pulling on buckle
3
).
If the belt jams, allow it to return slightly before attempting to unwind it again.
If your seat belt is completely jammed, pull slowly, but firmly, so that just over
3 cm unwinds. Allow it to return slightly before attempting to unwind it again.
If there is still a problem, contact an approved dealer.
ß
Driver’s seat belt reminder and, depending on the vehicle, front passenger seat belt reminder
This lights up on the central display when starting the engine then, if the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt
(if this seat is occupied) is not fastened and the vehicle has reached approxi- mately 12 mph (20 km/h), it flashes and a bleep sounds for around 120 sec- onds.
Note:
an object placed on the passenger seat base may activate the warning light in some cases.
Rear seat belt reminder
(depending on vehicle)
ß
lights up on the Warning light central display, accompanied by the graphic
6
on the instrument panel for approximately 30 seconds each time the vehicle is started, a door is opened or a rear seat belt is fastened or unfas- tened.
6
Check that the rear passengers are wearing seat belts and that the number of seat belts shown as fastened cor- responds to the number of rear seat places occupied.
On the graphic
6
:
– marker in green: seat belt fastened;
– marker in red: seat belt unfastened.
Unfastening
Press button
4
and the seat belt will be rewound by the inertia reel. Guide the belt.
1.24
ENG_UD41228_2
Ceintures de sécurité (HFE - Renault)
SEAT BELTS
(3/4)
7
8
Adjusting the height of the front seat belts
Use button
7
to adjust the seat belt height so that the shoulder strap is worn as shown previously. Press the button
7
and raise or lower the seat belt. Make sure that the seat belt is locked in posi- tion correctly after you have adjusted it.
Rear seat belts
8
The belts are locked, unlocked and adjusted in the same way as the front belts.
moved.
Check that the rear seat belts are positioned and operating correctly each time the rear bench seat is
ENG_UD41228_2
Ceintures de sécurité (HFE - Renault)
8
rear seats...................................................
(current page)
1.25
SEAT BELTS
(4/4)
The following information applies to the vehicle’s front and rear seat belts.
– No modification may be made to the component parts of the originally fitted restraint system: seat belts, seats and their mountings. For special operations (e.g. fitting child seats), contact an authorised dealer.
– Do not use devices which allow any slack in the belts (e.g. clothes pegs, clips, etc.): a seat belt which is worn too loosely may cause injury in the event of an accident.
– Never wear the shoulder strap under your arm or behind your back.
– Never use the same belt for more than one person and never hold a baby or child on your lap with your seat belt around them.
– The belt should never be twisted.
– Following an accident, have the seat belts checked and replaced if necessary. Always replace your seat belts as soon as they show any signs of wear.
– Make sure that the buckle is inserted into the appropriate catch.
– Ensure that no objects are placed in the area around the seat belt catch as they could prevent it from being properly se- cured.
– Make sure the seat belt catch is properly positioned (it should not be hidden away, crushed or flattened by people or ob- jects).
1.26
ENG_UD41228_2
Ceintures de sécurité (HFE - Renault)
METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS
(1/6)
Depending on the vehicle, they are composed of:
– seat belt inertia reel pretensioners;
– driver’s lap belt pretensioners;
– chest-level load limiter;
–
airbags
driver and passenger front.
These systems are designed to act independently or together when the vehicle is subjected to a frontal impact.
Depending on the severity of the impact, the system can trigger:
– seat belt locking;
– the seat belt inertia reel pretensioner
(which engages to correct seat belt slack);
– the lap belt pretensioners to hold the occupant in his seat;
– the front airbag.
1
2
Pretensioners
The pretensioners hold the seat belt against the body, holding the occupant more securely against the seat, thus increasing the seat belt’s efficiency.
In the event of a severe frontal impact and if the ignition is switched on, the system may engage the following depending on the force of the impact:
– seat belt inertia reel pretensioner
1
which instantly retracts the seat belt;
– the lap belt pretensioner
2
for the driver only.
– Have the entire restraint system checked following an accident.
– No operation whatso- ever is permitted on any part of the system (pretensioners, airbags, computers, wiring) and the system components must not be reused on any other vehicle, even if identical.
– Only qualified personnel from our
Network may work on the airbags; otherwise the system may trigger accidentally and cause injury.
– The electric trigger system may only be tested by a specially trained technician using special equipment.
– When the vehicle is scrapped, contact an approved dealer for disposal of the pretensioner and airbags gas generators.
1.27
ENG_UD59137_4
Dispositifs complémentaires à la ceinture avant (HFE - Renault)
Additional methods of restraint in addition to the front seat belts additional methods of restraint to the front seat belts ...........................
(up to the end of the DU) seat belt pretensioners front seat belt .......................................
(up to the end of the DU) methods of restraint in addition to the seat belts ...........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) air bag........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) air bag........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) seat belts ...................................................
(up to the end of the DU) pretensioners .............................................
(up to the end of the DU)
METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS
(2/6)
Load limiter
Above a certain severity of impact, this mechanism is used to limit the force of the belt against the body so that it is at an acceptable level.
driver and passenger front
Airbags
Fitted to the driver and passenger sides.
The presence of this equipment is indi- cated by the word “Airbag” on the steer- ing wheel, dashboard (in area airbag
A
) and, depending on the vehicle, a label on the lower section of the windscreen.
Each airbag system consists of:
– an airbag and gas generator fitted on the steering wheel for the driver and in the dashboard for the passenger;
A
– an electronic unit for system monitoring which controls the gas generator electrical trigger system;
– a single
å
warning light on the instrument panel.
The airbag system uses py- rotechnic principles. This explains why, when the airbag inflates, it will gener- ate heat, produce smoke (this does not mean that a fire is about to start) and make a banging noise. In a situ- ation where an airbag is required, it will inflate immediately and this may cause some minor, superficial graz- ing to the skin or other problems.
1.28
ENG_UD59137_4
Dispositifs complémentaires à la ceinture avant (HFE - Renault)
METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS
(3/6)
Operating faults
This warning light
å
will light up on the instrument panel when the ignition is switched on and then go out after a few seconds.
If it does not light up when the ignition is switched on, or comes on when the engine is running, there is a fault in the system.
Contact your approved Dealer as soon as possible. Your protection will be reduced until this fault is rectified.
Operation
This system is only operational when the ignition is switched on.
In a severe
frontal
impact, the airbags inflate rapidly, cushioning the impact of the driver's head and chest against the steering wheel and of the front pas- senger against the dashboard. The air- bags then deflate immediately so that the passengers are not in any way hin- dered from leaving the vehicle.
operating faults ..........................................
(current page)
ENG_UD59137_4
Dispositifs complémentaires à la ceinture avant (HFE - Renault)
1.29
METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS
(4/6)
The following cases cause the pre- tensioners or airbags
to operate
In a frontal impact
against a rigid
(non-deformable) surface at an impact speed equal to or greater than
16 mph
(25 km/h)
.
In a frontal impact
with another vehi- cle of an equivalent or higher category, with an impact area equal to or greater than 40%, where the speed of both ve- hicles is equal to or greater than
25 mph (40 km/h)
.
In a side impact
with another vehicle of an equivalent or higher category, at an impact speed equal to or greater than
31 mph (50 km/h)
.
1.30
ENG_UD59137_4
Dispositifs complémentaires à la ceinture avant (HFE - Renault)
METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS
(5/6)
In the following examples, the pre- tensioners or the airbags could op- erate:
– impact under vehicle such as pave- ment;
– potholes;
– drop or hard landing;
– stones;
– ...
In the following examples, there is a risk that pretensioners or
airbags may not be triggered:
– rear impact, however severe;
– the vehicle overturning;
– side impact, affecting the front of the vehicle;
– frontal impact, under the tail of a lorry;
– frontal impact against an obstacle with a sharp angle;
– ...
1.31
ENG_UD59137_4
Dispositifs complémentaires à la ceinture avant (HFE - Renault)
METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS
(6/6)
All of the warnings below are given so that the
airbag
is not obstructed in any way when it is inflated and also to prevent the risk of serious injuries caused by items which may be dislodged when it inflates.
Warnings concerning the driver’s
airbag
– Do not modify the steering wheel or the steering wheel boss.
– Do not cover the steering wheel boss under any circumstances.
– Do not attach any objects (badge, logo, clock, telephone holder, etc.) to the steering wheel boss.
– The steering wheel must not be removed (except by qualified personnel from our Network).
– When driving, do not sit too close to the steering wheel. Sit with your arms slightly bent (see the information on “Adjusting your driving position” in Section 1). This will allow sufficient space for the air bag to deploy correctly and be fully effective.
Warnings concerning the passenger
airbag
– Do not attach or glue any objects (badge, logo, clock, telephone holder, etc.) to the dashboard on or near the airbag.
– Do not place anything between the dashboard and the passenger (pet, umbrella, walking stick, parcels, etc.).
– The passenger must not put his or her feet on the dashboard or seat as there is a risk that serious injuries may occur. In general, parts of the body should be kept away from the dashboard (knees, hands, head, etc.).
– The devices in addition to the front passenger seat belt should be reactivated as soon as a child seat is removed, to ensure the protection of the passenger in the event of an impact.
A REAR-FACING CHILD SEAT MUST NOT BE FITTED TO THE FRONT PASSENGER SEAT UNLESS
THE ADDITIONAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS, IE. THE PASSENGER AIR BAG, ARE DEACTIVATED.
(refer to the information on “Child safety: deactivating/activating the front passenger airbag” in Section 1)
1.32
child safety.................................................
(current page)
ENG_UD59137_4
Dispositifs complémentaires à la ceinture avant (HFE - Renault)
METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE REAR SIDE SEAT BELTS
Force limiter
Above a certain severity of impact, this mechanism is used to limit the force of the belt against the body so that it is at an acceptable level.
– Have the entire restraint system checked following an accident.
– No operation whatsoever is permitted on any part of the system (air bags, electronic control units, wiring) and the system components must not be reused on any other vehicle, even if identical.
– Only qualified personnel from our Network may work on the air bags; otherwise the system may trigger accidentally and cause injury.
to the rear seat belts additional methods of restraint to the rear seat belts ............................
(up to the end of the DU) methods of restraint in addition to the seat belts ...........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) air bag........................................................
(up to the end of the DU)
ENG_UD36660_1
Dispositifs complémentaires aux ceintures arrière latérales (HFE - Renault)
1.33
SIDE PROTECTION DEVICES
Side Airbags
An airbag can be fitted to each front seat and the rear side seats, which are deployed on the side of the seat (door side) to protect the occupants in the case of a severe side impact.
Curtain Airbags
These are airbag fitted along the sides of the vehicle in the ceiling which trigger along the front and rear door side win- dows to protect the passengers in case of a severe side impact.
Depending on the vehicle, a marking on the windscreen informs you of the presence of additional means of restraint (air bags, pretensioners, etc.) in the passenger compartment.
1.34
Warning relating to the side airbag
–
Fitting seat covers:
seats equipped with an airbag require covers specifically designed for your vehicle. Contact an approved Dealer to find out if these covers are available. The use of any covers other than those designed for your vehicle (and including those designed for another vehicle) may affect the operation of the airbags and reduce your protection.
– Do not place any accessories, objects or even pets between the seatback, the door and the internal fittings. Do not cover the seatback with any items such as clothes or accessories. This may prevent the air bag from operating correctly or cause injury when the airbag is deployed.
– No work or modification whatsoever may be carried out on the seat or internal fittings, except by qualified personnel from an approved Dealer.
ENG_UD40974_2
Dispositifs de protection latérale (HFE - Renault) side additional methods of restraint side protection .....................................
(current page) methods of restraint in addition to the seat belts ...........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) air bag........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) air bag........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) side protection devices ..............................
(up to the end of the DU)
ADDITIONAL METHODS OF RESTRAINT
All of the warnings below are given so that the airbag is not obstructed in any way when it is inflated and also to prevent the risk of serious injuries caused by items which may be dislodged when it inflates.
The airbag is designed to complement the action of the seat belt. Both the air bags and seat belts are integral parts of the same protection system.
It is therefore essential to wear seat belts at all times. If seat belts are not worn, the occupants are exposed to the risk of serious injury in the event of an accident. It may also increase the risk of minor superficial injuries occurring when the airbag is deployed, although such minor injuries are always possible with air bags.
If the vehicle should overturn or in the event of a rear impact, however severe, the pretensioners and airbags are not always triggered. Impacts to the underside of the vehicle, e.g. from pavements, potholes or stones, can all trigger these sys- tems.
– No work or modification
whatsoever
may be carried out on any part of the airbag system (airbags, pretensioners, computer, wiring harness, etc.), except by qualified Network personnel.
– To ensure that the system is in good working order and to avoid accidental trig- gering of the system which may cause injury, only qualified Network personnel may work on the airbag system.
– As a safety precaution, have the airbag system checked if your vehicle has been involved in an accident, or is stolen or broken into.
– When selling or lending the vehicle, inform the user of these points and hand over this handbook with the vehicle.
– When scrapping your vehicle, contact your approved Dealer for disposal of the gas generator(s).
Operating faults
å
This warning light comes on when the engine is started and then goes out after approximately three seconds.
If it does not come on when the ignition is switched on or if it stays on, there is a fault in the system.
Contact your approved Dealer as soon as possible.
Your protection will be reduced until this fault is rectified.
1.35
ENG_UD36662_1
Dispositifs de retenue complémentaires (HFE - Renault) additional methods of restraint ..................
(up to the end of the DU) methods of restraint in addition to the seat belts ...........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) air bag........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) air bag........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) seat belts ...................................................
(up to the end of the DU)
CHILD SAFETY: General information
(1/2)
Carrying children
Please ensure that you comply with the legislation of your country.
Children, and adults, must be correctly seated and strapped in for all journeys.
The children being carried in your vehicle are your responsibility.
A child is not a miniature adult. Children are at risk of specific injuries as their muscles and bones have not yet finished growing. The seat belt alone would not provide suitable protection.
Use an approved child seat and ensure you use it correctly.
To prevent the doors being opened, use the “Child safety” device (refer to the information on “Opening and closing the doors” in Section 1).
A collision at 30 mph
(50 km/h) is the same as falling a distance of 10 metres.
Transporting a child without a restraint is the equivalent of allowing him or her to play on a fourthfloor balcony without railings.
Never travel with a child held in your arms. In the event of an accident, you will not be able to keep hold of the child, even if you yourself are wearing a seat belt.
If your vehicle has been involved in a road accident, replace the child seat and have the seat belts and
ISOFIX anchorage points checked.
1.36
Driver’s responsibility when parking or stopping the vehicle
Never leave an animal, child or adult who is not self-suffi- cient alone on your vehicle, even for a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves or to others by starting the engine, activating equipment such as the electric windows or by locking the doors.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather, please remember that the tempera- ture inside the passenger compart- ment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY.
ENG_UD47466_5
Sécurité enfants : généralités (X98 - X87 - X82 - X07 - JFC - HFE - BFB - XHA - XFA - Renault)
Child safety: General information child safety.................................................
(up to the end of the DU) child restraint/seat .....................................
(up to the end of the DU) child restraint/seat .....................................
(up to the end of the DU) child restraint/seat .....................................
(up to the end of the DU) child seats..................................................
(up to the end of the DU) transporting children ..................................
(up to the end of the DU) children ......................................................
(up to the end of the DU)
CHILD SAFETY: General information
(2/2)
Using a child seat
The level of protection offered by the child seat depends on its ability to re- strain your child and on its installation.
Incorrect installation compromises the protection it offers the child in the event of harsh braking or an impact.
Before purchasing a child seat, check that it complies with the regulations for the country you are in and that it can be fitted in your vehicle. Consult an approved dealer to find out which seats are recommended for your vehicle.
Before fitting a child seat, read the manual and respect its instructions. If you experience any difficulties during installation, contact the manufacturer of the equipment. Keep the instructions with the seat.
Set a good example by always fastening your seat belt and teaching your child:
– to strap themselves in correctly;
– to always get in and out of the car at the kerb, away from busy traffic.
Do not use a second-hand child seat or one without an instruction manual.
Check that there are no objects in the vicinity of the child seat which could impede its operation.
Never leave a child unattended in the vehicle.
Check that your child is always strapped in and that the belt or safety harness used is correctly set and adjusted. Avoid wearing bulky clothing which could cause the belts to slacken.
Never let your child put their head or arms out of the window.
Check that the child is in the correct position for the entire journey, especially if asleep.
ENG_UD47466_5
Sécurité enfants : généralités (X98 - X87 - X82 - X07 - JFC - HFE - BFB - XHA - XFA - Renault)
1.37
child safety.................................................
(up to the end of the DU) child restraint/seat .....................................
(up to the end of the DU) child restraint/seat .....................................
(up to the end of the DU) child restraint/seat .....................................
(up to the end of the DU) child seats..................................................
(up to the end of the DU) transporting children ..................................
(up to the end of the DU) children ......................................................
(up to the end of the DU)
CHILD SAFETY: choosing a child seat
Rear-facing child seats
A baby’s head is, proportionally, heavier than that of an adult and its neck is very fragile. Transport the child in this position for as long as possible (until the age of 2 at the very least). It supports both the head and the neck.
Choose a bucket type seat for best side protection and change it as soon as the child’s head is higher than the shell.
Forward-facing child seats
The child’s head and abdomen need to be protected as a priority. A forward-fac- ing child seat which is firmly attached to the vehicle will reduce the risk of impact to the head. Ensure your child travels in a forward-facing seat with a harness for as long as their size permits.
Choose a bucket type seat for optimum side protection.
Booster cushions
From 15 kg or 4 years, the child can travel using a booster seat, which will enable the seat belt to be adapted to suit his/her size and shape. The booster seat cushion must be fitted with guides to position the seat belt on the child’s thighs rather than the stomach.
It is recommended that you use a seatback fitted with a belt strap guide which can be adjusted in terms of height to position the seat belt in the centre of the shoulder. It must never rest on the neck or on the arm.
Choose a bucket type seat for optimum side protection.
1.38
ENG_UD54733_1
Sécurité enfants : choix du siège enfant (HFE - Renault)
CHILD SAFETY: choosing a child seat mounting
(1/2)
There are two ways of attaching child seats: via the seat belt or using the
ISOFIX
system.
Attachment via the seat belt
The seat belt must be adjusted to ensure that it is effective in the event of harsh braking or an impact.
Ensure that the strap paths indicated by the child seat manufacturer are respected.
Always check that the seat belt is correctly fastened by pulling it up, then pulling it out fully whilst pressing on the child seat.
Check that the seat is correctly held by moving it from side to side and back to front: the seat should remain firmly fixed.
Check that the child seat has not been installed at an angle and that it is not resting against a window.
Do not use the child seat if it may unfasten the seat belt restraining it: the base of the seat must not rest on the buckle and/or catch of the seat belt.
Before using an
ISOFIX
child seat that you pur- chased for another vehicle, check that its installation is authorised. Consult the list of ve- hicles which can be fitted with the seat with the equipment manufac- turer.
The seat belt must never be twisted or the tension relieved. Never pass the shoulder strap under the arm or behind the back.
Check that the seat belt has not been damaged by sharp edges.
If the seat belt does not operate normally, it will not protect the child.
Consult an approved dealer. Do not use this seat until the seat belt has been repaired.
Attachment using the
I
SOFIX system
Authorised
ISOFIX
child seats are ap- proved in accordance with regulation
ECE-R44 in one of the three following scenarios:
– universal
ISOFIX
3-point forward- facing seat;
– semi-universal
ISOFIX
2-point seat;
– specific.
For the latter two, check that your child seat can be installed by consulting the list of compatible vehicles.
Attach the child seat with the
ISOFIX
locks, if these are provided. The
ISOFIX
system allows quick, easy and safe fit- ting.
The
ISOFIX
system consists of 2 rings and, in some cases, a third ring.
No modifications may be made to the component parts of the restraint system
(seat belts,
ISOFIX
, seats and their mountings) originally fitted.
1.39
ENG_UD64202_4
Sécurité enfants : choix de la fixation du siège enfant (HFE - Renault)
Choosing a child seat mounting child restraint/seat .....................................
(up to the end of the DU) child restraint/seat .....................................
(up to the end of the DU) child restraint/seat .....................................
(up to the end of the DU) child safety.................................................
(up to the end of the DU) child seats..................................................
(up to the end of the DU) transporting children ..................................
(up to the end of the DU)
Isofix ..........................................................
(up to the end of the DU)
CHILD SAFETY: choosing a child seat mounting
(2/2)
1
2
3
The rings are identified by the symbol
.
In all cases, attach the strap hook to the corresponding ring
2
and
3
and place the seat in the desired position.
Pull the belt so that the back of the child seat comes into contact with the back of the vehicle seat.
Attachment using the ISOFIX system (continued)
The two rings
1
are located between the seatback and the seat base of the seat and are identified by a marking.
To access the rings, insert your finger in the cover and pull.
Note:
Keep the covers you have re- moved in a storage compartment so as not to lose or damage them.
The third ring
2
or
3
is located behind the seat trim and is accessed through a recess. This ring is used to attach the upper strap on some
ISOFIX
seats.
The child seat strap
must
be attached to the corresponding ring.
Do not use any other mounting point.
The
ISOFIX
anchorage points have been exclu- sively designed for child seats with the
ISOFIX
system. Never fit a different type of child seat, seat belt or other objects to these fittings. Check that nothing is obstructing the anchorage points.
If your vehicle has been involved in a road accident, have the
ISOFIX
anchorage points checked and re- place your child seat.
1.40
ENG_UD64202_4
Sécurité enfants : choix de la fixation du siège enfant (HFE - Renault)
CHILD SAFETY: fitting a child seat, general information
(1/2)
Some seats are not suitable for fitting child seats. The diagram on the following page shows you how to attach a child seat.
The types of child seats indicated may not be available. Before using a different child seat, check with the manufacturer that it can be fitted.
Fit the child seat in a rear seat wherever possible.
Check that when installing the child seat in the vehicle it is not at risk of coming loose from its base.
If you have to remove the headrest, check that it is correctly stored so that it does not come loose under harsh braking or impact.
Always attach the child seat to the vehicle even if it is not in use so that it does not come loose under harsh braking or impact.
In the front seat
The laws concerning children travelling in the front passenger seat differ in every country. Consult the legislation in force and follow the indications on the diagram on the following page.
Before fitting a child seat in this seat (if authorised):
– lower the seat belt as far as possible;
– move the seat as far back as possible;
– gently tilt the seatback away from vertical (approximately 25°);
– on equipped vehicles, raise the seat base as far as possible.
In all situations, reinsert the headrest to its full extent so that it does not interfere with the child seat (see the information on “Front headrests” in Section 1);
After installing the child seat, when this is possible, you can move the vehi- cle seat forward if necessary (so as to leave enough space in the rear seats for passengers or other child seats). In the case of a rear-facing child seat, do not let it touch the dashboard or move it to the furthest forward position.
Do not change other settings after in- stalling the child seat.
RISK OF DEATH OR
SERIOUS INJURY:
before fitting a rear-facing child seat to this seat, check that the airbag has been deactivated
(refer to the information on "Child safety: deactivating/activating the front passenger airbag in Section 1).
1.41
ENG_UD59138_4
Sécurité enfants : installation du siège enfant, généralité (HFE - Renault)
Fitting a child seat, general information child restraint/seat .....................................
(up to the end of the DU) child restraint/seat .....................................
(up to the end of the DU) child restraint/seat .....................................
(up to the end of the DU) child safety.................................................
(up to the end of the DU) child seats..................................................
(up to the end of the DU) transporting children ..................................
(up to the end of the DU) air bag........................................................
(current page) children ......................................................
(up to the end of the DU)
CHILD SAFETY: fitting a child seat, general information
(2/2)
In the rear side seat
A carrycot can be installed across the vehicle and will take up at least two seats.
Position the child with their feet nearest the door.
Move the front seat as far forward as possible to install a rear-facing child seat, then move back the seat in front as far as it will go, although without al- lowing it to come into contact with the child seat.
For the safety of a child facing forwards, move the seat in front of the child as far forward as possible, remember- ing to move the seatback forwards to avoid contact between the seat and the child’s legs.
Always remove the headrest from the rear seat used for the child seat (see
“Rear headrests” in Section 3). If nec- essary, position the rear seat as far back as possible. This must be done before fitting the child seat.
Check that the forward-facing child seat is resting against the back of the vehi- cle seat.
Ensure that the child seat or the child’s feet do not prevent the front seat from locking correctly. Refer to the information on the “Front seat” in Section 1.
Fit the child seat in a rear seat wherever possible.
Fitting a seat ISOFIX in the rear-left seat means the middle seat cannot be used. The central seat belt will no longer be either accessible or useable.
To install an ISOFIX seat in this seat, detach the central seat belt by hand before engaging the bolts.
When fitting a child seat
(Group 2 or 3 booster seat), check that the seat belts op- erate (wind) correctly: refer to Section 1 “Rear seat belts”. If necessary, adjust the position of the vehicle seat.
1.42
ENG_UD59138_4
Sécurité enfants : installation du siège enfant, généralité (HFE - Renault) rear bench seat..........................................
(current page) rear parcel shelf .........................................
(current page)
Isofix ..........................................................
(current page)
CHILD SEATS: attachment by seat belt
(1/3)
³
Check the status of the airbag before fitting a child seat or allowing a passenger to use the seat.
²
Seat not suitable for fitting child seats.
Child seat attached using the belt
¬
Seat which allows a child seat with “Universal” approval to be attached by a seat belt.
RISK OF DEATH OR
SERIOUS INJURY:
Before installing a child seat on the front passenger seat, check that the airbag has been deactivated (please refer to “Child safety: front passenger airbag deactivation and activation” in Section 1).
Using a child safety system which is not approved for this vehicle will not correctly protect the baby or child.
They risk serious or even fatal injury.
Child seats: attachment by seat belt or by Isofix system
ENG_UD39335_2 sieges enfant : installation par ceinture de securité (HFE - Renault) child restraint/seat .....................................
(up to the end of the DU) child safety.................................................
(up to the end of the DU) child seats..................................................
(up to the end of the DU) child restraint/seat .....................................
(up to the end of the DU) transporting children ..................................
(up to the end of the DU)
1.43
CHILD SEATS: attachment by seat belt
(2/3)
The table below summarises the information already shown on the diagram on the previous page, to ensure the applica- ble regulations are respected.
Type of child seat Weight of the child
Carrycot fitted across the vehicle
Group 0
< 10 kg
Rear-facing shell seat
Groups 0 or 0 +
< 10 kg and < 13 kg
Shell seat/rear-facing seat
Groups 0+ and 1
< 13 kg and 9 to 18 kg
Forward-facing seat
Group 1
9 to 18 kg
Booster seat
Groups 2 and 3
15 to 25 kg and 22 to
36 kg
Front passenger seat (1)
Rear side seats Rear centre seat
X
U (2)
U (2)
X
X
U (3)
U (4)
U (4)
U (5)
U (5)
X
X
X
X
X
1.44
(1) RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY:
Before installing a child seat on the front passenger seat, check that the airbag has been deactivated (please refer to “Child safety: front passenger airbag deactivation and activation” in
Section 1).
ENG_UD39335_2 sieges enfant : installation par ceinture de securité (HFE - Renault)
CHILD SEATS: attachment by seat belt
(3/3)
X
= Seat not suitable for fitting child seats of this type.
U
= Seat which allows a child seat with “Universal” approval to be installed using a seat belt; check that it can be fitted.
(2)
Raise the seat to the maximum and position it as far back as possible, tilting the seatback slightly (approximately 25°).
(3)
A carrycot can be installed across the vehicle and will take up at least two seats. Position the child with his or her feet nearest the door.
(4)
Move the seat in front of the child forwards, move the seatback forward to avoid contact between the seat and the child’s legs.
(5)
In all situations, remove the rear headrest of the seat on which the child seat is positioned. This must be done before fitting the child seat. Please refer to the information on the “Rear headrests” in Section 3.
ENG_UD39335_2 sieges enfant : installation par ceinture de securité (HFE - Renault)
1.45
CHILD SEATS: attachment using the ISOFIX SYSTEM (
1/3)
The table below summarises the information already shown in the diagram on the following pages, to ensure the appli- cable regulations are respected.
Type of child seat
Weight of the child
Carrycot fitted across the vehicle
Group 0
< 10 kg
Five-seater version
Front passenger seat
Without or with airbag deactivated
With airbag activated
X X
Rear side seats
X
Rear centre seat
X
Rear-facing shell seat
Groups 0 or 0 +
< 10 kg and
< 13 kg
X X IL (1) X
Shell seat/rear-facing seat
Groups 0+ and 1
< 13 kg and 9 to
18 kg
Forward-facing seat
Group 1
9 to 18 kg
Booster seat
Groups 2 and 3
1.46
15 to 25 kg and
22 to 36 kg
X
X
X
X
X
X
IL (1)
IUF - IL (2)
IUF - IL (2)
ENG_UD59139_2 sieges enfant : fixation par système isofix (HFE - Renault)
X
X
X child safety.................................................
(up to the end of the DU) child seats..................................................
(up to the end of the DU) child restraint/seat .....................................
(up to the end of the DU) transporting children ..................................
(up to the end of the DU) seat belts ...................................................
(up to the end of the DU) children ......................................................
(up to the end of the DU) child restraint/seat .....................................
(up to the end of the DU) air bag........................................................
(current page) airbags activation/deactivation of the front passenger airbag .......................................
(current page)
Isofix ..........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) child restraint/seat .....................................
(up to the end of the DU)
CHILD SEATS: attachment using the ISOFIX SYSTEM (
2/3)
X
= Seat not suitable for fitting child seats of this type.
IUF/IL
= On equipped vehicles, seat which allows an approved “Universal/semi-universal” or “vehicle specific” child seat to be at- tached using the ISOFIX system; check that it can be fitted.
(1)
Move the front seat as far forward as possible to install a rear-facing child seat, then move back the seat in front as far as it will go, although without allowing it to come into contact with the child seat.
(2)
In all situations, remove the rear headrest of the seat on which the child seat is positioned. This must be done before fitting the child seat. Please refer to the information on the “Rear headrests” in Section 3. Move the seat in front of the child forwards, move the seatback forward to avoid contact between the seat and the child’s legs.
(3)
The size of the ISOFIX child seat is indicated by a letter:
– A, B and B1: for forward-facing seats in group 1 (9 to 18 kg);
– C and D: shell seat or rear-facing seats in group 0+ (less than 13 kg) or group 1 (9 to 18 kg);
– E: rear-facing shell seats in group 0 (less than 10 kg) or 0+ (less than 13 kg);
– F and G: cots in group 0 (less than 10 kg).
air bag........................................................
(current page) air bag activating the front passenger air bags
(current page)
ENG_UD59139_2 sieges enfant : fixation par système isofix (HFE - Renault)
1.47
CHILD SEATS: attachment using the ISOFIX SYSTEM (
3/3)
Child seat fitted using the ISOFIX
mounting
ü
Seat which allows a ISOFIX child seat to be attached.
±
The rear seats are fitted with an anchorage point which allows a forward-facing ISOFIX child seat with universal approval to be attached. The anchorage points are located on the backs of the rear seats.
²
Seat which does not allow a child seat to be fitted.
Using a child safety system which is not approved for this vehicle will not correctly protect the baby or child.
They risk serious or even fatal injury.
RISK OF DEATH OR
SERIOUS INJURY:
before installing a rear-facing child seat in the front passen- ger seat, make sure the airbag has been deactivated (refer to the infor- mation on “Child safety: front pas- senger airbag deactivation/activa- tion” in Section 1).
Fitting a seat ISOFIX in the rear-left seat means the middle seat cannot be used. The centre seat belt is no longer accessible.
To install an ISOFIX seat in this seat, detach the central seat belt by hand before engaging the bolts.
1.48
ENG_UD59139_2 sieges enfant : fixation par système isofix (HFE - Renault)
CHILD SAFETY: deactivating, activating AIRBAG front passenger
(1/3)
1
2
DANGER
Since operation of the front passenger airbag is not compatible with the po- sition of a rear-facing child seat,
NEVER
fit a rear-facing child re- straint system in a seat protected by an ACTIVATED front
AIRBAG
.
This can lead to the
DEATH
of the
CHILD
or
SERIOUS INJURY
.
Front passengerairbag deactivation
Before installing a child seat on the front passenger seat:
– check that the child seat can be in- stalled on this seat;
– it is essential
to deactivate
the airbagfor a rear-facing child seat.
To deactivate the airbag
:
stationary vehicle, ignition off,
push and turn lock
1
to the
OFF
position.
With the ignition on, you
must
check that the warning light
]
on the dis- play
2
is lit up and, depending on the vehicle, that the message “airbag pas- senger deactivated” is displayed.
This light remains permanently lit to let you know that you can fit a child seat.
tion off
.
The passenger airbag must only be activated or deacti- vated when the
vehicle is stationary with the igni-
If it is interfered with when the vehicle is being driven, indicator lights
å
and
©
will come on.
Switch the ignition off then on again to reset the airbag in accordance with the lock position.
1.49
Deactivating, activating the front passenger airbag
ENG_UD59140_2
Sécurité enfants : désactivation/activation airbag passager avant (HFE - Renault) child safety.................................................
(current page) children ......................................................
(up to the end of the DU) air bag........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) airbags activation/deactivation of the front passenger airbag .......................................
(up to the end of the DU)
CHILD SAFETY: deactivating, activating AIRBAG front passenger
(2/3)
A
A
3
DANGER
Since operation of the front passenger airbag is not compatible with the po- sition of a rear-facing child seat,
NEVER
fit a rear-facing child re- straint system in a seat protected by an ACTIVATED front
AIRBAG
.
This can lead to the
DEATH
of the
CHILD
or
SERIOUS INJURY
.
The markings on the dashboard and labels
A
on each side of the passen- ger sun visor
3
(example: label shown above) remind you of these instruc- tions.
1.50
ENG_UD59140_2
Sécurité enfants : désactivation/activation airbag passager avant (HFE - Renault)
CHILD SAFETY: deactivating, activating AIRBAG front passenger
(3/3)
1
2
Operating faults
It is forbidden to fit a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat if the airbag activation/deactivation system is faulty.
Allowing any other passenger to sit in that seat is not recommended.
Contact your approved dealer as soon as possible.
Front passengerairbag activation
You should reactivate the airbag as soon as you remove the child seat from the front passenger seat to ensure the protection of the front passenger in the event of an impact.
To reactivate the airbag : with the vehicle stoppedand the ignition off,
push and turn lock
1
to the
ON
position.
With the ignition switched on, you
must
check that the warning light
]
is out and that the warning light comes on the display
2
after each start- up for around 60 seconds.
The passenger airbag has been acti- vated.
tion off
.
The passenger airbag must only be activated or deacti- vated when the
vehicle is stationary with the igni-
If it is interfered with when the vehicle is being driven, indicator lights
å
and
©
will come on.
Switch the ignition off then on again to reset the airbag in accordance with the lock position.
1.51
ENG_UD59140_2
Sécurité enfants : désactivation/activation airbag passager avant (HFE - Renault) operating faults ..........................................
(current page)
DRIVING POSITION: LEFT-HAND DRIVE
(1/2)
1 2 3
4
5 6 7 8 9
1 10 2 11 2 1 12
13 14 1
2
25
24
23
22
1.52
Driving position controls ......................................................
(up to the end of the DU) driver’s position .........................................
(up to the end of the DU) dashboard..................................................
(up to the end of the DU)
21 20
19
18
16
17
15
ENG_UD64356_3
Poste de conduite direction à gauche (HFE - Renault)
DRIVING POSITION: LEFT-HAND DRIVE
(2/2)
The equipment fitted, described below, DEPENDS ON THE VERSION AND COUNTRY.
1
Air vent.
2
Demister outlet.
3
Stalk for:
– direction indicator lights;
– exterior lights;
– fog lights.
4
Main switch and controls for cruise control/speed limiter and adaptive cruise control.
5
Instrument panel.
6
Driver Airbag and horn location.
7
Controls for:
– on-board computer information read-out and vehicle settings customisation menu;
– remote radio and navigation system.
8
Steering column stalk for wind- screen and rear screen wash/ wiper.
9
Engine start/stop button (vehicle with card).
10
Controls for:
– access the main menu;
– access the “Driving assistance” menu or, depending on the vehi- cle, the user preferences menu;
– assisted parking.
11
Controls for:
– hazard warning lights;
– electric door locking.
12
Multimedia screen.
13
Heating or air conditioning con- trols.
14
Passenger Airbag location.
15
Glovebox.
16
Accessories and multimedia socket.
17
Two and four-wheel drive mode selector or, depending on the vehi- cle, traction control.
18
Cruise control/speed limiter main control.
19
Assisted parking or handbrake control.
20
Gear lever.
21
Ignition switch (vehicles with key).
22
Control for adjusting steering wheel height and reach.
23
Bonnet release control.
24
Controls for:
– headlight beam height remote adjustment; lighting rheostat for control instru- ments;
– Lane departure warning;
– traction control system and
ESC.
25
Controls for:
– ECO mode;
– activation/deactivation of the
Stop and Start function.
1.53
ENG_UD64356_3
Poste de conduite direction à gauche (HFE - Renault)
DRIVING POSITION: RIGHT-HAND DRIVE
(1/2)
1 2
3 4 5
1 6
2
7
2 1
8
9
10 11 12
13
2
1
1.54
25
24
23
22
20
21
19 18 17 16
15
14
ENG_UD64361_3
Poste de conduite direction à droite (HFE - Renault) controls ......................................................
(up to the end of the DU) driver’s position .........................................
(up to the end of the DU) dashboard..................................................
(up to the end of the DU)
DRIVING POSITION: RIGHT-HAND DRIVE
(2/2)
The equipment fitted, described below, DEPENDS ON THE VERSION AND COUNTRY.
1
Air vent.
2
Demister outlet.
3
Passenger Airbag location.
4
Heating or air conditioning con- trols.
5
Multimedia screen.
6
Controls for:
– access the main menu,
– access the “Driving assistance” menu or, depending on the vehi- cle, the user preferences menu;
– assisted parking.
7
Controls for:
– hazard warning lights;
– electric door locking.
8
Stalk for:
– direction indicator lights;
– exterior lights;
– fog lights.
9
Main switch and controls for cruise control/speed limiter and adaptive cruise control.
10
Instrument panel.
11
Driver Airbag and horn location.
12
Controls for:
– on-board computer information read-out and vehicle settings customisation menu,
– remote radio and navigation system.
13
Steering column stalk for wind- screen and rear screen wash/ wiper.
14
Controls for:
– ECO mode,
– activation/deactivation of the
Stop and Start function.
15
Controls for:
– electric headlight beam adjust- ment;
– lighting dimmer for control in- struments;
– Lane departure warning;
– traction control system and
ESC.
16
Bonnet release control.
17
Ignition switch (vehicles with key).
18
Control for adjusting steering wheel height and reach.
19
Engine start/stop button (vehicle with card).
20
Accessories and multimedia socket.
21
Two and four-wheel drive mode selector or, depending on the vehi- cle, traction control.
22
Cruise control/speed limiter main control.
23
Assisted parking or handbrake control.
24
Gear lever.
25
Glovebox.
1.55
ENG_UD64361_3
Poste de conduite direction à droite (HFE - Renault)
WARNING LIGHTS
(1/6)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
A
š
Side light warning light
á
Main beam headlight telltale
k
Dipped beam headlight telltale
g
Front fog light tell-tale
Rear fog light telltale
Automatic main beam headlight indicator light
Please refer to the information on “External signals and lights” in
Section 1.
c
Left-hand direction indicator tell-tale
b
Right-hand direction indicator tell-tale
M
Low fuel level warning light
It lights up orange when the ig- nition or the engine is switched on and goes off after a few seconds.
If it comes on orange while driving and is accompanied by a beep, fill up with fuel as soon as possible. There is only approximately 30 miles (50 km) worth of fuel left.
Instrument panel
A
: this comes on when the driver's door is opened.
In some cases, the appearance of a warning light is accompanied by a mes- sage.
The
©
warning light means you should
drive very carefully
to an approved dealer as soon as possible. If you fail to follow this recommendation, you risk damaging your vehicle.
Warning light
®
re- quires you to stop immedi- ately, for your own safety, as soon as traffic conditions allow. Switch off the engine and do not restart it. Contact an approved
Dealer.
If no lights or sounds are apparent, this indicates a fault in the instrument panel. This indicates that it is essential to stop immediately (as soon as traffic conditions allow). Ensure that the vehicle is correctly immobilised and contact an approved Dealer.
1.56
ENG_UD64198_3
Témoins lumineux (HFE - Renault)
Instrument panel control instruments ....................................
(up to the end of the DU) indicators: instrument panel ..................................
(up to the end of the DU) fuel level ....................................................
(up to the end of the DU) instrument panel ........................................
(up to the end of the DU) warning lights.............................................
(up to the end of the DU) driver’s position .........................................
(up to the end of the DU) trip computer and warning system.............
(up to the end of the DU) display .......................................................
(up to the end of the DU) operating faults ..........................................
(up to the end of the DU) lights: fog lights ..............................................
(current page) lights: dipped beam headlights .......................
(current page) lights: direction indicators ...............................
(current page) lights: main beam headlights ..........................
(current page) air bag........................................................
(current page) fuel filling .....................................................
(current page)
WARNING LIGHTS
(2/6)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
A
®
STOP light
This lights up when the igni- tion or engine is switched on and goes out as soon as the engine is running. It comes on with other warning lights and/ or messages, and is accompanied by a beep.
It requires you to stop immediately, for your own safety, as soon as traffic conditions allow. Switch off the engine and do not restart it.
Contact an approved Dealer.
D
Brake circuit fault warning light
It lights up when the ignition or the engine is switched on and goes off after a few seconds.
If it comes on during braking and is ac- companied by the
®
warning light and a beep, it indicates that the fluid level in the circuit is low or that there is a braking system fault. Stop as soon as traffic conditions allow and contact an authorised dealer.
Ú
Battery charge warning light
It lights up when the ignition or the engine is switched on and goes off after a few seconds.
If it comes on on the road, accompa- nied by the
®
warning light and a beep, this indicates an overload or dis- charge in the electrical circuit.
Stop as soon as traffic conditions allow and contact an approved Dealer.
À
Oil pressure warning light
It lights up when the ignition or the engine is switched on and goes off after a few seconds.
If it comes on on the road, accompa- nied by the
®
warning light and a beep, stop immediately and cut the ignition.
Check the oil level. If the level is normal, the indicator light is being lit by something else. Contact an approved Dealer.
U
Variable power-assisted steering warning light
It lights up when the ignition or the engine is switched on and goes off after a few seconds.
If it comes on while driving, alongside the warning light
® there is a system fault.
, this means
Contact an authorised dealer.
1.57
ENG_UD64198_3
Témoins lumineux (HFE - Renault)
WARNING LIGHTS
(3/6)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
A
©
Warning light
This lights up when the ignition or engine is switched on and goes out as soon as the engine is running. It can light up in conjunction with other warn- ing lights and/or messages on the in- strument panel.
It means you should
drive very carefully
to an approved dealer as soon as possible. If you fail to follow this recommendation, you risk damaging your vehicle.
Ä
Toxic Fume Filter System
Warning Light
On vehicles which are equipped with it, this light comes on when the engine is started and, depending on the vehicle, when the ignition is switched off if the vehicle is in the engine standby phase
(refer to the information on the “Stop and Start function” in Section 2) then goes out.
– If it lights up continuously, consult your approved dealer as soon as possible;
– if it flashes, reduce the engine speed until the light stops flashing. Contact your approved Dealer as soon as possible.
Refer to the information on “Advice: antipollution, fuel economy and driving” in Section 2.
x
Anti-lock braking warning light
It lights up when the ignition or the engine is switched on and goes off after a few seconds.
If it lights up when you are driving, it indicates a fault in the anti-lock braking system.
Braking will then be as normal, without the ABS. Contact an approved Dealer as soon as possible.
Ô
Coolant temperature warning light
This lights up red when the ignition is switched on or the engine is started.
If it turns red, stop and let the engine idle for a minute or two.
The temperature should drop.
Otherwise, stop the engine. Let the engine cool down before checking the coolant.
Contact an approved Dealer.
1.58
ENG_UD64198_3
Témoins lumineux (HFE - Renault)
ABS ...........................................................
(current page)
ESC: electronic stability control .................
(current page)
WARNING LIGHTS
(4/6)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
A
Particle filter system warn- ing light (petrol version)
Refer to the “Special features of petrol versions” in Section 2.
Š ‰
Gear change indicator
This lights up to advise you to change to a higher gear (up arrow) or lower gear (down arrow).
Please refer to the information on
“Driving advice, Eco-driving” in
Section 2.
å
Indicator lightAirbag
This warning light will be dis- played on the instrument panel when the ignition is switched on or the engine is started, and will then go out after a few seconds.
If it does not come on when the ignition is switched on, or comes on when the engine is running, there is a fault in the system.
Contact your approved Dealer as soon as possible.
Ó
Brake pedal warning light
This lights up when the brake pedal should be depressed. Refer to the information on the “Automatic gear- box” in Section 2.
Please refer to the information on
“Driving advice, Eco-driving” in
Section 2.
}
Handbrake or electronic parking brake warning light
Refer to the information on the “Assisted parking brake” in Section 2.
É
Preheating warning light
(Diesel version)
This should come on when the ignition is switched on. It indicates that the heater plugs are in operation.
It goes out when preheating is complete. The engine can be started.
2
Door(s) open warning light
1.59
ENG_UD64198_3
Témoins lumineux (HFE - Renault) speed limiter ..............................................
(current page) cruise control .............................................
(current page)
Stop & Start ...............................................
(current page)
WARNING LIGHTS
(5/6)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
A
Engine standby warning light
Please see information in the paragraph on “Stop and Start Function” in
Section 2.
Unavailability of engine standby warning light
Please see information in the paragraph on “Stop and Start Function” in
Section 2.
Φ
Speed limiter and cruise control indicator lights
See the information on the “Speed limiter” and “Cruise control” in Section 2.
Adaptive cruise control warning light
Refer to the information on “Adaptive cruise control” in Section 2.
Tyre pressure monitoring system
Refer to the information on the “Tyre pressure monitoring system” in
Section 2.
Warning light for reagent level and faults in the ex- haust gas reduction system.
Refer to the information on “Reagent tank” in Section 1.
Mode warning light ECO
This comes on when ECO mode is activated.
Please refer to the information on
“Driving advice, ECO-driving” in
Section 2.
Freewheel indicator light
Please refer to the informa- tion on “Driving advice, ECO-driving” in
Section 2.
1.60
ENG_UD64198_3
Témoins lumineux (HFE - Renault)
WARNING LIGHTS
(6/6)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
Assisted parking brake fault light
Please refer to the information on the
“Assisted parking brake” in Section 2.
Emergency active brake assist
Refer to the information on “Driving cor- rection devices and aids” in Section 2.
Warning light for the elec- tronic stability program
(ESC) and traction control system
It lights up when the ignition or the engine is switched on and goes off after a few seconds.
There are several reasons for the warn- ing light to come on: please refer to the information on “Driver correction de- vices and aids” in Section 2.
B
On display
B
Passenger
Airbag ON
Refer to the information on
“Child safety: deactivating/activating the front passenger airbag” in Section 1.
¹
Passenger
Airbag OFF
Refer to the information on
“Child safety: deactivating/activating the front passenger airbag” in Section 1.
ß
Driver’s seat belt reminder and, depending on the vehi- cle, front passenger seat belt re- minder
This lights up when the ignition is switched on, then, if the driver's or front passenger's (if this seat is occupied) seat belt is not fastened and the vehicle has reached approximately 12.4 mph
(20 km/h), it flashes and a beep sounds for around 2 minutes.
Note:
an object placed on the passenger seat base can activate the warning light.
Rear seat belt reminder
(depending on vehicle)
Warning light
ß
comes on, accom- panied (depending on the vehicle) by a message indicating the number of fastened seat belts on the instrument panel for approximately 30 seconds, each time the vehicle is started, a door is opened or a rear seat belt is fas- tened/unfastened. Check that the rear passengers are wearing seat belts and that the number of seat belts shown as fastened corresponds to the number of rear seat places occupied.
1.61
ENG_UD64198_3
Témoins lumineux (HFE - Renault)
DISPLAYS AND INDICATORS
(1/2)
4
A
1
6
5
2
Instrument panel
A
You can customise your instrument panel with the content and colours of your choice.
For vehicles fitted with a navigation system, refer to the handbook for the equipment.
For vehicles not fitted with a naviga- tion system, refer to the information on
“Vehicle settings customisation menu” in Section 1.
Rev counter
4
(graduations x 1000)
3
Driving style indicator
3
Please refer to the information on “Eco- driving” in Section 2.
Speedometer
5
(km or miles per hour)
This is displayed differently according to how the instrument panel is custom- ised.
Overspeed buzzer
Depending on the vehicle and country, a buzzer sounds for approximately
10 seconds every 40 seconds, as long as the vehicle is travelling in excess of
72 mph (120 km/h).
Instrument panel in miles
(option to switch to km/h)
Vehicles not fitted with a navigation system
– With the ignition off, press the
OK
button
2
and the start button
6
;
– using control
1
, select “Settings”,
“Instrument panel”, then the unit;
– Press the
OK
button
2
to confirm.
To return to the previous mode, repeat the same operation.
1.62
ENG_UD54742_1
Tableau de bord : afficheurs et indicateurs (HFE - Renault) control instruments ....................................
(up to the end of the DU) indicators: instrument panel ..................................
(up to the end of the DU) instrument panel ........................................
(up to the end of the DU) warning lights.............................................
(up to the end of the DU) fuel level ....................................................
(current page) display .......................................................
(up to the end of the DU)
DISPLAYS AND INDICATORS
(2/2)
6
7
A
2
Vehicles fitted with a navigation system
On the multifunction screen, select
“System” , “User profile” and “Unit”.
Note:
In both cases, once the battery is switched off, the on-board computer automatically returns to the original unit of measurement.
Trip computer and warning system
Refer to the information on the “Trip computer and warning system” in
Section 1.
Coolant temperature indicator
6
Fuel level gauge
7
If the level is at the minimum, warn- ing light
M
integrated in the indica- tor comes on orange, accompanied by a beep. Fill up as soon as possible.
Engine oil level low warning
When the engine is started, the instru- ment panel display
A
alerts you when the minimum oil level is reached. Refer to the information on the “Engine oil level” in Section 4.
The first time the warning appears, it can be cleared by pressing the
OK
button
2
.
Subsequent warnings will disappear automatically after 30 seconds.
1.63
ENG_UD54742_1
Tableau de bord : afficheurs et indicateurs (HFE - Renault)
TRIP COMPUTER: general information
(1/2)
1
2
On-board computer
1
Depending on the vehicle, this includes the following functions:
– distance travelled;
– journey parameters;
– information messages;
– operating fault messages (associated with the
©
warning light);
– warning messages (associated with the
®
warning light);
All these functions are described on the following pages.
Display selection keys
2
Scroll through the following information by repeated short presses on the con- trol
2
(the display depends on the vehi- cle equipment and country): a) total mileage and trip mileage recorder; b) journey parameters:
– current fuel consumption;
– Estimated range with remaining fuel;
– distance travelled;
– average speed; c) mileage before service; d) tyre pressure reset; e) trip log, operating faults and informa- tion message readout; f) Estimated range with remaining rea- gent.
1.64
Trip computer
ENG_UD52326_4
Ordinateur de bord : généralités (HFE - Renault) control instruments ....................................
(up to the end of the DU) indicators: instrument panel ..................................
(up to the end of the DU) trip computer and warning system.............
(up to the end of the DU) instrument panel ........................................
(up to the end of the DU) warning lights.............................................
(up to the end of the DU) instrument panel messages.......................
(up to the end of the DU)
ON-BOARD COMPUTER: general information
(2/2)
3
Trip mileage resetting
With “trip mileage recorder” selected on the display, press key OK
3
until the mileage recorder resets to zero.
Interpreting some of the values displayed after resetting
The values showing average fuel consumption and average speed will become more stable and reliable the further you have travelled since the last time the Reset button was pressed.
The average fuel consumption may decrease when:
– the vehicle stops accelerating;
– the engine reaches its operating temperature (if the engine was cold when the reset key was pressed);
– when driving from an urban area onto the open road.
Resetting the journey parameters (reset button)
with the display showing one of the trip settings, press key OK
3
until the dis- play is reset to zero.
Automatic resetting of the journey parameters
Resetting occurs automatically when the maximum value of any of the parameters is exceeded.
ENG_UD52326_4
Ordinateur de bord : généralités (HFE - Renault)
1.65
ON-BOARD COMPUTER: trip settings
(1/5)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
Interpreting the display selected Examples of selections
101 778 km
112,4 km
Fuel used
8 l
Current
7,4 l/100
a) Total mileage and trip mileage recorder.
b) Journey parameters:
Fuel consumed since the last reset.
Current fuel consumption.
This value is displayed after a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) is reached.
1.66
trip computer and warning system.............
(up to the end of the DU) warning lights.............................................
(up to the end of the DU) instrument panel messages.......................
(up to the end of the DU) instrument panel ........................................
(up to the end of the DU)
ENG_UD52327_4
Ordinateur de bord : paramètres de voyage (HFE - Renault)
ON-BOARD COMPUTER: trip settings
(2/5)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
Examples of selections
Range
541 km
Distance
522 km
Average
123,4 km/h
Interpreting the display selected
Estimated range with remaining fuel.
The value is displayed after driving 400 metres.
Distance travelled
since last reset.
Average speed
since the last reset.
The value is displayed after driving 400 metres.
ENG_UD52327_4
Ordinateur de bord : paramètres de voyage (HFE - Renault)
1.67
ON-BOARD COMPUTER: trip settings
(3/5)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
Examples of selections
On-board computer with mileage- before-service message
SERVICE
INTERVALS
Service in
30 000 km / 12 mo
Service due in
300 km / 24 days
Service required
Interpreting the display selected c) Mileage before service or oil change.
Mileage before service
With the ignition switched on, the engine not running
and the display set to “Service Intervals”, press and hold the
OK
button for approximately 5 seconds to display the mileage before service (distance or time to the next service). When the distance value approaches its limit, there are several possible scenarios:
– range less than
930 miles (1,500 km)
or
one month:
the message “Service due in” is displayed accompanied by the nearest term (distance or time);
– range equal to
0 km/miles
or
service date reached:
the message “Service required” is displayed accompanied by warning light
©
.
The vehicle requires a service as soon as possible.
Reset
: to reset the distance before the next service, press and hold button
2
for approximately 10 seconds until the display shows the mileage before service permanently.
NB
: if a service is performed without changing the engine oil, only the mileage before the next service should be reset. In the event of an oil change, both the distance before the next service and the next oil change should be reset.
1.68
ENG_UD52327_4
Ordinateur de bord : paramètres de voyage (HFE - Renault)
TRIP COMPUTER: trip settings
(4/5)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
Examples of selections
On-board computer with distance before next service message (cntd.)
SERVICE
INTERVALS
Oil change in
30 000 km / 24 mo
Service due in
300 km / 24 days
Service required
Interpreting the display selected c) Mileage before service or oil change.
Mileage before service
With the ignition switched on, the engine not running
and the display set to “Mileage before service”, press and hold the
OK
button for approximately 5 seconds to display the mileage before the next service, then press the
2
button to view the mileage before the next oil change (distance or time remaining before the next service). When the distance value approaches its limit, there are several possible scenarios:
– distance/time remaining less than
900 miles (1,500 km)
or
one month
: the message “Service due in” is displayed, ac- companied by the nearest term (distance or time);
– range equal to
0 km/miles
or
service date reached:
the message “Service required” is displayed accompanied by warning light
©
.
The vehicle requires an oil change as soon as possible.
Depending on the vehicle, the mileage before an oil change varies according to the driving style (frequent driving at low speed, door-to-door journeys, extensive use at idling speed, towing a trailer, etc.). The distance remaining until the next oil change can therefore decrease more quickly in some cases than the actual distance travelled.
Resetting
: to reset the mileage before a service, press and hold button
2
for approximately 10 seconds until the display shows the range permanently.
NB
: if a service is performed without changing the engine oil, only the mileage before the next service should be reset. In the event of an oil change, both the distance before the next service and the next oil change should be reset.
1.69
ENG_UD52327_4
Ordinateur de bord : paramètres de voyage (HFE - Renault)
ON-BOARD COMPUTER: trip settings
(5/5)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
Examples of selections
+ Tyre pressure
Interpreting the display selected d) Reset the tyre pressure.
Refer to the information on the “Tyre pressure monitor- ing system” in Section 2.
No message memorised
Top Up AdBlue before 2400 km
e) Trip log.
Successive display:
– information messages (passenger airbag OFF etc.);
– operating fault messages (Check injection system, etc.).
f) Estimated range with remaining reagent.
Refer to the information on “Reagent tank” in Section 1.
1.70
ENG_UD52327_4
Ordinateur de bord : paramètres de voyage (HFE - Renault)
TRIP COMPUTER AND WARNING SYSTEM: information messages
These can help in the vehicle starting phase, or give information about a selection or a driving status.
Examples of information messages are given in the following pages.
Examples of messages Interpreting the display selected
« Parking brake on »
« Checking control functions »
«
Turn steering wheel + START
»
« Steering wheel not locked »
Indicates that the parking brake has been applied.
Displayed with the ignition on when the vehicle is running self-diagnostics.
Turn the steering wheel slightly whilst pressing the vehicle start button to unlock the steering column.
Indicates that the steering column has not been locked.
trip computer and warning system.............
(up to the end of the DU) warning lights.............................................
(up to the end of the DU) instrument panel messages.......................
(up to the end of the DU) instrument panel ........................................
(up to the end of the DU)
ENG_UD36674_1
Ordinateur de bord : messages d’information (HFE - Renault)
1.71
TRIP COMPUTER AND WARNING SYSTEM: operating fault messages
These appear with the
©
warning light and mean that you should drive very carefully to an authorised dealer as soon as possible. If you fail to follow this recommendation, you risk damaging your vehicle.
They disappear when the display selection key is pressed or after several seconds and are stored in the computer log. The
©
warning light stays on. Examples of operating fault messages are given in the following pages.
Examples of messages
“Clean diesel filter”
“Check lighting”
“Check vehicle”
“Check airbag”
“Check antipollution system”
Interpreting the display selected
Indicates the presence of water in the diesel filter; contact an approved Dealer as soon as possible.
Indicates a fault in the headlights.
Indicates a fault in one of the pedal sensors, battery management system or oil level sensor.
Indicates a fault in the restraint system in addition to the seat belts. In the event of an accident, it is possible that they may not be triggered.
– Indicates a fault in the vehicle’s particle filter system.
– Indicates a fault in the emissions reduction system when it is accompanied by the
Section 1.
warning light. Refer to the information on “Reagent tank” in
1.72
ENG_UD52328_2
Ordinateur de bord : messages d’anomalies de fonctionnement (HFE - Renault) trip computer and warning system.............
(up to the end of the DU) warning lights.............................................
(up to the end of the DU) instrument panel messages.......................
(up to the end of the DU) instrument panel ........................................
(up to the end of the DU)
TRIP COMPUTER AND WARNING SYSTEM: warning message
These appear with the
®
warning light and require you to stop immediately, for your own safety, as soon as traffic conditions allow. Stop your engine and do not restart it. Contact an approved Dealer.
Some examples of warning messages are given below.
Note:
the messages appear on the display either individually or al- ternately (when there are several messages to be displayed), and may be accompanied by a warning light and/or a beep.
Examples of messages
“Engine failure hazard”
Interpreting the display selected
Indicates an injection fault, the vehicle’s engine has overheated or there is a serious engine fault.
Indicates a fault in the steering or a problem with the four-wheel drive.
“Power steering fault”
“Braking system fault”
or
“Stop vehicle”
Indicates a fault in the braking system. Apply the electronic parking brake ma- nually and ensure that the vehicle is immobilised using a chock.
« Electric failure DANGER »
indicates a fault in the vehicle battery charging circuit (alternator etc.).
“Puncture”
Indicates a puncture on the tyre displayed on the instrument panel.
1.73
ENG_UD59141_2
Ordinateur de bord : messages d’alerte (HFE - Renault) trip computer and warning system.............
(up to the end of the DU) warning lights.............................................
(up to the end of the DU) instrument panel messages.......................
(up to the end of the DU) instrument panel ........................................
(up to the end of the DU) puncture.....................................................
(up to the end of the DU) beep...........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) operating faults ..........................................
(up to the end of the DU)
VEHICLE SETTINGS CUSTOMISATION MENU
(1/2)
1
Depending on the vehicle equipment, this function allows you to activate/de- activate and adjust some of the vehi- cle’s functions.
Adjusting the settings
Select the function to modify: a) unlocking the driver’s door; b) automatic locking of the doors while driving; c) hands-free function; d) indicator audio volume; e) internal welcome sound; f) external welcome; g) reading lamp in automatic mode; h) rear windscreen wiping in reverse gear; i) configuration of the driving style indi- cator.
Select “ON” or “OFF” to activate or de- activate the function.
For the “Light brightness intensity” function, select the intensity by press- ing “+” or “-”.
Vehicles fitted with a navigation system
Accessing the settings menu
With the vehicle at a standstill, using the multimedia screen
1
, select “Vehicle”,
“User settings” to access the various settings.
For safety reasons, carry out any adjustments when the vehicle is stationary.
1.74
vehicle settings customisation menu menu for customising the vehicle settings .
(up to the end of the DU) customising the vehicle settings ................
(up to the end of the DU) customised vehicle settings .......................
(up to the end of the DU)
ENG_UD64427_3
Menu de personnalisation des réglages du véhicule (HFE - Renault)
VEHICLE SETTINGS CUSTOMISATION MENU
(2/2)
2
3
Vehicles not fitted with a navigation system
4
Accessing the settings menu on display
2
With the vehicle at a standstill, press and hold the switch
3
OK
to access the settings menu.
Adjusting the settings
Browse using the control
4
to select the function to adjust: a) Auto door lock while driving; b) Unlock driver door only; c) Rear wiper when rear gear engaged; d) Front park assist; e) Automatic main beam lights; f) Blind spot alert; g) Blind spot alert; h) Rear park assist; i) PARKING ASSIST Volume; j) LANGUAGE; k) Colour.
=
function activated
<
function deactivated
Once a line has been selected, press the switch
3
OK
to adjust the function.
If you select either “PARKING ASSIST
Volume” or “LANGUAGE”, you will have to make a further selection (sound volume of the parking distance control or instrument panel language). In this case, make your selection and con- firm it by holding the switch
3
OK
– the
~
in selected value is shown by a front of the line.
To exit the menu, press the control
4
upwards or downwards. It may be nec- essary to carry out this operation sev- eral times.
The vehicle settings personalisation menu cannot be used when driving. At speed exceeding 12 mph
(20 km/h), the instrumental panel display switches automatically back to trip computer and warning system mode.
1.75
ENG_UD64427_3
Menu de personnalisation des réglages du véhicule (HFE - Renault)
STEERING WHEEL/POWER-ASSISTED STEERING
Power-assisted steering
1
Variable power-assisted steering
The variable power assisted steering system is equipped with an electronic control system which alters the level of assistance to suit the vehicle speed.
Steering is made easier during parking manoeuvres (for added comfort) while the force needed to steer increases progressively as the speed rises (for enhanced safety at high speeds).
Adjusting the steering wheel height and depth
Lower the lever
1
and position the steering wheel in the required position.
Then, raise the lever fully, beyond the point of resistance to lock the steering wheel.
Make sure that the steering wheel is correctly locked.
For safety reasons, only adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is station- ary.
Never leave the steering wheel at full lock while stationary.
With the engine switched off, or if there is a system fault, it is still possible to turn the steering wheel. The force required will be greater.
Do not switch off the engine when driving downhill and, as a general rule, when driving (the power-assisted steering and brake cannot operate normally).
1.76
ENG_UD39423_2
Volant de direction (HFE - Renault)
Steering wheel/Power-assisted steering steering wheel adjustment ...........................................
(up to the end of the DU) power-assisted steering.............................
(current page) variable power-assisted steering ...............
(current page)
CLOCK AND EXTERIOR TEMPERATURE
External temperature indicator
1
Special note:
When the exterior temperature is - 3 °C to + 3 °C, the
°C
characters flash (signalling a risk of ice on the road).
Display
1
Vehicles fitted with a multimedia screen, navigation systems etc.
The time and exterior temperature are displayed on the multimedia screen
1
.
Refer to the handbook for the equip- ment.
External temperature indicator
As ice formation is related to climatic exposure, local air humidity and temperature, the external temperature alone is not sufficient to detect ice.
If the electrical supply is cut (battery disconnected, broken supply wire, etc.), the clock will automatically go back to the right time after a few minutes once the system is capable of receiving information GPS.
1.77
ENG_UD54750_1
Heure et température extérieure (HFE - Renault)
Clock and outdoor temperature clock ..........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) clock ..........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) control instruments ....................................
(up to the end of the DU)
REAR VIEW MIRRORS
(1/2)
1
2
A
B C
3
Exterior rear view mirrors
Adjustment
Select the rear view mirror using switch
2
, then use button
1
to adjust it to the desired position.
Heated door mirrors
Mirror de-icing is carried out at the same time as rear screen de-icing.
Please refer to the information on “Manual air conditioning” and
“Automatic climate control” in Section 3.
Folding rear view mirrors
The door mirrors automatically fold in when the vehicle is locked (switch
3
in position
B
).
In any case, you can make the door mirrors fold in (switch
3
in position
C
) or fold out (switch
3
in position
A
).
Automatic mode is then deactivated.
To reactivate it, set the switch
3
to po- sition
B
.
Objects observed in the door mirror glass are actu- ally closer than they appear.
For your safety, take this into account in order to correctly assess the distance before any ma- noeuvre.
Welcome and goodbye function
Refer to the multimedia instructions to access the welcome and goodbye func- tion.
Activate or deactivate the function by selecting (ON or OFF).
Depending on the selected choice, the door mirrors will fold out:
– when the ignition is next switched on
(function deactivated);
– when the card is detected or the ve- hicle is unlocked (function activated).
For safety reasons, carry out any adjustments when the vehicle is not being driven.
1.78
ENG_UD64199_2
Rétroviseurs (HFE - Renault)
Rear view mirrors rear view mirrors ........................................
(up to the end of the DU)
REAR VIEW MIRRORS
(2/2)
4
5 6
Interior rear view mirror
Rear view mirror with lever
4
When driving at night, to avoid being dazzled by the headlights of the vehicle behind, depress the little lever located behind rear view mirror
4
.
Rear view mirror without lever
4
The rear-view mirror darkens automati- cally at night if you are being followed by a vehicle with its lights on.
Depending on the vehicle, you can acti- vate or disable this function by pressing the
6
button. The
5
warning light comes on when the function is active.
Note:
the function is reactivated once the engine is switched off and the doors are locked/unlocked.
ENG_UD64199_2
Rétroviseurs (HFE - Renault)
1.79
EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS
(1/6)
š
1
Side lights
Turn ring
3
until the symbol is opposite mark
2
. This indicator light on the instrument panel comes on.
2
1
3
á
Main beam headlights
With the dipped beam headlights lit, push stalk
1
. This indica- tor light on the instrument panel comes on.
To return to the dipped headlight posi- tion, pull the stalk
1
towards you again.
k
Dipped beam headlights
Manual operation
Turn ring
3
until the symbol is opposite mark
2
. This indicator light on the instrument panel comes on.
Automatic operation
Turn the ring
3
until the
AUTO
symbol is opposite the mark
2
: with the engine running, the dipped beam headlights switch on or off automatically depend- ing on the brightness of the light out- side, without any action on stalk
1
.
Before driving at night: check that the electrical equipment is operating cor- rectly. As a general precau- tion, check that the lights are not obscured (by dirt, mud, snow or ob- jects being transported).
When driving on the left in a left- hand drive vehicle (or vice versa), drivers must readjust their lights throughout their stay (see “Adjusting headlight beams” in Section 1).
1.80
ENG_UD64200_2
Éclairages et signalisations extérieures (HFE - Renault)
Exterior lighting and signals lighting: exterior .................................................
(up to the end of the DU) lights: side lights .............................................
(current page) signals and lights .......................................
(up to the end of the DU) lighting: instrument panel ..................................
(current page) lights: main beam headlights ..........................
(current page) lights: dipped beam headlights .......................
(current page)
EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS
(2/6)
Automatic main beam headlights
Depending on the vehicle, this system switches the main beam headlights on and off automatically. It uses a camera located behind the interior rear-view mirror to detect vehicles that are being followed and those coming in the oppo- site direction.
The main beam headlights come on au- tomatically if:
– exterior light is weak;
– no other vehicle or lighting is de- tected;
– the vehicle speed is above approxi- mately 25 mph (40 km/h).
If any of the above conditions are not fulfilled, the system switches to dipped beam headlights.
The “automatic main beam headlights” system should under no circumstances be used to replace driver atten- tion and responsibility with regard to vehicle lighting and adapting to light, visibility and traffic conditions.
1
The system may encounter difficul- ties under certain conditions, inclu- ding
:
– extreme weather conditions (rain, snow, fog, etc.);
– obstruction in front of the windscreen or camera;
– when a following or oncoming vehicle has weak or hidden lighting;
– incorrect settings for the front headlights;
– reflective systems;
– ...
4
Switching on
Vehicle fitted with a navigation system
On the multifunction screen
4
, select the “Vehicle” menu, “Driving assist- ance”, and “Automatic main beam lights”, and then choose “
ON
” or “
OFF
”.
1.81
ENG_UD64200_2
Éclairages et signalisations extérieures (HFE - Renault)
EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS
(3/6)
5
6
3
2
1
Vehicles not fitted with a navigation system
– With the vehicle at a standstill, press and hold the switch
5
OK
to access the settings menu;
– repeatedly press the control
6
up or down until you reach the “Driving as- sistance” menu. Press the switch
5
OK
;
– repeatedly press the control
6
up or down until you reach the “Automatic main beam lights” menu, then press the switch
5
OK
.
– press the
5
OK
switch again to acti- vate or deactivate the function.
Activation/deactivation
To activate
the automatic main beam headlights:
– turn the ring
3
until the
AUTO
symbol is opposite the mark
2
;
– push stalk
1
.
Warning light strument panel.
comes on the in-
To deactivate
the automatic main beam headlights:
– pull stalk
1
;
– or turn ring
3
to a position other than
AUTO
.
Warning light strument panel.
goes out on the in-
Note:
make sure the windscreen is not obscured (dirt, mud, snow, condensa- tion etc.).
1.82
Using the portable navigation system at night in the windscreen area below the camera may disturb the operation of the “automatic main beam headlights” system (risk of reflection on the windscreen).
Each time you start the engine, pull and then push the stalk
1
to reacti- vate the system.
ENG_UD64200_2
Éclairages et signalisations extérieures (HFE - Renault)
EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS
(4/6)
1
Daytime running lights function
The daytime running lights come on automatically with no action on stalk
1
when the engine is started, and they go off once the engine is switched off.
3
2
Operating faults
When the message “Check lighting” with warning light
©
is displayed and warning light k
flashes on the instrument panel, this indicates that there is a lighting fault.
Consult an approved dealer.
Operating faults
When the message “Check auto light- ing” appears on the instrument panel, the system is deactivated.
Consult an approved dealer.
Switching off the lights
There are two possibilities:
– manually, move ring
3
to position
0
;
– automatically, the lights will go out when the engine is switched off, the driver’s door is opened or the vehicle is locked. In this case, the next time the engine is started the lights will be switched back on according to the position of the ring
3
.
Lights-on reminder buzzer
A warning beep sounds when the driv- er’s door is opened to warn you that the lights are still on.
lights: fog lights ..............................................
(current page)
ENG_UD64200_2
Éclairages et signalisations extérieures (HFE - Renault)
1.83
EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS
(5/6)
“See-me-home lighting” function
This function allows you to briefly switch on the dipped beam headlights (to provide light when opening a gate, etc.).
With the engine and lights switched off and
the ring
3
in position
0
or
AUTO
, pull the stalk
1
towards you: the dipped beam headlights come on for approximately 30 seconds. To increase this duration, you may pull the stalk up to four times (total time restricted to ap- proximately two minutes). The mes- sage “Follow-me home for _ _ _” along with the time the lights will be on for is displayed on the instrument panel to confirm this action. You can then lock your vehicle.
To switch off the lights before they go out automatically, turn ring
3
to any position, then return it to the
AUTO
position .
Welcome and goodbye function
(depending on the vehicle)
When the function is activated, the rear side lights, interior lighting and wel- come lighting under the rear view mir- rors, accompanied by two flashes of the hazard warning lights, come on au- tomatically when the card is detected or the vehicle is unlocked.
They switch off automatically:
– approximately one minute after li- ghting up;
– when starting the engine based on the position of the lighting stalk; or
– upon locking the vehicle.
Activating/deactivating the function
From the multimedia screen, select
“Vehicle”, “User settings”, “External welcome”. Choose “
ON
” or “
OFF
” to activate or deactivate the function.
1.84
ENG_UD64200_2
Éclairages et signalisations extérieures (HFE - Renault)
EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS
(6/6)
2
1
Rear fog lights
Turn centre ring
7
on the stalk until the symbol faces mark
2
, then re- lease it.
7
Operation of the fog lights depends on the exterior lighting selected, and an indicator light will light up on the instrument panel.
Do not forget to switch off the fog lights when they are no longer needed, to avoid inconveniencing other road users.
g
Front fog lights
Turn centre ring
7
on stalk
1
until the symbol faces mark
2
, then re- lease it.
Operation of the fog lights depends on the exterior lighting position selected, and an indicator light will light up on the instrument panel.
Switching off the lights
Turn the ring
7
again until the mark
2
is opposite the symbol for the fog light that you wish to switch off. The corre- sponding indicator light on the instru- ment panel goes out.
The fog lights switch off when the exte- rior lights are switched off.
Cornering lights
(depending on vehicle)
Whenever the dipped beam headlights are on and under certain conditions (at speed, the steering wheel at an angle, in forward gear, the indicator lights on, etc.), when taking a corner one of the front fog lights will come on to light the inside of the bend.
When driving in fog or snow, or when transporting objects which are higher than the roof, the headlights do not come on automatically.
Switching on the fog lights remains the responsibility of the driver: the indicator lights on the instrument panel inform you whether the fog lights are lit (indicator light on) or not
(indicator light not on).
1.85
ENG_UD64200_2
Éclairages et signalisations extérieures (HFE - Renault)
AUDIBLE AND VISUAL SIGNALS
1
Direction indicators
Move stalk
1
parallel to the steering wheel and in the direction you are going to turn it.
A
One-touch mode
When driving, it is possible that the steering wheel may not be turned sufficiently to return the stalk automatically to its starting position.
In this case, briefly turn stalk
1
to the intermediate position, then release it: the stalk returns to its original point and the indicator light flashes three times.
Horn
Press the steering wheel boss
A
to ac- tivate the horn.
Headlight flasher
Pull stalk
1
towards you to flash the headlights.
2
é
Hazard warning lights
Press switch
2
. This switch activates all four direction indicators and the side indicator lights simultaneously.
It must only be used in an emergency to warn drivers of other vehicles that you have had to stop in an area where stopping is prohibited or unexpected or that you are obliged to drive under special conditions.
Depending on the vehicle, the hazard warning lights may come on automatically under heavy deceleration. You can switch them off by pressing switch
2
.
1.86
Audible and visual signals
ENG_UD36681_1
Avertisseurs sonores et lumineux (HFE - Renault) audible and visual signals..........................
(up to the end of the DU) indicators ...................................................
(up to the end of the DU) lighting: exterior .................................................
(up to the end of the DU) lights: hazard warning ....................................
(up to the end of the DU) indicators: direction indicators ...............................
(up to the end of the DU) hazard warning lights signal ......................
(up to the end of the DU) signals and lights .......................................
(up to the end of the DU) hazard warning lights signal ......................
(up to the end of the DU) lights: direction indicators ...............................
(up to the end of the DU) horn ...........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) horn: flash .....................................................
(up to the end of the DU)
HEADLIGHT BEAM ADJUSTMENT
(1/2)
For manual settings
Examples of adjustment positions of control
A
according to the load and the headlight
Halogen headlights LED headlight
A
Driver alone or with front passenger
0 0
On vehicles fitted with this function, control
A
allows you to adjust the height of the beams according to the load.
Turn control
A
downwards to lower the headlights and upwards to raise them.
All seats occupied
1 1
Driver with passengers and luggage (or load) reaching the maximum permissible all-up weight
Driver without passengers and luggage (or load) reaching the maximum permissible all-up weight
3
and
4
4 3
4
The table below gives some examples. In all cases, adjust control
A
according to the vehicle load so that the road can be seen and other drivers are not dazzled.
For vehicles not fitted with a con- trol
A
, the headlight adjustment is automatic, depending on the vehi- cle load.
1.87
ENG_UD50208_3
Réglage des faisceaux (HFE - Renault)
Headlight beam adjustment lighting: exterior .................................................
(up to the end of the DU) lights: adjusting ..............................................
(up to the end of the DU) lights adjustment ...........................................
(up to the end of the DU) headlight beam adjustment .......................
(up to the end of the DU) signals and lights .......................................
(up to the end of the DU) electric beam height adjustment ................
(up to the end of the DU)
HEADLIGHT BEAM ADJUSTMENT
(2/2)
When driving on the left in a left- hand drive vehicle (or vice versa), you must adjust your lights tempo- rarily during your stay.
1
B
Temporary adjustment for vehicles fitted with halogen headlights
Open the bonnet and identify the mark- ing
B
next to one of the front headlight projectors.
For each headlight, using a screw- driver, turn the screw
1
by a quarter turn towards the - symbol to lower the beams.
Return to the original position once your trip is over: turn the screw
1
a quarter of a turn towards the + symbol to raise the beams.
1.88
ENG_UD50208_3
Réglage des faisceaux (HFE - Renault)
WINDSCREEN WASH, WIPE
(1/6)
1
1
A
E
B
C
D
2
Vehicle fitted with intermittent windscreen wipers
A
single sweep
A short push will trigger one sweep of the wipers.
B
stable
C
intermittent wiping
The wipers will pause for several seconds between sweeps. It is possible to change the time between sweeps by turning ring
2
.
D
slow continuous wiping
E
fast continuous wiping
Special note
When driving the vehicle
, the wiping speed slows down whenever the vehicle stops. For example, fast wiping speed will slow to normal wiping speed.
As soon as the vehicle moves off, wiping will return to the speed originally selected.
If stalk
1
is operated, it overrides and cancels the automatic function.
Positions
A
,
C
and
D
are accessible with the ignition on. Position
E
is accessible only when the engine is running.
Efficiency of a wiper blade
Check the condition of the wiper blades. How long they last depends on you:
– it must remain clean: clean the blade and the screen regularly with soapy water;
– do not use it when the screen is dry;
– free it from the screen when it has not been used for a long time.
In any event, replace them as soon as they begin to lose efficiency: ap- proximately every year (refer to the information on “Wiper blades: re- placement” in section 5).
Precautions for using the wipers
– In freezing or snowy weather, clear the screen before starting the wipers (risk of motor over- heating);
– ensure that no objects are ob- structing the travel of the blade.
1.89
ENG_UD59142_2
Essuie-vitre / lave-vitre avant (HFE - Renault)
Washers, wipers wipers ........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) windscreen washer ....................................
(up to the end of the DU) precautions during use ..............................
(up to the end of the DU)
WINDSCREEN WASH, WIPE
(2/6)
1
A
B
C
E
D
1
2
F
G
Vehicle fitted with front windscreen wiper rain sensor
The rain sensor is located on the winds- creen, in front of the interior rear-view mirror.
A
single sweep
A short push will trigger one sweep of the wipers.
B
stop
C
automatic wiper function
When this position is selected, the system detects water on the wind- screen and triggers the wipers at a suitable wiping speed. It is possi- ble to change the triggering thresh- old and the time sweeps by turning ring
2
:
–
F
: minimum sensitivity
–
G
: maximum sensitivity
The higher the sensitivity, the quic- ker the wipers will react and the faster the wipe.
When activating automatic wiping or when increasing sensitivity, one sweep of the blades is performed.
Note:
– the rain sensor is only intended as a driving aid. In the event of re- duced visibility, the driver should manually activate the wipers;
– In foggy weather or during snow- falls, wiping is not automatically triggered and remains under the driver’s control;
– in the event of temperatures below zero, automatic wiping is not activated when the vehicle is started. It is automatically acti- vated as soon as the vehicle ex- ceeds a certain speed (approxi- mately 5 mph (8 km/h));
– do not activate automatic wiping in dry weather;
– fully de-ice the windscreen before activating automatic wiping.
1.90
ENG_UD59142_2
Essuie-vitre / lave-vitre avant (HFE - Renault) wiper blades ..............................................
(current page)
WINDSCREEN WASH, WIPE
(3/6)
Operating fault
In the event of a malfunction of the automatic wiping, the wiper is set to intermittent wiping. Contact an au- thorised dealer.
The operation of the rain sensor can be disturbed in the event of:
– damaged windscreen wipers; a film of water or traces left by a blade in the sensor’s detection zone may increase the response time of the automatic wipers, or increase the wiping frequency;
– a windscreen with any chip or crack level with the sensor, or a windscreen covered in dust, dirt, insects, ice, the use of washing wax and water-repellent chemi- cals; the windscreen wiper will be less sensitive or may even not react at all.
1
D
slow continuous wiping
E
fast continuous wiping
A
B
E
C
D
Special note
When driving the vehicle
, the wiping speed slows down whenever the ve- hicle stops. For example, fast wiping speed will slow to normal wiping speed.
As soon as the vehicle moves off, wiping will return to the speed originally selected.
If stalk
1
is operated, it overrides and cancels the automatic function.
Precautions
– In the event of ice, check whether the blades are stuck to the windscreen before operating the wiping mecha- nism. If you activate the wipers while the blades are stuck down with ice, you may risk damaging both the blade and the wiper motor.
– Do not activate the wipers on a dry screen. This will lead to the prema- ture wear or damage to the blades.
Positions
A
and
D
are accessible with the ignition on. Positions
C
and
E
are accessible only with the engine running.
ENG_UD59142_2
Essuie-vitre / lave-vitre avant (HFE - Renault)
1.91
operating faults ..........................................
(current page)
WINDSCREEN WASH, WIPE
(4/6)
Specific front wiper position
(service position)
This position enables the blades to be lifted to remove them from the winds- creen.
It may be useful to:
– to clean the blades;
– to release the blades from the winds- creen in winter;
– replace the blades (please refer to the information on “Wiper blades” in
Section 5).
With the ignition on and the engine off, lower the windscreen wiper stalk fully
(fast continuous wipe position). The wiper arms stop in a position away from the bonnet.
To return the blades to position, make sure they have been placed on the windscreen, then move the stalk to po- sition
B
(stop) with the ignition on.
Before switching on the ignition, place the wipers on the windscreen.
Otherwise, there may a risk of damage to the bonnet or the wipers when they are switched on.
Note:
after replacement, to reposition the blades correctly, make sure the blades are resting on the windscreen, switch on the ignition and activate the wiper control.
In the event of obstacles on the windscreen (dirt, snow, ice etc.), clean the windscreen (including the central area located behind the in- terior rear view mirror) before oper- ating the wipers (risk of motor over- heating).
If an object is preventing a blade from moving, it may stop function- ing. Remove the obstacle and react- ivate the wiper using the wiper stalk.
1
A
B
Before any action involving the windscreen (washing the vehicle, de-icing, cleaning the windscreen, etc.) return stalk
1
to position
B
(stop).
Risk of injury and/or damage
.
1.92
ENG_UD59142_2
Essuie-vitre / lave-vitre avant (HFE - Renault) screen wash/wipe replacing blades ...................................
(current page)
WINDSCREEN WASH, WIPE
(5/6)
1
A
Note:
in temperatures below zero, the washer liquid may freeze on the wind- screen, reducing visibility. Heat the windscreen using the demister control before cleaning.
E
D
B
C
Windscreen washer
With the ignition on
, pull stalk
1
then release.
A brief pull will trigger a single sweep of the wipers, in addition to the windscreen washer.
A longer pull will trigger three sweeps of the wipers followed, a few seconds later, by a fourth, in addition to the windscreen washer.
When working in the engine compartment, ensure that the windscreen wiper stalk is in position
B
(stop).
Risk of injury
.
ENG_UD59142_2
Essuie-vitre / lave-vitre avant (HFE - Renault) wiper blades ..............................................
(current page) screen wash/wipe ......................................
(current page) windscreen washer ....................................
(current page)
1.93
WINDSCREEN WASH, WIPE
(6/6)
1
Headlight washers
A
B
E
C
D
Note
To ensure the headlight washers op- erate correctly in winter, remove snow from the jet trims and de-ice the jet trims using an aerosol de-icer.
You are recommended to regularly remove dirt encrusted on the headlight glass.
When the minimum windscreen washer fluid level is reached, the headlight washer system may be deprimed.
Fill the windscreen washer fluid and then activate the windscreen washer,
with the engine running
, to reprime the system.
Headlights on
On equipped vehicles, hold stalk
1
pulled towards you for about 2 seconds
- the headlight washers and winds- creen washers will be activated at the same time.
The headlight washers are also activa- ted after three prolonged movements on the front windscreen washer control.
When working in the engine compartment, ensure that the windscreen wiper stalk is in position
B
(stop).
Risk of injury.
1.94
ENG_UD59142_2
Essuie-vitre / lave-vitre avant (HFE - Renault)
REAR SCREEN WASH, WIPE
(1/2)
1
2
3
To stop the operation, pivot ring
3
again.
Note:
when washing using a roller type car wash, return the ring
3
on the stalk
1
to the stop position to deactivate automatic wiping.
Follow usage recommendations.
Y
Rear screen wiper
With the ignition on, turn ring
3
on stalk
1
to align the symbol with mark
2
.
– stop;
– intermittent wiping.
The wipers will pause for several seconds between sweeps. Wiping frequency varies with vehicle speed;
– slow continuous wiping.
Do not use the wiper arm to open or close the tailgate.
Before any action involving the rear screen (washing the vehicle, de-icing, clean- ing, etc.) return stalk
1
to the stop position.
Risk of injury and/or damage
.
Efficiency of a wiper blade
Check the condition of the wiper blades. How long they last depends on you:
– it must remain clean: clean the blade and the screen regularly with soapy water;
– do not use it when the screen is dry;
– free it from the screen when it has not been used for a long time.
In any event, replace them as soon as they begin to lose efficiency: ap- proximately every year (refer to the information on “Wiper blades: re- placement” in section 5).
Precautions for using the wipers
– In freezing or snowy weather, clear the screen before starting the wipers (risk of motor over- heating);
– ensure that no objects are ob- structing the travel of the blade.
1.95
ENG_UD59143_2
Essuie-vitre / Lave-vitre arrière (HFE - Renault) wipers ........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) windscreen washer ....................................
(up to the end of the DU)
REAR SCREEN WASH, WIPE
(2/2)
Activation/deactivation of the rear screen wiper
(depending on the vehicle)
Engaging reverse gear triggers inter- mittent wiping (if the front wipers are in operation). If your vehicle is fitted with a vehicle settings customisation menu, you can opt to activate or deactivate this function. To do this, refer to the in- formation on the “Vehicle settings cus- tomisation menu” in Section 1; “Rear wiping in reverse gear”.
In the event of obstacles present on the rear window (dirt, snow, etc.), the wiper will try to sweep away all the obstacles.
If an obstacle prevents the blade from moving, it can be stopped. Remove the obstacle, wait for around 30 seconds and reactivate the wiper using the wiper stalk.
Precautions
– In the event of ice, check that the blades are not stuck to the wind- screen before operating the wipers.
If you activate the wiper while the blade is blocked by ice, you risk damaging both the blade and the wiping motor.
– Do not operate the wipers on a dry screen. This will lead to the prema- ture wear or damage to the blades.
1
p
Rear screen wash/wipe
With the ignition on, push and hold stalk
1
, then release.
A longer action will trigger three sweeps of the wipers followed, a few seconds later, by a fourth, in addition to the wind- screen washer.
1.96
ENG_UD59143_2
Essuie-vitre / Lave-vitre arrière (HFE - Renault)
TANK
(1/3)
1
3 2
1
A
2
3
Fuel tank
Useable tank capacity:
– Approximately
12.1 gal (55 litres)
or
14.3 gal (65 litres)
for 2-wheel ver- sions, depending on the vehicle;
–
14.3 gal (65 litres)
for four-wheel drive models.
With the vehicle unlocked, to open cover
1
, press area
A
then release. The cover
1
opens.
Use the cap holder
2
on the flap
1
during filling to hold the cap
3
in place.
After filling, check that the cap and cover are closed.
Do not wash the filler area with a high-pressure washer.
Filler cap: this is specific.
If you have to replace it, make sure it is identical to the original cap. Contact an approved Dealer.
Never place the cap near a source of heat or flame.
Do not wash the filler area with a high-pressure washer.
1.97
ENG_UD64373_2
Réservoir carburant (HFE - Renault)
Fuel tank (filling with fuel) fuel tank capacity .......................................
(up to the end of the DU) fuel grade ....................................................
fuel
(up to the end of the DU) filling .....................................................
(up to the end of the DU) fuel tank capacity ................................................
(current page) fuel filler cap ..............................................
(up to the end of the DU)
TANK
(2/3)
Fuel grade
Use a high-grade fuel
that complies with the legislation in force in each country and which
must
comply with the specifications given on the label on the cover
A
. Refer to the information on
“Engine specifications” in Section 6.
Petrol version
It is
essential
to use unleaded petrol.
The octane rating (RON) must comply with the information given on the label on the cover
A
. Refer to Section 6 for information on “Engine specifications”.
Diesel version
Only
use diesel fuel which complies with the information on the label located inside the cover
A
.
Filling with fuel
With the ignition off, insert the nozzle and insert it
fully
before turning it on to fill the fuel tank (risk of splashing).
Keep the nozzle in this position throughout the entire filling operation.
When the pump cuts out automatically at the end of the filling procedure, a maximum of two further filling attempts may be made, as there must be sufficient space in the fuel tank to allow for expansion.
Make sure that no water enters the fuel tank during filling. The cover
A
and its surround must remain clean.
Petrol versions
Using leaded petrol will damage the antipollution system and may lead to a loss of warranty.
To ensure that the fuel tank is not filled with leaded petrol, the fuel tank filler neck consists of a restrictor fitted with a safety system which
only allows a nozzle for unleaded petrol to be used
(at the pump).
Fuel types that conform to European standards with which the engines of vehicles sold in Europe are compat- ible: refer to the “Engine specifica- tions” in section 6.
Vehicle fitted with the Stop and
Start function
To fill up with fuel, the engine must be stopped (and not on standby): stop the engine (Please See
“Starting, stopping the engine” in
Section 2).
Do not mix even small amounts of petrol (unleaded or E85) with diesel.
Do not use ethanol-based fuel if your vehicle is not compatible with this fuel.
Do
not
add reagent to the fuel, otherwise you risk damaging the engine (refer to the information on
“Reagent Tank” in section 1).
If you wish to add an additive to the fuel, use a product approved by our
Technical Department.
Consult an approved dealer.
1.98
ENG_UD64373_2
Réservoir carburant (HFE - Renault)
TANK (3/3)
Running out of fuel on diesel versions
Vehicles with key/remote control
– Put the ignition key in “On” position
M
(please see the information on the “Ignition switch” in Section
2) and wait for a few minutes before starting, to enable the fuel circuit to be primed;
– turn the key to position
D
. If the engine does not start, repeat the procedure.
– If the engine does not start after sev- eral attempts, please contact an au- thorised dealer.
4
Vehicles with card
With the card in the passenger com- partment, press the start button
4
with- out pressing any of the pedals. Wait a few minutes before starting. This will enable the fuel circuit to be primed. If the engine does not start, repeat the procedure.
If the engine does not start after several attempts, please contact an authorised dealer.
No modifications whatsoever are permitted on any part of the fuel supply system (electronic units, wiring, fuel circuit, injectors, protective covers, etc.) as this may be dangerous (unless undertaken by qualified Network personnel).
Persistent fuel odour
If you notice a persistent fuel odour you should:
– stop the vehicle as soon as traffic conditions allow and switch off the ignition;
– switch on the hazard warning lights and ask your passengers to leave the vehicle and stay clear of the traffic;
– contact an approved Dealer.
1.99
ENG_UD64373_2
Réservoir carburant (HFE - Renault)
REAGENT TANK
(1/4)
Please ensure that you comply with the legislation of your country. It is impor- tant to remember that failure to respect regulations in force could lead to legal action being taken against the vehicle owner.
Operating principle
The reagent is intended for diesel en- gines fitted with the
SCR
(selective cat- alytic reduction) system.
Using a reagent reduces the quantity of nitrogen oxides in exhaust gases.
Reagent consumption in real time de- pends on vehicle usage conditions, the equipment fitted, and driving style.
Reagent quality
Use
only reagents which conform to standard ISO 22241
and in accor- dance with the mark on the tank filler cap.
1
A
Filling
Useable capacity of the tank: 3.52 gal
(16 litres)
approximately.
With the ignition switched off, open the cover
A
, then unscrew the cap
1
.
Note:
Ammonium hydroxide vapour may escape from the cap opening when the tank temperature is high.
Vehicle fitted with the Stop and
Start function
To fill up with reagent, the engine must be stopped (and not on standby): stop the engine (please see “Starting, stopping the engine” in Section 2).
If the “XXX MILES (XXX
KM) Failure Top up AdBlue” warning message appears, fill the reagent tank and refer to the filling instructions.
Risk of immobilisation of the ve- hicle.
Filler cap: this is specific.
If you have to replace it, make sure it is identical to the original cap. Contact an approved Dealer. Do not wash the filler area with a high pressure washer.
The reagent must not come into contact with eyes or skin. If it does, wash the affected area with plenty of cold water. If necessary, consult a doctor.
1.100
ENG_UD68350_4
Réservoir réactif (HFE - Renault)
Reagent tank reagent tank cap ........................................
(up to the end of the DU) reagent tank capacity ................................
(up to the end of the DU) reagent quality ...........................................
(up to the end of the DU) filling with reagent ......................................
(up to the end of the DU) reagent (tank) ............................................
(up to the end of the DU) reagent tank...............................................
(up to the end of the DU) reagent tank capacity ................................
(up to the end of the DU)
SCR: selective catalytic reduction .............
(up to the end of the DU)
REAGENT TANK
(2/4)
Filling (continued)
The tank can be filled at the pump. With the ignition off, insert the nozzle and insert it
fully
before turning it on to fill the fuel tank (risk of splashing). Keep the nozzle in this position throughout the entire filling operation.
When the pump cuts out automatically at the end of the filling procedure, a maximum of two further filling attempts may be made, as there must be suffi- cient space in the fuel tank to allow for expansion.
In other filling cases, it is essential to read the information shown on the rea- gent container (e.g. the can or bottle).
Precautions for use
When filling:
–
handle the reagent with care. They can damage clothes, shoes, body- work components etc.;
– make sure that no water enters the fuel tank.
If the reagent overflows, or contami- nates any paintwork, clean the affected area quickly with plenty of cold water and a soft cloth.
Note:
If the reagent crystallises, use a soft sponge.
In extreme cold weather conditions
In frosty weather conditions, the rea- gent tank should be refilled when the
indicator and the message “Top up AdBlue before 1200 km” appear on the instrument panel.
Special cases
The reagent fluid freezes below about
-10°C.
In these conditions, do not attempt fill- ing when the fluid is frozen. In the event of needing to top up or fill the tank
on), park the ve- with reagent ( hicle in a hotter location if possible so that the reagent becomes liquid again.
Otherwise, have a qualified profes- sional top up or fill up with reagent fluid.
After filling the reagent tank, check that the cap and cover are closed, start the engine and
WAIT 10 sec- onds with the vehicle stationary, engine running
before setting off again.
If this operation is not carried out, the filling of the tank will not be taken into account automatically until after several dozens of minutes of driving.
The message “--- Top up AdBlue” and/or the warning lights will con- tinue to appear until the filling has been registered by the system.
No work whatsoever is permitted on any part of the system. To prevent damage, only qualified per- sonnel from our network may work on the system.
1.101
ENG_UD68350_4
Réservoir réactif (HFE - Renault)
REAGENT TANK
(3/4)
Maintenance/Range
The information displayed on the instrument panel may be accompanied by a beep.
Indicator lights
Message
– “Top Up AdBlue before 2400 km”
What to do?
When the message is displayed when the ignition is switched on, you have
less than 1,488 miles (2,400 km) range.
Refill, or have an Approved Dealer
refill the reagent
in the tank.
appears.
“Top up AdBlue before 1200 km”
When the message is displayed when the ignition is switched on, you have
between 744 miles (1,200 km) and 496 miles
(800 km) range.
Refill, or have an Approved Dealer
refill the reagent
in the tank.
appears.
“XXX MILES (XXX KM) Failure Top up
AdBlue”
The message is displayed when the ignition is switched on and is repeated:
– Approximately every 62 miles (100 km), you have
between about 496 miles (800 km) and 124 miles (200 km) range
;
– Approximately every 31 miles (50 km), you have
less than
124 miles (200 km) range
.
In any event, fill or have an Approved Dealer
fill the reagent tank as soon as possible.
flashes
“0 MILES (0 KM) Failure Top up AdBlue”
The engine will not start.
To restart, you must fill the reagent tank yourself.
1.102
ENG_UD68350_4
Réservoir réactif (HFE - Renault)
REAGENT TANK
(4/4)
System fault
When the indicator lights light up, this may be accompanied by a beep.
Indicator lights Message
and
©
come on.
“Check anti-pollution system”
“AdBlue quality to check”
“AdBlue injection to check”
Readings
Indicates a fault in the system. Contact your approved dealer as soon as possible.
and
©
come on.
“XXX MILES (XXX KM) Failure antipollu- tion”
Indicates a system fault and that in
less than
496 miles (800 km) it will become impossible to restart the vehicle
.
These warnings are repeated:
– every 62 miles (100 km) until there are
between
500 miles (800 km) and 124 miles (200 km) re- maining
until the vehicle cannot be restarted;
– Every 31 miles (50 km) when there is
less than
124 miles (200 km) left
before the vehicle cannot be restarted.
Contact your approved dealer as soon as possible.
and
©
come on.
“0 MILES (0 KM) Failure antipollution”
Indicates that after the ignition is switched off
the ve- hicle will not restart
. Call an approved Dealer.
1.103
ENG_UD68350_4
Réservoir réactif (HFE - Renault)
1.104
ENG_UD36645_1
Filler NU (HFE - Renault)
Section 2: Driving
(Advice on use relating to fuel economy and the environment)
2.1
ENG_UD68665_6
Sommaire 2 (HFE - Renault)
RUNNING IN
Petrol version
For the first
600 miles
(1,000 km), do not exceed 78 mph (130 km/h) in the highest gear, or 3,000 to 3,500 rpm.
You may only expect top performance from your vehicle after approximately
1,800 miles (3,000 km)
.
Service intervals:
refer to the
Maintenance Document for your vehicle.
Diesel version
For the first
1,000 miles (1,500 km),
do not exceed 80 mph (130 km/h) in the highest gear, or 2,500 rpm. After completing this mileage you may drive faster, although you may only expect top performance after approximately
3,600 miles (6,000 km).
During the running in period, do not accelerate hard while the engine is still cold and do not let the engine over-rev.
Service intervals:
refer to the
Maintenance Document for your vehicle.
2.2
Running in running in ...................................................
(current page) driving ........................................................
(up to the end of the DU)
ENG_UD40800_2
Rodage (HFE - BFB - Renault)
STARTING, STOPPING THE ENGINE: vehicle with key
É
Diesel versions
Turn the ignition key to the
“Ignition on” position
M
, and hold this position until the engine pre- heating light goes off;
– turn the key to starter position
D without depressing the accel- erator pedal
;
– release the key as soon as the engine starts.
Special note:
if starting the engine when the outdoor temperature is very low (below - 10 ° C): hold down the clutch pedal until the engine starts.
Starting the engine
Petrol versions
– Activate the starter
without ac- celerating
;
– release the key as soon as the engine starts.
steering.
Never start your vehicle while freewheeling on a gradient. Risk of non-ac- tivation of power-assisted
There is a risk of accidents.
Never switch off the igni- tion before the vehicle has stopped completely. Once the engine has stopped, the brake servo, power-assisted steer- ing, etc. and the passive safety de- vices such as air bags and preten- sioners will no longer operate.
Stopping the engine
With the engine idling, turn the key to the “Stop” position
St
.
Driver’s responsibility when parking or stopping the vehicle
Never leave an animal, child or adult who is not self-suffi- cient alone in your vehicle, even for a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves or to others by starting the engine, activating equipment such as the electric windows or locking the doors, for example.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather, please remember that the tempera- ture inside the passenger compart- ment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY
.
2.3
ENG_UD39760_2
Démarrage, arrêt moteur : véhicule avec clé (HFE - Renault)
Starting, stopping the engine: vehicle with key/remote control unit stopping the engine ...................................
(up to the end of the DU) driving ........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) starting the engine .....................................
(up to the end of the DU)
STARTING, STOPPING THE ENGINE: vehicle with card
(1/3)
2
“Hands-free” starting with the tailgate open
In this case, the card should not be lo- cated in the luggage compartment, to prevent the risk of loss.
1
The card must be inserted in detection zone
1
.
To start:
– vehicles with an automatic gearbox, place the lever in position
P
, depress the brake pedal and press button
2
;
– vehicles with a manual gearbox, depress the brake or clutch pedal and press the button
2
. If a gear is engaged, the vehicle may only be started by depressing the clutch pedal.
Special features
– If one of starting conditions is not ap- plied, the message “Press brake +
START” or “Press clutch + START” or “Select P” is displayed on the in- strument panel;
– in some cases, it will be necessary to move the steering wheel while press- ing the start button
1
to assist in un- locking the steering column. A mes- sage on the instrument panel “Turn steeringwheel + START” warns of this.
Driver’s responsibility when parking or stopping the vehicle
Never leave an animal, child or adult who is not self-suffi- cient alone in your vehicle, even for a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves or to others by starting the engine, activating equipment such as the electric windows or locking the doors, for example.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather, please remember that the tempera- ture inside the passenger compart- ment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY
.
2.4
Starting, stopping the engine: vehicle with card stopping the engine ...................................
(up to the end of the DU) engine start/stop button .............................
(up to the end of the DU) starting the engine .....................................
(up to the end of the DU) driving ........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) child safety.................................................
(current page) switching on the vehicle ignition ................
(up to the end of the DU) card: use ....................................................
(up to the end of the DU)
ENG_UD54764_1
Démarrage, arrêt du moteur (HFE - Renault)
STARTING, STOPPING THE ENGINE: vehicle with card
(2/3)
2
3
Depress the brake or clutch pedal, then place the card
3
(logo side) in contact with the start button
2
for around 2 sec- onds. Press the
2
button to start the ve- hicle. The message goes out.
Once you have gained access to your vehicle, you may use some of its func- tions (radio, navigation, wipers, etc.).
To use the other functions, with the card in the passenger compartment, press the
2
button without pressing the pedals.
Operating faults
In certain cases, the hands-free card may not work:
– when the card battery is drained etc.;
– near to appliances operating on the same frequency as the card (monitor, mobile phone, video game, etc.);
– vehicle located in a high electromagnetic radiation zone.
The message “Place card close START and push” appears on the instrument panel.
Never switch off the igni- tion before the vehicle has stopped completely. Once the engine has stopped, the brake servo, power-assisted steer- ing etc., and the passive safety de- vices such as the airbags and pre- tensioners will no longer operate.
Never leave your vehicle with the card in the reader or in the passenger com- partment while there is a child (or an animal) in the vehicle, even for a short while.
They may pose a risk to themselves or to others by starting the engine.
Risk of serious injury.
2.5
ENG_UD54764_1
Démarrage, arrêt du moteur (HFE - Renault)
STARTING, STOPPING THE ENGINE: vehicle with card
(3/3)
2
If the card is no longer in the passenger compartment or if the card’s battery is low when you try to switch the engine off, the message “No keycard Press and hold” appears on the instrument panel: press button
2
for longer than two seconds. If the card is no longer in the passenger compartment, make sure you can retrieve it before press- ing and holding the button. Without the card, you will not be able to restart the vehicle.
With the engine switched off, any accessories being used (radio, etc.) will continue to function for approximately
10 minutes.
When the driver’s door is opened, the accessories stop working.
Conditions for stopping the engine
The vehicle must stationary, with the lever positioned in
N
or
P
for vehicles with an automatic transmission.
With the card in the vehicle, press button
2
: the engine stops. The steer- ing column is locked when the driver’s door is opened or the vehicle is locked.
Never switch off the igni- tion before the vehicle has stopped completely. Once the engine has stopped, the brake servo, power-assisted steer- ing etc., and the passive safety de- vices such as the airbags and pre- tensioners will no longer operate.
When you leave your vehi- cle, especially if you have your card with you, check that the engine is com- pletely switched off.
Driver’s responsibility when parking or stopping the vehicle
Never leave an animal, child or adult who is not self-suffi- cient alone in your vehicle, even for a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves or to others by starting the engine, activating equipment such as the electric windows or locking the doors, for example.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather, please remember that the tempera- ture inside the passenger compart- ment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY
.
2.6
ENG_UD54764_1
Démarrage, arrêt du moteur (HFE - Renault)
FUNCTION STOP AND START
(1/4)
This system enables a reduced fuel consumption and lower greenhouse gas emissions.
The system is activated automatically when the vehicle is started.
While driving, the system stops the engine (standby) when the vehicle is at a standstill (traffic jam, traffic lights, etc).
Conditions for engine standby
The vehicle has set off from where it was parked;
For automatic gearboxes:
– the gearbox is in position D, M or N; and
– the brake pedal is depressed (suffi- ciently hard); and
– the accelerator pedal is not de- pressed; and
– the speed is zero for around
1 second.
The engine remains on standby if posi- tion P is selected, or if position N is se- lected with the handbrake engaged and the brake pedal released.
For manual gearboxes:
– the gearbox is in neutral; and
– the clutch pedal is released. If the
flashes, this warning light means that the clutch pedal is not sufficiently released; and
– the vehicle speed is less than ap- proximately 2 mph (3 km/h).
For all vehicles:
Warning light standby.
on the instru- ment panel is lit when the engine is on
The vehicle equipment remain operational while the engine is stopped.
If the engine stalls while the system is in operation, pressing the clutch pedal right down will start it again.
The ignition must be switched off before leav- ing the vehicle (please see the information on “Starting, stopping the engine” in Section 2).
Keep your vehicle station- ary when the engine is on standby (shown by the warning light instrument panel).
on the
If the engine is put in standby, the electronic parking brake (depending on the vehicle) is not applied automatically.
2.7
ENG_UD54765_1
Fonction Stop and Start (HFE - Renault) stop and start function starting the engine .....................................
(up to the end of the DU) engine standby ..........................................
(up to the end of the DU)
Stop & Start function..................................
(up to the end of the DU)
Stop & Start ...............................................
(up to the end of the DU)
FUNCTION STOP AND START
(2/4)
Preventing the engine from standing by
In certain situations, such as negotiat- ing a crossroads for instance, it is pos- sible (with the system activated) to keep the engine running so as to be ready to move off quickly.
Automatic gearbox:
Keep the vehicle stationary without pressing too hard on the brake pedal.
Manual gearbox:
Keep the clutch pedal pressed right down.
Conditions for coming out of engine standby
For automatic gearboxes:
– the brake pedal is released, position
D or M engaged; or
– the brake pedal is released, position
N engaged and the handbrake re- leased; or
– the brake pedal is pressed again, position P engaged or position N en- gaged with the handbrake applied; or
– position R is engaged or,
– the accelerator pedal is depressed; or
– in manual mode, the gear lever is moved towards + or -.
For manual gearboxes:
– the gearbox is in neutral and the clutch pedal is slightly depressed, or
– the engine is in gear and the clutch pedal is pressed right down.
If the engine stalls while the system is in operation, pressing the clutch pedal right down will start it again.
Special note:
depending on the vehi- cle, if you switch off the ignition when the engine is on standby, the warning light
Ä
is displayed for a few sec- onds on the instrument panel.
For vehicles equipped with a manual gearbox
The restart may be interrupted if the clutch pedal is released too quickly while a gear is engaged.
To fill up with fuel, the engine must be stopped (and not on standby): always stop the engine (please see
“Starting, stopping the engine”).
2.8
ENG_UD54765_1
Fonction Stop and Start (HFE - Renault)
FUNCTION STOP AND START
(3/4)
Conditions preventing the standby of the engine
Certain conditions prevent the system from using the engine standby function, including when:
for vehicles equipped with a card:
– the driver’s door is not closed;
– the driver’s seatbelt is not fastened;
for all vehicles:
– reverse gear is engaged;
– the bonnet is not locked;
– the outdoor temperature is too low or too high;
– the battery is not sufficiently charged;
– the difference between the vehicle interior temperature and the auto- matic climate control instruction is too high;
– the altitude is too high;
– parking distance control is in opera- tion;
– the gradient is too steep for vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox;
– the “Clear View” function is activated
(please see “Automatic Climate
Control” in Section 3);
– the engine temperature is too low;
– the emission control system is being regenerated; or
– ...
Warning light
is displayed on the instrument panel. This notifies you that engine standby is not available.
Special cases for vehicles with a card
With the engine on standby (traffic jam, traffic lights, etc.), if the driver unfas- tens the seat belt and opens the driv- er’s door, or gets out of the seat, the ignition is switched off.
The assisted parking brake is applied automatically.
To restart and reactivate the Stop and
Start system, start the engine (please refer to the information on “Starting, stopping the engine” in Section 2).
Special cases of vehicles with a key
With the engine on standby (traffic jam, traffic lights, etc.), if you get out of the vehicle, a beep warns you that the engine is on standby and has not been stopped.
Deactivate the Stop and
Start function for any opera- tion performed in the engine compartment.
2.9
ENG_UD54765_1
Fonction Stop and Start (HFE - Renault)
THE STOP AND START
function (4/4)
Special feature of the automatic engine re-start
Under certain conditions, the engine can restart on its own in order to guarantee your safety and comfort.
This can occur especially when:
– the outdoor temperature is too low or too high;
– the “Clear View” function is activated
(please see “Automatic Climate
Control” in Section 3);
– the battery is not sufficiently charged;
– the vehicle speed is above 3 mph
(5 km/h) (downhill slope, etc.);
– repeated pressing on the brake pedal or braking system requirement;
– ...
1
2
Deactivating, activating the function
Press
1
to deactivate the function. The message “Stop & Start deactivated” will appear on the instrument panel and the integrated warning light
2
on the switch will light up. Pressing again will reacti- vate the system. The message “Stop
& Start activated” will appear on the instrument panel and the integrated warning light
2
on switch
1
will go out.
Note: With the engine on standby, press switch
1
to automatically re- start the engine.
The system is automatically reacti- vated each time the vehicle is started
(see “Starting, stopping the engine” in
Section 2).
Operating faults
When the message “Check Stop &
Start” appears on the instrument panel and the integrated warning light
2
lights up on the switch
1
, the system is deac- tivated.
Please consult an authorised dealer.
Special feature of vehicles with a key
: for some of these condi- tions the automatic restarting of the engine is inhibited if a front door is open.
The ignition must be switched off before leav- ing the vehicle (please see the information on “Starting, stopping the engine” in Section 2).
2.10
ENG_UD54765_1
Fonction Stop and Start (HFE - Renault)
SPECIAL FEATURES OF PETROL VERSIONS
(1/2)
The following operating conditions:
– driving for long periods when the low fuel level warning light is lit;
– using leaded petrol;
– using fuel or lubrication additives which are not approved.
Or operating faults such as:
– faulty ignition system, running out of fuel or disconnected spark plugs re- sulting in the engine misfiring or cut- ting out when driving;
– loss of power, as they may cause the catalytic converter to overheat and thus reduce its efficiency,
or damage it irreparably and cause heat damage to the vehicle
.
If you notice any of the above operating faults, have the necessary repairs car- ried out as soon as possible by an ap- proved Dealer.
These faults may be avoided by regu- larly taking your vehicle to an approved
Dealer at the intervals specified in the
Maintenance document.
Starting problems
To avoid damaging the catalytic converter,
do not keep
trying to start the engine (using the start button, or by pushing or towing the vehicle)
without having identified and corrected the starting fault
.
If the fault cannot be identified, do not keep trying to start the engine, but con- tact an approved Dealer.
Do not park the vehicle or run the engine in locations where combustible substances or materials such as grass or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system.
2.11
ENG_UD57470_2
Particularités des versions essence avec FAP (HFE - Renault)
Special features of petrol versions special features of petrol vehicles .............
(up to the end of the DU) catalytic converter......................................
(up to the end of the DU) driving ........................................................
(up to the end of the DU)
SPECIAL FEATURES OF PETROL VERSIONS
(2/2)
/PARTICLE FILTER
Particle filter
The particle filter is used in the treat- ment of exhaust gases from petrol en- gines.
Depending on the vehicle, the warning
displayed on the instrument light panel indicates that the filter is becom- ing clogged and requires cleaning. To
warning light clean it, when the appears, and as traffic conditions and speed limits allow, drive at between about 31 mph (50 km/h) and 68 mph
(110 km/h) until the light goes out.
After between approximately 5 and
20 minutes, the warning light should go out.
Note:
The indicator light may go out after 20 minutes when the driving con- ditions needed to clean the filter are not completely met.
If the vehicle is stopped before the warning light disappears you will have to restart the process from the begin- ning.
If the filter becomes saturated, the
©
warning light and, depending on the vehicle, the
warning light will appear on the instrument panel, ac- companied by the message “Check in- jection”. In this case, please consult an
Authorised Dealer.
If the
®
warning light and, depend- ing on the vehicle, the
warning light appears, accompanied by the
“Engine failure hazard” message, stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and contact an Approved Dealer.
Warning light
®
re- quires you to stop immedi- ately, for your own safety, as soon as traffic conditions allow. Switch off the engine and do not restart it. Contact an approved
Dealer.
2.12
Particle filter filter particle filter..........................................
(current page)
ENG_UD57470_2
Particularités des versions essence avec FAP (HFE - Renault)
SPECIAL FEATURES OF DIESEL VERSIONS
Diesel engine speed
Diesel engines are fitted with an injec- tion pump
which prevents the engine speed being exceeded
irrespective of the gear selected.
If the message “Check antipollution system” is displayed along with warn- ing lights
Ä
and
©
, consult an authorised dealer immediately.
When driving, depending on the fuel grade used, it is possible that white smoke may be emitted.
This is due to the exhaust particle filter being cleaned automatically, and does not affect the way the vehicle runs.
Running out of fuel
If the tank has been
completely drained
, the system must be reprimed after the tank is refilled: See “Fuel tank” in section 1 before restarting the engine.
1
A
Engine smoke opacity label
You will find
1
information on the
A
label stuck inside the engine compartment.
1
Diesel exhaust emissions.
Precautions to be taken in winter
To avoid any faults in icy weather:
– ensure that the battery is always fully charged,
– always keep the diesel tank rela- tively full to avoid water vapour con- densing in it and accumulating at the bottom of the tank.
Do not park the vehicle or run the engine in locations where combustible sub- stances or materials such as grass or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system.
2.13
ENG_UD53133_6
Particularités des versions diesel (X87 - X82 - HFE - BFB - XFD - Renault)
Special features of diesel versions catalytic converter......................................
(up to the end of the DU) special features of diesel versions.............
(up to the end of the DU) driving ........................................................
(up to the end of the DU)
GEAR LEVER
1
Selecting reverse gear
The ring
2
has to be lifted up to the gear lever knob to select reverse gear.
The reversing lights will come on as soon as reverse gear is selected with the ignition on.
Note:
depending on the vehicle, if the dipped beam headlights are on, the front fog lights come on simultaneously when reverse gear is selected.
2
Gear lever
Vehicles with manual gearbox:
refer to the grid on the gear lever knob
1
.
Vehicles with an automatic gear- box:
refer to the information on the
“Automatic gearbox” in Section 2.
An impact to the underside of the vehicle while manoeuvring (e.g.: striking a post, raised kerb or other street furniture) may result in damage to the vehicle (e.g.: deformation of an axle).
To avoid any risk of accident, have your vehicle checked by an ap- proved Dealer.
2.14
ENG_UD43870_2
Levier de vitesses/frein à main (HFE - Renault)
Gear lever gear lever...................................................
(current page) reverse gear selecting ...............................................
(up to the end of the DU) changing gear ............................................
(up to the end of the DU)
HANDBRAKE
1
2
Handbrake
To release:
Pull lever
2
up slightly, press button
1
and then lower the lever to the floor.
The red warning light on the instrument panel will come on if you are driving with an incorrectly released handbrake.
To apply:
Pull lever
2
upwards. Check that the vehicle is immobilised. The warning light
D come on.
on the instrument panel will
When stationary, and depending on the slope and/or vehicle load, it may be necessary to pull up the handbrake at least two extra notches and engage a gear (1 st
or reverse gear) for vehicles with a manual gearbox or position
P
for vehicles with an automatic gearbox.
Make sure that the handbrake is properly released when driving (red indicator light off), otherwise overheating, or even damage, may occur.
ENG_UD38085_1
Frein à main (HFE - Renault)
Handbrake handbrake..................................................
(up to the end of the DU)
2.15
ELECTRONIC PARKING BRAKE
(1/4)
1
4
In all other circumstances, for example,
stalled engine or engine switched to standby by the Stop and Start
func- tion (refer to the information on the
“Stop and Start function” in Section 2), the electronic parking brake is not ap- plied automatically. Manual mode must be used.
3
2
Assisted operation
Applying the electronic parking brake
With the vehicle
stationary, the elec- tronic parking brake can be used to im- mobilise the vehicle:
–
by pressing the engine start/stop button
1
or by turning the ignition key
2
(to the “ON” position
2
)
; or
– when
the driver’s seat belt is un- fastened
; or
– when
the driver’s door is opened
; or
– for vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox, when
position P is en- gaged
; or
– when
the driver leaves the seat base of their seat
(e.g.: to bend over to collect an object on the rear floor, etc.).
The electronic parking brake can be used to im- mobilise the vehicle. Before leaving the vehicle, check that the electronic parking brake is fully applied. Warning light
4
on
}
on switch
3
and warning light the instrument panel illuminate to show that the parking brake is ap- plied but switch off when the doors are locked. Depending on the vehi- cle, a sticker is located on the upper section of the windscreen to remind you of this.
2.16
ENG_UD68581_3
Frein de parking assisté (HFE - Renault)
Electronic parking brake stopping the engine ...................................
(up to the end of the DU) driving ........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) ignition switch ............................................
(up to the end of the DU)
Stop & Start function..................................
(current page) handbrake..................................................
(current page) parking brake .............................................
(up to the end of the DU) electronic parking brake ............................
(up to the end of the DU) indicators: instrument panel ..................................
(up to the end of the DU) instrument panel messages.......................
(up to the end of the DU) instrument panel ........................................
(up to the end of the DU)
ELECTRONIC PARKING BRAKE
(2/4)
Assisted operation
(continued)
For certain country-specific model ver- sions, the assisted brake application function is not activated. Refer to the information on “Manual operation”.
To confirm that the electronic parking brake is applied, the message “Parking brake on” and warning light
} on the instrument panel and warning light
4
on the switch
3
light up.
After the engine is switched off, indi- cator light
4
goes out several minutes after the assisted parking brake has been applied and indicator light
} goes out when the vehicle is locked.
Note:
in some situations (electronic parking brake failure, manual release of the parking brake, etc.), a beep sounds and the message “Apply parking brake” appears on the instrument panel to warn you that the electronic parking brake has been released.
– with the engine running: when the driver’s door is opened;
– with the engine switched off (e.g. when the engine stalls): when a front door is opened.
In this case, pull and release switch
3
to apply the assisted parking brake.
Assisted release of the parking brake
The brake will be released as soon as the vehicle starts and accelerates.
4
3
Manual operation
You can apply the electronic parking brake manually.
Manually applying the electronic parking brake
Pull switch
3
. Warning light
4
and warn- ing light light up.
}
on the instrument panel
The electronic parking brake can be used to immobilise the vehicle.
Before leaving the vehicle, check that the electronic parking brake is fully applied. Warning light
4
on switch
3
and warning light
}
on the in- strument panel illuminate to show that the parking brake is applied but switch off when the doors are locked. Depending on the vehicle, a sticker is located on the upper section of the windscreen to remind you of this.
2.17
ENG_UD68581_3
Frein de parking assisté (HFE - Renault)
ELECTRONIC PARKING BRAKE
(3/4)
1
2
4
3
– with the engine running, while si- multaneously depressing the brake pedal and the switch
3
, stop the engine (not standby for vehicles fitted with Stop and Start);
– with a gear or position
P
engaged, release the brake pedal and the switch
3
.
For vehicles fitted with the Stop and
Start function, with the engine on standby, the electronic parking brake is automatically activated if the driver unfastens their seat belt and opens the driver's door or gets out of their seat.
Manually releasing the electronic parking brake
Press switch
1
without pressing the pedals, or turn the key
2
to “
ON
"
2
to switch on the ignition. Press the brake pedal then press switch
3
: indica- tor light
4
on the switch and indicator light
}
displayed on the instrument panel go out.
Brief stop
To apply the electronic parking brake manually (when stopping at a red light, or stopping when the engine is running, etc.): pull and release the switch
3
. The brake is released as soon as the vehi- cle is started up again.
Special cases
To park on a slope or while towing a trailer, for example, pull switch
3
for a few seconds to gain the maximum braking.
To park the vehicle without applying the electronic parking brake (if there is a risk of freezing, for example):
2.18
Special feature related to the Stop and Start function: if the driver's seat is unfas- tened
before
the engine goes into standby due to the Stop and Start function, make sure that the parking brake is applied: the
—
indicator light on the instru- ment panel confirms this.
Risk of loss of immobilisation.
ENG_UD68581_3
Frein de parking assisté (HFE - Renault)
ELECTRONIC PARKING BRAKE
(4/4)
In the event of message
“Electric failure DANGER” or “Check battery”, manu- ally activate the electronic parking brake by pulling switch
4
(or position the gear lever in
P
for au- tomatic gearboxes) before stopping the engine.
Risk of loss of immobilisation of the vehicle.
Call an approved Dealer.
Versions with an automatic gearbox
For safety reasons, automatic release is deactivated when the driver’s door is open or not shut properly and the engine is running (in order to prevent the vehicle from moving without the driver). The “Release parking brake manually” message appears on the instrument panel when the driver de- presses the accelerator.
Operating faults
– If there is a fault, the
©
warning light illuminates on the instrument panel accompanied by the “Check parking brake” message and, in some cases, the light.
—
warning
Contact your approved Dealer straight away.
– If there is an assisted parking brake fault, the warning light
®
comes on, along with the message “Braking system fault”, a beep and, in some cases, the warning light
—
.
This means that you must stop as soon as traffic conditions allow.
If no lights or sounds are ap- parent, this indicates a fault in the instrument panel. This indicates that it is essential to stop immediately (as soon as traf- fic conditions allow). Ensure that the vehicle is correctly immobilised and contact an approved Dealer.
Never leave your vehicle without moving the selector lever to position
P
. This is because when the vehicle is stationary with the engine running and a gear engaged, the vehicle may begin to move if you acceler- ate.
There is a risk of accidents.
It is therefore essential to immobilise the vehicle by engaging first gear (manual gearbox) or position
P
(au- tomatic gearbox). If the slope re- quires it, chock the vehicle.
2.19
ENG_UD68581_3
Frein de parking assisté (HFE - Renault) operating faults ..........................................
(current page) automatic gearbox (use) ............................
(current page) faults operating faults ....................................
(current page)
DRIVING ADVICE, ECO-DRIVING
(1/5)
Fuel consumption is accredited in ac- cordance with a standard regulatory method. Identical for all manufactur- ers, this enables vehicles to be com- pared with one another. Consumption in real time depends on vehicle usage conditions, the equipment fitted and the user’s driving style. To optimise fuel consumption, please refer to the follow- ing advice.
Depending on the vehicle, you will have various functions which enable you to lower your fuel consumption:
– the rev counter;
– gear change indicator;
– the driving style indicator;
– the journey record and eco-driving advice via the multimedia screen;
– ECO mode;
– the Stop and Start (refer to the infor- mation on “Stop and Start function” in Section 2).
2
1
Free-wheel function
On vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox (depending on the vehicle), during deceleration phases (driver’s foot fully off the accelerator pedal), switching to freewheeling (automatic neutral) decreases engine braking and allows you to move farther without ac- celerating in order to save fuel.
Warning light strument panel:
appears on the in-
– in grey when the vehicle is not in free-wheel mode;
– in green or white, depending on the vehicle, when the vehicle is in free- wheel mode (automatic neutral).
On the instrument panel
The information display can be organ- ised and customised based on the in- strument panel customisation style se- lected from the multimedia screen.
The rev counter with ECO zone
1
Driving in the ECO zone helps you op- timise fuel consumption under most cir- cumstances.
Gear change indicator
2
Depending on the vehicle, to obtain op- timum consumption levels, a warning light on the instrument panel lets you know the best time to move up or down a gear:
Š
move up a gear;
‰
move down a gear.
2.20
ECO driving driving ........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) fuel advice on fuel economy .......................
(up to the end of the DU) fuel economy .............................................
(up to the end of the DU)
ECO driving ...............................................
(up to the end of the DU) driving recommendations ..........................
(up to the end of the DU) fuel consumption.........................................
(up to the end of the DU) fuel consumption .......................................
(up to the end of the DU)
ENG_UD64201_3
Conseils eco conduite (HFE - Renault)
DRIVING ADVICE, ECO-DRIVING
(2/5)
4
3
If you regularly follow this indicator, you will reduce your vehicle’s fuel consump- tion.
Driving style indicator
3
Informs you about the driving style adopted in real time. You will be notified by indicator
3
.
The more petals there are on indica- tor
3
, the smoother and more economi- cal your driving.
If you regularly monitor this indicator, you will reduce your vehicle’s fuel con- sumption.
To
activate/deactivate
the driving style indicator, please see the multimedia system instructions.
On the multifunction screen
Journey record
Once the engine is switched off, you will see “Journey record” displayed on the screen
4
, enabling you to view in- formation relating to your last journey.
On the multifunction screen
Journey record
Once the engine is switched off, you will see “Journey record” displayed on the screen
4
, enabling you to view in- formation relating to your last journey.
This indicates:
– average fuel consumption;
– number of miles/kilometres travelled;
– number of miles/kilometres saved.
This corresponds to driving without fuel consumption (deceleration and/ or foot off the accelerator pedal).
An overall rating from 0 to 100 is dis- played to let you assess your eco driv- ing performance. The higher the rating, the lower the fuel consumption.
Eco advice is given to help improve your performance.
With your favourite journeys saved, you can compare your performance between trips and the performance of other vehicle users.
Please refer to the multimedia instruc- tions for further information.
2.21
ENG_UD64201_3
Conseils eco conduite (HFE - Renault)
ECO mode .................................................
(current page)
DRIVING ADVICE, ECO-DRIVING (
3/5)
ECO mode
ECO mode is a function which opti- mises fuel consumption. It affects cer- tain driving operations (acceleration, shifting gears, cruise control, decelera- tion etc.).
Limiting acceleration enables low fuel consumption in urban and surrounding areas.
4
To activate/deactivate the “free wheel” mode, see “Vehicle settings customisa- tion menu” in Section 1.
Activating the function
The function can be activated:
– by pressing switch
4
;
– Depending on the vehicle, from the navigation menu on the multimedia screen (please refer to the multime- dia instructions).
The warning light tion.
comes on on the instrument panel to confirm activa-
While driving, it is possible to leave the
ECO mode temporarily in order to im- prove engine performance.
For this, depress the accelerator pedal firmly and fully.
ECO mode is reactivated when you take pressure off the accelerator pedal.
Disabling the function
Press switch
4
.
The warning light tivation.
goes out on the instrument panel to confirm deac-
2.22
ENG_UD64201_3
Conseils eco conduite (HFE - Renault) freewheel ...................................................
(current page)
ECO mode .................................................
(current page)
DRIVING ADVICE, ECO-DRIVING
(4/5)
– Do not overrev the engine in the intermediate gears.
You should always use the highest gear possible.
– Avoid sudden acceleration.
– Brake as little as possible. If you anticipate an obstacle or bend in advance, you may then simply release the accelerator pedal.
– Do not try to maintain the same speed up a hill, accelerate no more than you would on flat ground. Keep your foot in the same position on the accelerator pedal.
– Double declutching and accelerating before switching off are unnecessary in modern vehicles.
Driving advice, Eco-driving
Behaviour
– Drive carefully for the first few miles until the engine reaches its normal operating temperature, rather than let it warm up while the vehicle is sta- tionary.
– Speed is expensive.
– Dynamic driving with a lot of frequent acceleration and braking is expen- sive on fuel in comparison to the time saved.
– Bad weather, flooded roads:
Do not drive through floods if the water is above the lower edge of the wheel rims.
Obstructions to the driver
On the driver’s side, only use mats suitable for the vehicle, attached with the pre-fitted components, and check the fitting regularly. Do not lay one mat on top of another.
There is a risk of wedging the pedals.
2.23
ENG_UD64201_3
Conseils eco conduite (HFE - Renault) tyres ...........................................................
(current page)
DRIVING ADVICE, ECO-DRIVING
(5/5)
Tyres
– An underinflated tyre increases fuel consumption.
– Opt for the highest speed pressure or the pressure recommended to op- timise fuel consumption indicated on edge of the driver’s door (please refer to the information on “Tyre infla- tion pressure” in Section 4).
– The use of non-recommended tyres can increase fuel consumption.
Advice on use
– Favour the ECO mode.
– Electricity is fuel; switch off all the electrical components which are not really needed.
However
(safety first), keep your lights on when the visibility is bad (“see and be seen”).
– Use the air vents. Driving with the windows open at 60 mph (100 km/h) will increase fuel consumption by
4%.
– Never fill the fuel tank right to the brim to avoid overflow.
–
In vehicles fitted with air conditioning,
it is normal to observe an increase in fuel consumption (especially in urban conditions) when it is used. For vehicles fitted with manual air conditioning, switch off the system when it is not required.
Recommendations for reducing consumption and therefore help- ing to preserve the environment:
If the vehicle has been parked in the sun, open the doors for a few mo- ments to let the hot air escape before starting the engine.
– Do not leave an empty roof rack fitted to the vehicle.
– It is better to fit a trailer for bulky objects.
– When towing a caravan, fit a wind deflector and adjust it carefully.
– Avoid using the car for door-to-door calls (short journeys with long waits in between) because the engine never reaches its normal operating temperature.
2.24
ENG_UD64201_3
Conseils eco conduite (HFE - Renault)
MAINTENANCE AND ANTIPOLLUTION ADVICE
Your vehicle complies with criteria for recycling and recovering vehicles at the end of their service life, which entered into force in 2015.
Some parts of your vehicle have therefore been designed to facilitate future recycling.
These parts are easy to remove so that they can be recovered and reprocessed by recycling companies.
By virtue of its design, moderate fuel consumption and initial settings, your vehicle also conforms to current antipollution regulations. The manufacturer is actively striving to reduce pollutant exhaust gas emissions and to save energy. But the fuel consumption of your vehicle and the level of pollutant exhaust gas emissions are also your responsibility. Ensure that it is maintained and used correctly.
Maintenance
It is important to remember that fail- ure to respect antipollution regulations could lead to legal action being taken against the vehicle owner.
In addition, replacing engine, fuel supply system and exhaust compo- nents with parts other than those origi- nally recommended by the manufac- turer may alter your vehicle so that it no longer complies with anti-pollution regulations.
Have your vehicle adjusted and checked by an authorised dealer, in ac- cordance with the instructions given in your maintenance schedule: they will have all the equipment necessary for ensuring that your vehicle is maintained to its original standard.
Engine adjustments
–
Spark plugs:
for optimum condi- tions of use, output and performance the specifications laid down by our
Design Department must be strictly applied.
If the spark plugs have to be changed, use the make, type and gap specified for your vehicle’s engine. Contact an authorised dealer for this.
–
Ignition and idle speed:
no adjust- ment is needed.
–
Air filter, fuel filter:
a choked ele- ment will reduce efficiency. It must be replaced.
Exhaust gas monitoring system
The exhaust gas monitoring system will detect any operating faults in the vehi- cle’s antipollution system.
If this system malfunctions, toxic substances may be released into the atmosphere or damage may occur.
Ä
This warning light on the in- strument panel will indicate if there are any faults in the system:
This lights up when the ignition is switched on and goes out when the engine is started.
– If it lights up continuously, consult an approved Dealer as soon as possi- ble;
– if it flashes, reduce the engine speed until the light stops flashing. Contact an authorised dealer as soon as pos- sible.
Refer to the information on
“Reagent tank” in Section 1.
Maintenance and antipollution advice
2.25
ENG_UD51892_11
Conseils entretien et antipollution (X91 - B91 - K91 - D91 - X95 - E95 - J95 - R95 - H79 - X98 - X52 - X87 - H79 Ph2 - X07 - JFC - HFE - BFB - XFD - XHA - Renault) advice on antipollution ...............................
(up to the end of the DU) antipollution advice...................................................
(up to the end of the DU) maintenance ..............................................
(up to the end of the DU)
ENVIRONMENT
Your vehicle has been designed with respect for the
environment
in mind for its entire service life: during production, use and at the end of its life.
Manufacture
Your vehicle has been manufactured at a factory which complies with a policy to reduce the environmental impact on the surrounding areas (reduction of water and energy consumption, visual and noise pollution, atmospheric emis- sions and waste water; sorting and re- using waste).
Emissions
Your vehicle has been designed to emit fewer greenhouse gases (CO2) while in use, and therefore to consume less fuel
(eg. 140 g/km, equivalent to 5.3 l/100 km for a diesel vehicle).
Our vehicles are also equipped with an emission control system including a catalytic converter, an oxygen sensor and an active carbon filter (the latter prevents vapour from the fuel tank being released into the open air).
For certain diesel vehicles, this system also has a particle filter to reduce the volume of soot particles emitted.
Please make your own contribution towards protecting the environment too
– Worn parts replaced in the course of routine vehicle maintenance (vehicle battery, oil filter, air filter, batteries, etc.) and oil containers (empty or filled with used oil) must be disposed of through specialist organisations.
– At the end of the vehicle’s service life, it should be sent to approved centres to ensure that it is recycled.
– In all cases, comply with local legislation.
Recycling
Your vehicle is 85% recyclable and
95% recoverable.
To achieve these objectives, many of the vehicle components have been designed to enable them to be recycled.
The materials and structures have been carefully designed to allow these components to be easily removed and reprocessed by specialist companies.
In order to preserve raw material re- sources, this vehicle incorporates nu- merous parts made from recycled plas- tics or renewable materials (vegetable or animal-derived materials such as cotton or wool).
2.26
ENG_UD62835_5
Environnement (sans marque) (X44 - X45 - X77 - X81 - X90 - X91 - X83 - X61 - X95 - X47 - X43 - X38 - H79 - X65 PH5 - X62 - X32 - X09 - X61 électrique - L38 ZE - X67
Environment environment ...............................................
(up to the end of the DU)
TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(1/3)
1
2
3
If the vehicle is equipped with the function, this system monitors the tyre pressure.
Resetting the standard level for the tyre pressures
This should be done:
– when the standard tyre pressure needs to be changed to adapt to usage conditions (empty, carrying a load, motorway driving, etc.);
– after swapping a wheel (however this practice is not recommended);
– after changing a wheel.
It should always be done after checking the tyre pressure of all four tyres when cold.
Tyre pressures must correspond to the current usage of the vehicle (empty, carrying a load, motorway driving, etc.).
Operating principle
Each wheel (except for the emergency spare wheel) has a sensor in the infla- tion valve which periodically measures the tyre pressure.
The system displays the current pres- sures on the instrument panel
1
and alerts the driver in the event of insuffi- cient pressure.
Resetting can also be done from the multifunction screen
3
if your vehi- cle is fitted with a navigation system.
Select “Vehicle”, “Tyre pressure”.
Resetting procedure
With the ignition on:
– repeatedly and briefly press control
2
to select the tyre pressure display and the “Tyre pressure” function;
– press and hold (around 3 seconds) the button
2
to launch the reset. The flashing tyres followed by the mes- sages “Learning TP initiated” and then “Tyres location in progress” in- dicates that the reset request for the tyre pressure reference value has been acknowledged.
Reset can take several minutes of driv- ing.
If the resetting is followed by short trips, the message “Tyres location in progress” can remain displayed after successive restarts.
Note
The standard tyre pressure cannot be less than that recommended and indi- cated on the door frame.
2.27
ENG_UD54774_1
Avertisseur de perte de pression des pneumatiques (HFE - Renault)
Tyre pressure monitoring system tyres ...........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) tyre pressure..............................................
(up to the end of the DU) tyre pressure monitor.................................
(up to the end of the DU)
TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(2/3)
1
A
4
B
Display
1
and the warning light
4
on the instrument panel warn you of any tyre pressure faults (flat tyre, punctured tyre, system fault, etc.).
“Adjust tyre pressure”
A wheel
B
is shown in orange, the warning light
4
comes on and the message “Adjust tyre pressure” ap- pears.
They indicate that a wheel is deflated.
Check and, if necessary, readjust the pressures of the four wheels when cold.
The warning light
4
a few minutes’ driving.
goes off after
For your safety, the warning light
®
requires you to stop immediately as soon as traffic conditions allow.
“Puncture”
A wheel
B
is shown in red, the warning light
4
comes on, the message
“Puncture” appears and there is a beep.
This message appears along with the
®
warning light.
They indicate that the affected wheel is punctured or severely underinflated.
Replace it or contact an approved dealer if it is punctured. Top up the tyre pressure if the wheel is deflated.
“Check tyre pressure sensors”
A wheel
A
disappears, the warning light
4
flashes for several sec- onds then comes on continuously and the message “Check tyre pressure sen- sors” appears.
This message appears along with the
©
warning light. They indicate that at least one wheel is not fitted with sen- sors (e.g. emergency spare wheel).
Otherwise, consult an authorised dealer.
The sudden loss of pressure in a tyre (burst tyre, etc.) cannot be detected by the system.
2.28
ENG_UD54774_1
Avertisseur de perte de pression des pneumatiques (HFE - Renault)
TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(3/3)
“Tyres location failure”
This message “Tyres location failure” appears when driving if one or more wheels have been fitted with sensors not recognised by Renault.
Consult an approved dealer
Readjustment of tyre pressures
The tyre pressures should be ad- justed when cold
(please refer to the label located on the edge of the driver’s door). If the tyre pressures cannot be checked when the tyres are cold, the recommended pressures should be in- creased by 0.2 to 0.3 bar (3 PSI).
Never deflate a hot tyre.
Replacing wheels/tyres
This system requires specific equip- ment (wheels, tyres, hubcaps, etc.).
Please see the information on “Tyres” in Section 5.
Contact an approved Dealer to fit new tyres and to find out about available ac- cessories compatible with the system and available from your dealer net- work: the use of any other accessory could affect the correct operation of the system or damage a sensor.
Emergency spare wheel
If the vehicle is equipped with an emer- gency spare wheel, it will not have a sensor.
Tyre repair product and inflation kit
Because the valves are specially de- signed, only use equipment approved by the approved network. Please refer to “Tyre inflation kit” in Section 5.
Changing a wheel
The system may take sev- eral minutes depending on use for the new wheel po- sitions and pressures to be recog- nised; check the tyre pressures after all operations.
This function is an addi- tional driving aid.
However, the function is not intended to replace the driver. It cannot, therefore, under any circumstances replace the vig- ilance or the responsibility of the driver. Check the tyre pressures, in- cluding the emergency spare wheel, once a month.
2.29
ENG_UD54774_1
Avertisseur de perte de pression des pneumatiques (HFE - Renault)
DRIVING CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS
(1/10)
Depending on the vehicle, they will con- sist of:
– ABS (anti-lock braking system) ;
– ESC (electronic stability control) with understeer control and trac- tion control;
– emergency brake assist;
– advanced traction control;
– active emergency braking;
– hill start assistance.
These functions are an additional aid in the event of critical driving conditions, enabling the vehicle behaviour to be adapted to suit the driving conditions.
The functions do not take the place of the driver.
They do not increase the vehicle’s limits and should not encourage you to drive more quickly.
Therefore, they can under no circumstances replace the vigi- lance or responsibility of the driver when manoeuvring the vehicle (the driver must always be ready for sudden incidents which may occur when driving).
ABS (anti-lock braking system)
Under heavy braking, the ABS prevents the wheels from locking, allowing the stopping distance to be managed and keeping control of the vehicle.
Under these circumstances, the vehicle can be steered to avoid an obstacle whilst braking. In addition, this system can increase stopping distances, particularly on roads with low surface grip
(wet ground etc.).
You will feel a pulsation through the brake pedal each time the system is activated. The ABS does not in any way improve the vehicle's physical performance relating to the road surface and roadholding. It is still
essential
to follow the rules of good driving practice (such as driving at a safe distance from the vehicle in front etc.).
In an emergency, apply
firm and continuous pressure
to the brake pedal. There is no need to pump it repeatedly. The ABS will modulate the force applied in the braking system.
2.30
ENG_UD54775_1
Dispositifs de correction et d’assistance à la conduite (HFE - Renault)
Driver correction devices/aids
ABS ...........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) driving ........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) anti-lock braking system: ABS ...................
(up to the end of the DU) emergency brake assist.............................
(up to the end of the DU) emergency braking ....................................
(up to the end of the DU)
ASR (traction control) ................................
(up to the end of the DU) traction control: ASR ..................................
(up to the end of the DU) traction control: ASR ..................................
(up to the end of the DU) electronic stability control: ESC .................
(up to the end of the DU)
ESC: electronic stability control .................
(up to the end of the DU)
Hill Start Assist...........................................
(up to the end of the DU)
DRIVING CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS
(2/10)
Operating faults:
–
©
and x
lit up on the in- strument panel accompanied by the messages “Check ABS”, “Check braking system” and “Check ESC”: this indicates that the ABS, the ESC and the emergency brake assist are disabled.
Braking is always ena- bled
;
– x
,
D
,
©
and
® lit on the instrument panel accom- panied by the message “Braking system fault”:
this indicates a fault with the braking system.
In both cases, consult an approved dealer.
Warning light
®
re- quires you to stop immedi- ately, for your own safety, as soon as traffic conditions allow. Switch off the engine and do not restart it. Contact an approved
Dealer.
Your braking systems are partially operational.
However, it is
dangerous to brake suddenly
and it is essential to stop immediately, as soon as traffic conditions allow.
Contact an approved dealer.
ENG_UD54775_1
Dispositifs de correction et d’assistance à la conduite (HFE - Renault)
2.31
DRIVING CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS
(3/10)
Electronic stability control
ESC with understeer control and traction control
Understeer control
This system optimises the action of the
ESC in the case of pronounced understeer (loss of front axle road holding).
Electronic stability control ESC
This system helps you to keep control of the vehicle in critical driving conditions (avoiding an obstacle, loss of grip on a bend, etc.).
Operating principle
A sensor in the steering wheel detects the direction selected by the driver.
Other sensors throughout the vehicle measure the actual direction.
The system compares driver input to the actual trajectory of the vehicle and corrects the trajectory if necessary by controlling the braking of certain wheels and/or engine power. In the event that the system is engaged, indicator light
flashes on the instrument panel.
Traction control
This system helps to limit wheelspin of the drive wheels and to control the vehicle when pulling away accelerating or decelerating.
Operating principle
Using the wheel sensors, the system measures and compares the speed of the drive wheels at all times and slows down their over-rotation. If a wheel is starting to slip, the system brakes au- tomatically until the drive supplied be- comes compatible with the level of grip under the wheel again.
The system also adjusts the engine speed to the grip available under the wheels, independently of the pressure exerted on the accelerator pedal.
Operating faults
When the system detects an operat- ing fault the message “Check ESC” and warning light
©
and on the instrument panel.
appear
In this case, the ESC and traction con- trol system are deactivated. Consult an authorised dealer.
2.32
ENG_UD54775_1
Dispositifs de correction et d’assistance à la conduite (HFE - Renault)
DRIVING CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS
(4/10)
The traction control system offers ad- ditional safety. It is recommended that you do not drive with the function di- sabled. Correct this as soon as pos- sible by pressing the switch
1
again.
Note:
The function is reactivated auto- matically when the ignition is switched on or when a speed of approximately
24 mph (40 km/h) is exceeded.
1
Deactivating the function
(depending on vehicle)
In some situations (driving on very wet ground: snow, mud, etc. or driving with snow chains fitted), the system may reduce the engine output to limit wheelspin. If this is not required, it is possible to deactivate the function by pressing switch
1
.
The message “TRACTION CONTROL
OFF” is displayed on the instrument panel to inform you.
Emergency brake assist
This system supplements the ABS and helps reduce vehicle stopping dis- tances.
Operating principle
The system detects an emergency braking situation. In this case, the brak- ing assistance immediately develops maximum power and may trigger ABS regulation. ABS braking is maintained as long as the brake pedal is not re- leased.
Hazard warning lights illumination
Depending on the vehicle, these may light up in the event of sudden deceleration.
These functions are an additional aid in the event of critical driving conditions, enabling the vehicle behaviour to be adapted to suit the driving conditions.
The functions do not take the place of the driver.
They do not increase the vehicle’s limits and should not encourage you to drive more quickly.
Therefore, they can under no circumstances replace the vigi- lance or responsibility of the driver when manoeuvring the vehicle (the driver must always be ready for sudden incidents which may occur when driving).
2.33
ENG_UD54775_1
Dispositifs de correction et d’assistance à la conduite (HFE - Renault)
DRIVING CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS
(5/10)
Advanced traction control
If fitted on the vehicle, grip control makes it easier to control the vehicle on low grip surfaces (soft ground, etc.).
For your safety, please re- spect the speed limit.
When they need to be re- placed, only tyres of the same make, size, type and profile should be used on a single axle.
They must: either have a load ca- pacity and speed rating at least equal to those of the original tyres, or conform to those recom- mended by an authorised dealer.
Failure to heed these instructions could endanger your safety and affect your vehicle’s roadworthi- ness.
Risk of loss of control of the ve- hicle.
2
“Road” mode
When the vehicle is started up, the warning light
on the selector
2
comes on, along with the instrument under normal driving conditions (dry- ness, humidity, light snow, etc.).
“Road” mode uses traction control func- tions.
panel message “Automatic mode on”.
This position enables optimal usage
“Soft ground” mode
Turn the selector
2
: the integrated warning light
comes on, accom- panied by a message on the instrument panel “Non grip road mode on”. This position enables optimal usage on soft ground (mud, sand, dead leaves, etc.).
“Soft ground” mode uses traction con- trol functions. The system automatically switches to “Road” mode above around
25 mph (40 km/h), and the integrated warning light comes on.
on the selector
2
“Expert” mode
Turn the selector
2
: the integrated warning light
comes on, ac- companied by a message on the in- strument panel “Expert mode on”. This position enables optimum usage in ex- treme conditions (very snowy or muddy roads). The engine speed is left under the control of the driver.
The system automatically switches to
“Road” mode above around 25 mph
(40 km/h), and the integrated warning light
on the selector
2
comes on.
2.34
ENG_UD54775_1
Dispositifs de correction et d’assistance à la conduite (HFE - Renault) grip control .................................................
(current page)
DRIVING CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS
(6/10)
3
4
If the driver depresses the brake pedal and the system still detects a risk of col- lision, the brake force is increased.
If the driver fails to react following an alert of an imminent collision, the system activates the brakes.
Active emergency braking
Using the sensor
3
, the system calcu- lates the distance separating the vehi- cle from the one in front and alerts the driver if there is a risk of a front-end col- lision. The driver can then brake the ve- hicle to limit the damage arising from a collision.
Note:
make sure that the radar
3
is not obscured (by dirt, mud, snow etc. or by the fitting of accessories such as bull bars).
Operation
While driving (at speeds of between 20 and 85 mph (30 and 140 km/h)), if there is a risk of collision with the vehicle in front, the warning light
4
will be dis- played on the instrument panel in red, alongside a beep.
The system only detects vehicles driving in the same direction of traf- fic. The system cannot detect mo- torcycles because of the difficulty in forecasting their trajectory.
2.35
ENG_UD54775_1
Dispositifs de correction et d’assistance à la conduite (HFE - Renault) emergency active braking..........................
(up to the end of the DU)
DRIVING CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS
(7/10)
6
5
7
8
Activating or deactivating the system
For vehicles fitted with a navigation system
From the multimedia screen
5
, select the “Vehicle” menu, “Driving assist- ance”, “Active braking” then choose
“ON” or “OFF”.
For vehicle not fitted with a navigation system
– With the vehicle at a standstill, press and hold the switch
7
OK
to access the settings menu,
– repeatedly press the control
8
up or down until you reach the “Driving as- sistance” menu. Press the switch
7
OK
;
– repeatedly press control
8
up or down until you reach the “Active braking” menu, then press the switch
7
OK
.
You can access menu “Driving as- sistance” directly from button
6
.
Press the switch
7
OK
again to activate or deactivate the function:
=
function activated
<
function deactivated
The warning light
is displayed on the instrument panel when the system is deactivated. This system is reacti- vated each time the ignition is switched on.
Conditions for non-activation of the system
The system does not activate:
– when the gear lever is in neutral;
– when the parking brake is activated;
– while cornering;
– for 4-wheel drive vehicles, when
Electronic Stability Programme
(ESC) with understeer and trac- tion control is deactivated (please see “Electronic Stability Programme
(ESC) with understeer and traction control” above). Warning light comes on.
2.36
ENG_UD54775_1
Dispositifs de correction et d’assistance à la conduite (HFE - Renault)
DRIVING CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS
(8/10)
Operating faults
When the system detects an operating fault, the
warning light lights up on the instrument panel, with the mes- sage “Active braking disconnected”.
There are two possibilities:
– the system is temporarily disrupted
(for example: radar obscured by dirt, mud, snow etc.). In this case, park the vehicle and switch off the engine. Clean the detection zone of the radar. When you next start the engine, the warning light and the message go out
– if this is not the case, this may arise from another cause; contact an
Approved Dealer.
Active emergency braking
This function is an additional driving aid. However, this function is not under any circumstances intended to replace the due care and attention of the driver, who should at all times be in control of the vehicle.
System servicing/repairs
– In the event of an impact, the sensor alignment may become changed, and its operation will consequently be affected. Deactivate the function, then consult an authorised dealer.
– Any work in the area where the radar is located (repairs, replacements, touch- ing up of paintwork) must be carried out by a qualified professional.
– Fitting accessories which may block the radar is prohibited (bull bars etc.).
Only an authorised dealer is qualified to service the system.
In the event of system disturbance
Some conditions can disturb or damage the operation of the system, such as:
– a complex environment (metal bridge, etc.);
– poor weather conditions (snow, hail, black ice, etc.).
Risk of inadvertent braking
.
ENG_UD54775_1
Dispositifs de correction et d’assistance à la conduite (HFE - Renault)
2.37
DRIVING CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS
(9/10)
Active emergency braking
Limitation of the system operation
– The system will only respond to vehicles which are moving or which have been sensed as moving.
– A vehicle travelling in the opposite direction will not trigger any alert or any action on the system operation.
– The sensor area should be kept clean and free of any modifications in order to ensure the proper operation of the system.
– The system cannot respond to small vehicles such as motorbikes or bicycles as effectively as to other vehicles.
Deactivating the function
The function should be deactivated if:
– the brake lights are not functioning;
– the front of the vehicle has undergone an impact or been damaged;
– the vehicle is being towed (breakdowns).
Halting the function
You can halt the active braking function at any time by tapping the accelerator pedal.
If the driver notices any unusual behaviour in the system, please consult an authorised dealer.
2.38
ENG_UD54775_1
Dispositifs de correction et d’assistance à la conduite (HFE - Renault)
DRIVING CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS
(10/10)
Hill start assistance
Depending on the gradient of the in- cline, this system assists the driver when starting on a hill. It prevents the vehicle from rolling backwards by au- tomatically applying the brakes when the driver lifts his/her foot off the brake pedal to depress the accelerator pedal.
System operation
It only operates when the gear lever is in a position other than neutral (other than
N
or
P
for automatic transmissions) and the vehicle is completely stationary (brake pedal depressed)
The system holds the vehicle for ap- proximately
2 seconds
. The brakes are then released (the vehicle will move ac- cording to the slope).
The hill start assistance system cannot completely prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards in all situations (extremely steep gradients, etc.).
In all cases, the driver may depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehi- cle from rolling backwards.
The hill start assistance function should not be used for prolonged stops: use the brake pedal.
This function is not designed to im- mobilise the vehicle permanently.
If necessary, use the brake pedal to stop the vehicle.
The driver must remain particularly vigilant when driving on slippery or low-grip surfaces.
Risk of serious injury
.
ENG_UD54775_1
Dispositifs de correction et d’assistance à la conduite (HFE - Renault)
2.39
TRANSMISSION: 4-wheel drive (4WD)
(1/4)
Mode selector
Depending on the road conditions, turn- ing the selector
1
enables the following modes to be selected:
– AUTO ;
– 2WD ;
– 4WD Lock.
1
Remember that driving a vehicle offroad is very different to driving it on the road.
To make the most of your vehicle in an off-road situation, we recommend that you are trained to drive a
4x4 (4WD) vehicle.
The safety of both you and your passengers is your responsibility, and depends on your skill and the care you take when driving off-road.
“AUTO" mode
To activate this mode, turn selector 1 to the “
AUTO
” position.
Operating principle
“AUTO” mode automatically distributes the engine torque between the front and rear axles according to the road condi- tions and the vehicle speed. This po- sition optimises roadholding. Use this mode on any type of road (dry, snow- covered, slippery, etc.) or when towing
(trailer or caravan).
The warning light
ment panel will come on.
on the instru-
“2WD" mode
To activate this mode, turn the selec- tor
1
to the “2WD” position. The warn- ing light
‘ will come on.
on the instrument panel
Operating principle
The “2WD” mode uses the front wheels only. Use this mode on dry roads with good grip.
To deactivate this mode, turn the selec- tor
1
to the “AUTO” position. Warning light panel.
‘
goes out on the instrument
2.40
Transmission: 4-wheel drive (4WD)
4 wheel drive (4WD) ..................................
(up to the end of the DU) driving ........................................................
(up to the end of the DU)
ENG_UD40982_3
Transmission : 4 roues motrices (4WD) (HFE - Renault)
TRANSMISSION: 4-wheel drive (4WD)
(2/4)
“4WD Lock" mode
To activate this mode, turn selector
1
to the “4WD Lock” position. The selector the returns to the “AUTO” position. The
’
indicator light will light up on the instrument panel.
Note:
If the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 24.8 mph (40 km/h) in
“4WD Lock” mode, the system auto- matically switches back to “AUTO” mode.
The the
’
warning light goes out and
warning light comes on.
Operating principle
“4WD Lock” mode distributes the engine torque between the front and rear axles in order to optimise the performance capacity of the vehicle in offroad situations. This mode should only be used in extreme driving conditions
(mud, steep slopes, sand).
To deactivate this mode, turn selector
1
to the “4WD Lock” position again. The warning light goes out on the instru- ment panel.
Special features of the
4-wheel drive transmission
The vehicle may make more noise when the “AUTO" or "4WD Lock" modes are activated. This is normal. If the system detects a difference in the dimensions of the front and rear wheels (eg. underinflation, severe wear on an axle), the system automatically switches to
"2WD" mode.
The message “4WD unavailable unsuit- able tyres” is displayed on the instru- ment panel. Drive as soon as possible at a moderate speed to an approved dealer.
This problem may be resolved by changing the tyres. Always use four identical tyres (same brand, profile, etc.) and with similar wear.
In the event of excessive wheelspin, the mechanical components may overheat.
If this happens:
– at first, the
’
warning light comes on. “4WD Lock” mode is still active – however, we recommend that you stop as soon as possible to allow the system to cool down (until the warning light goes out);
– if the wheels still spin, the system automatically switches to “2WD” mode to protect the mechanical components.
The message “4WD overheating” is displayed on the instrument panel.
The mode cannot be changed while the message is displayed.
2.41
ENG_UD40982_3
Transmission : 4 roues motrices (4WD) (HFE - Renault)
TRANSMISSION: 4-wheel drive (4WD)
(3/4)
After stopping the engine, the system may take up to five minutes to cool down.
If the system detects excessive wheelspin on the front wheels, it adapts the engine to run in a way that reduces wheelspin.
Anti-lock braking in
LOCK
mode
When “4WD Lock" mode is active, the
ABS switches to off-road mode. In this case, the wheels may lock intermittently to achieve better grip, thus reducing braking distances on soft ground.
When this mode is active:
– the vehicle’s manoeuvrability is limited during braking. This operating mode is therefore not recommended in very low-grip conditions (eg. ice).
– there may be some noise. This is normal, and does not indicate an op- erating fault.
Electronic stability program and traction control when driving off- road
When driving on soft ground (sand, mud, deep snow), we recommend that you deactivate the ESC function by pressing the “ESC” switch.
In this case, only individual wheel brak- ing remains active. This function ap- plies the brake to any wheel that is slip- ping, allowing the engine torque to be transferred to the wheels with the most grip. This is particularly useful when crossing a bridge.
All the ESC functions will be reacti- vated when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 31 mph (50 km/h) (24.8 mph [40 km/h] in 4WD Lock mode), when the engine is restarted or when the “ESC” switch is pressed again.
Operating faults
If the system detects an operating fault, it automatically switches to “2WD” mode. The message “Check 4WD” is displayed on the instrument panel, and the
‘ come on.
and
©
warning lights
Drive as soon as possible at a moderate speed to an approved dealer.
For certain operating faults, the system may not be able to switch to “2WD" or
"4WD Lock" mode. "AUTO" mode remains active.
Contact an approved dealer as soon as possible.
2.42
ENG_UD40982_3
Transmission : 4 roues motrices (4WD) (HFE - Renault)
TRANSMISSION: 4-wheel drive (4WD)
(4/4)
All-wheel drive system
– Irrespective of the mode selected, do not start the engine if one or more wheels are not in contact with the ground
(eg. when the vehicle is on a jack or roller bench).
– Do not turn the mode selector when cornering, reversing or if the wheels are spinning excessively. Only select the
“2WD”, “AUTO” or “4WD Lock” mode when the vehicle is being driven in a straight line.
– Only use tyres which meet the required specifications.
– “4WD Lock” mode is exclusively reserved for driving
off-road
. The use of this mode in any other conditions may adversely affect the vehicle’s manoeuvrability and damage its mechanical components.
– Always ensure tyres with identical specifications are fitted to all four wheels (brand, size, structure, wear etc.). Fitting tyres of different sizes to the front and rear wheels and/or left and right wheels may have serious consequences for the tyres, gearbox, transfer gearbox and the rear differential pinions.
ENG_UD40982_3
Transmission : 4 roues motrices (4WD) (HFE - Renault)
2.43
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING
(1/3)
This system notifies the driver when they accidentally cross a continuous or broken line.
This function uses a camera attached to the windscreen, behind the rear-view mirror.
This function is a driving aid in the event of the accidental crossing of a continuous or broken line in the road. However, the function is not intended to replace the driver. The function can be disrupted under certain conditions, including:
– poor visibility (rain, snow, fog, dirty windscreen, glare of the sun, partially obscured road lines, etc.);
– roads with tight bends;
– closely following a vehicle in the same lane;
– worn road markings, difficult to distinguish or spaced very widely apart;
– narrow roads;
– ...
In this case, the line visibility indicators remain uncoloured on the instrument panel to indicate that the function will not operate (lines not detected).
Under no circumstances should this function replace the driver’s care or respon- sibility whilst performing manoeuvres.
2.44
Lane departure warning lane departure warning ..............................
(up to the end of the DU)
ENG_UD54777_1
Alerte de sortie de voie (HFE - Renault)
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING
(2/3)
2
1
4
3
Activation/deactivation
Vehicles fitted with a navigation system
From the multimedia screen
2
: select
“Vehicle”, “Driving assistance”, “Lane departure warning check” then choose
“ON” or “OFF”.
Vehicles not fitted with a navigation system
Press the switch
3
.
Operation
With the function activated, the grey visibility indicators
4
for the left and right lines are displayed on the instru- ment panel.
The function is set to notify the driver if:
– the vehicle speed is greater than approximately 45 mph (70 km/h); and
– lines are detected and the visibility indicators
4
are green.
The function triggers an alert if
a line is crossed without the direction indica- tors being activated. The function alerts the driver through a beep and the indi- cator the line crossed switches to red on the instrument panel.
You can access menu “Driving as- sistance” directly from button
1
.
2.45
ENG_UD54777_1
Alerte de sortie de voie (HFE - Renault)
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING
(3/3)
Adjustment
5
6
2
Vehicles fitted with a navigation system
From the multimedia screen
2
, select
“Vehicle”, “Driving assistance”, then
“Lane departure warning settings”.
– Volume: adjust the alert volume to one of five levels;
– sensitivity: adjust the sensitivity level for line detection. To do this, select:
– “Low” line detected upon cross- ing;
– “Average” line detected on ap- proach;
– “high” line detected nearby.
Conditions for non-activation of alerts
– Direction indicators activated less than around two seconds before de- parting from the lane;
– very fast lane departure;
– driving continuously on a line;
– on bends, the function allows for slightly cutting the bend;
– hazard warning lights activated;
– ...
Vehicles not fitted with a navigation system
– With the vehicle at a standstill, press and hold the switch
5
OK
to access the settings menu;
– repeatedly press the control
6
up or down until you reach the “Driving as- sistance” menu. Press the switch
5
OK
;
– repeatedly press control
6
up or down until you reach the “Lane de- parture warning settings” menu, then press the switch
5
OK
.
– Volume: adjust the alert volume to one of three levels;
– sensitivity: adjust the sensitivity level for line detection. To do this select:
– “Low” line detected upon cross- ing;
– “Average” line detected on ap- proach;
– “high” line detected nearby.
Operating faults
In the event of a malfunction, a mes- sage “Lane departure warning check” is displayed on the instrument panel, and the visibility indicators for the left and right lines disappear from the instru- ment panel.
Consult an approved dealer.
2.46
ENG_UD54777_1
Alerte de sortie de voie (HFE - Renault)
BLIND SPOT WARNING
(1/4)
A
1
A
This system alerts the driver to other vehicles in the detection zone
A
.
The system is activated when the vehi- cle’s speed is between approximately
30 km/h (19 mph) and 140 km/h (87 mph).
This function uses sensors
1
installed in the front and rear bumper of both sides.
Special feature
Make sure that the sensors are not ob- scured (by dirt, mud, snow, etc.).
If a sensor is obscured, the message
“Blind spotclean sensor” will appear on the instrument panel. Clean the sen- sors.
This function is an addi- tional aid which indicates other vehicles in the blind spot area.
It can never in any case be a subs- titute for care nor for the driver’s responsibility while in charge of his vehicle.
2.47
ENG_UD54778_1
Avertisseur d’angle mort (HFE - Renault)
Blind spot warning blind spot warning signal ...........................
(up to the end of the DU) blind spot: warning signal ..........................
(up to the end of the DU)
BLIND SPOT WARNING
(2/4)
3
4
5
– repeatedly press control
5
up or down until you reach the “Blind spot alert” menu, then press the switch
4
OK
.
– Press the switch
4
OK
again to acti- vate or deactivate the function.
2
Activation/deactivation
Vehicles fitted with a navigation system
From the multimedia screen
3
, select the “Vehicle” menu, “Driving assist- ance”, “Blind spot alert” then choose
“ON” or “OFF”.
Vehicles not fitted with a navigation system
– With the vehicle at a standstill, press and hold the switch
4
OK
to access the settings menu;
– repeatedly press the control
5
up or down until you reach the “Driving as- sistance” menu. Press the switch
4
OK
;
You can access menu “Driving as- sistance” directly from button
2
.
2.48
ENG_UD54778_1
Avertisseur d’angle mort (HFE - Renault)
When the engine is started, the system remembers its position when the igni- tion was last switched off.
BLIND SPOT WARNING
(3/4)
B
C
D
1 4
4
5
Indicator
4
An indicator light
4
is located on each door mirror
5
.
Note: Clean the door mirrors
5
regu- larly, so that the indicator lights
4
can be seen properly.
Operation
This function will indicate:
– when the vehicle speed is between approximately 30 km/h (19 mph) and
140 km/h (87 mph);
– when another vehicle is in the blind spot area and travelling in the same direction as your vehicle.
If another vehicle is being overtaken, the indicator
4
will be activated only if that vehicle remains in the blind spot for more than one second.
Display
B
The function is activated and has not detected any vehicles.
Display
C
Initial warning: the indicator light
4
shows that a vehicle has been detected in the blind spot.
Display
D
When the direction indicator is acti- vated, the indicator light
4
flashes when a vehicle is detected in the blind spot on the side towards which you are about to steer. If you cancel the direction indica- tor, the function will return to the initial warning (display
C
).
Note: The system’s detection range operates according to a standard lane width. If you are driving in narrow traffic lanes, it may detect vehicles in other lanes.
2.49
ENG_UD54778_1
Avertisseur d’angle mort (HFE - Renault)
BLIND SPOT WARNING
(4/4)
4
B
C
Operating faults
If the system detects a fault, the mes- sage “Check blind spot alert” is dis- played on the instrument panel. Consult an authorised dealer.
Note:
When the engine is started, the indicator light
4
(display
B
) flashes three times. It is normal.
D
Conditions for non-function
– If the object is not moving;
– if traffic is heavy;
– the road is winding;
– if front and rear sensors both detect objects at the same time (e.g. when passing an articulated lorry).
– ...
– The system’s detection range operates according to a standard lane width. If you are driving in wide traf- fic lanes, the system might not be able to detect a vehicle in the blind spot.
– The system might be disrupted momentarily if it is exposed to strong electromagnetic waves
(as beneath high-tension power lines) or to very poor weather conditions (heavy rain, snow, etc.). Remain aware of driving conditions.
There is a risk of accidents.
Because sensors have been installed in the bump- ers, any work (repairs, re- placements, touching up of paintwork) must be carried out by a qualified professional.
2.50
ENG_UD54778_1
Avertisseur d’angle mort (HFE - Renault)
SPEED LIMITER
(1/3)
2 a 3 b
4
1
The speed limiter function helps you stay within the driving speed limit that you choose, known as the
limit speed
.
Controls
1
Main “On/Off” switch.
2
Controls for:
a
speed limiter activation, memory and increase (+);
b
decreasing the speed limiter (-).
3
Activation and recall of memorised limited speed (R).
4
Speed limiter function standby (with limited speed memory) (O).
If you wish, you can associate the speed limiter and the “Overspeed alert” function (please refer to the in- formation on the “Overspeed alert” in Section 2).
Switching on
Press switch light
1
on side
. Indicator
comes on, lit orange, and the message “Speed limiter” appears on the instrument panel, accompanied by dashes to indicate that the speed lim- iter function is activated and waiting to store a limit speed.
To store the current speed, press switch
2
side
a
(+): the limited speed replaces the dashes.
The minimum stored speed is 20 mph
(30 km/h).
2.51
ENG_UD68351_3
Régulateur-limiteur de vitesse : fonction limiteur (HFE - Renault)
Speed limiter driving ........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) speed limiter ..............................................
(up to the end of the DU) cruise control-speed limiter........................
(up to the end of the DU)
SPEED LIMITER
(2/3)
2 b a
Driving
When a limited speed has been stored and this speed is not reached, driving is similar to driving a vehicle without the speed limiter function.
Once you have reached the stored speed, no effort on the accelerator pedal will allow you to exceed the programmed speed except in an emergency (refer to information on
“Exceeding the limit speed”).
Varying the limit speed
The speed limiter can be changed by repeatedly pressing the switch
2
:
– side
a
(+) to increase the speed;
– side
b
(-) to reduce the speed.
Exceeding the limit speed
It is possible to exceed the limit speed at any time. To do this: press the accelerator pedal
firmly and fully
(beyond the resistance point).
While the speed is being exceeded, the speed limiter flashes red on the instru- ment panel.
Then, release the accelerator: the speed limiter function will return as soon as you reach a speed lower than the stored speed.
Limited speed cannot be maintained
If driving up or down a steep gradient, the system is unable to maintain the limited speed: the memorised speed flashes red on the instrument panel and a beep sounds at regular intervals to inform you.
The speed limiter function is in no way linked to the brak- ing system.
2.52
ENG_UD68351_3
Régulateur-limiteur de vitesse : fonction limiteur (HFE - Renault)
SPEED LIMITER
(3/3)
2 a 3
4
Putting the function on standby
The speed limiter function is sus- pended when you press switch
4
(O).
In this case, the limit speed remains stored and the message “Memorised” accompanied by this speed appears on the instrument panel.
Recalling the limit speed
If a speed has been stored, it can be re- called by pressing switch
3
(R).
1
Switching off the function
The speed limiter function is deacti- vated if you press switch
1
: in this case a speed is no longer stored. The orange
warning light and message on the instrument panel goes out to confirm that the function is deactivated.
When the speed limiter is put on standby, pressing side
a
(+) on the switch
2
reactivates the func- tion without taking into account the stored speed: it is the speed at which the vehicle is moving that is taken into account.
2.53
ENG_UD68351_3
Régulateur-limiteur de vitesse : fonction limiteur (HFE - Renault)
OVERSPEED ALERT
(1/3)
1
The overspeed alert with signage panel recognition notifies the driver that they are exceeding the speed limit for the section of road on which they are cur- rently travelling.
Operating principle
The system detects speed limit signs on the side of the road and displays the speed limit.
This mainly uses information taken from the camera
1
, attached to the windscreen behind the rear-view mirror.
Note:
Make sure the windscreen is not obstructed (dirt, ice, snow, etc.).
With the engine running, once you have activated the system, dashes on the in- strument panel notify the driver that the system is running.
When a speed limit sign is detected, this speed will replace the dashes for a few seconds, after which the dashes will come on again until the next speed limit sign is detected.
Once the speed limiter is activated, you can adjust the speed limiter indication displayed by the system.
In the event of exceeding the speed limit, the sign display is modified (the characters change to red or the circle around the sign flashes) no notify you.
Vehicle fitted with a navigation system
– If the vehicle is travelling in a coun- try where the speed units differ from those of the vehicle, the system dis- plays the speed limit sign in the unit of the country, alongside the speed limit converted to the unit used by the vehicle’s instrument panel.
– For countries where the speed limit is reduced during rainy weather on some types of roads, the system can modify the limited speed after a few seconds of wiping the windscreen.
Special situation
The system does not take into account exceptional speed limit measures, such as peak pollution days.
2.54
Speeding alert overspeed warning ....................................
(up to the end of the DU) sign detection: overspeed warning ............
(up to the end of the DU)
ENG_UD54780_1
Alerte de survitesse (HFE - Renault)
OVERSPEED ALERT
(2/3)
2
3
4 a b
5
6
Activating/deactivating the system
Vehicles fitted with a navigation system
From the multimedia screen
2
, select the “Vehicle” menu, “Driving aids”,
“Speed alert settings”, then select “ON” or “OFF”.
You can access menu “Driving as- sistance” directly from button
3
.
With the function activated and de- pending on local laws, you can activate the “increased vigilance zones”. The system will notify you of the distance separating you from this zone, and while you are travelling in the zone.
Vehicles not fitted with a navigation system
– With the vehicle at a standstill, press and hold the switch
5
OK
to access the settings menu;
– repeatedly press the control
6
up or down until you reach the “Aides à la conduite” menu. Press the switch
5
OK
;
– repeatedly press the control
6
up or down until you reach the Speed alert menu, then press the switch
5
OK
.
– Press
OK
to turn the function on or off.
Varying the limit speed
If the speed limiter notification differs from the detected speed value, press and hold the switch
4
:
– side
a
(+) to increase the notification speed to the detected speed;
– side
b
(-) to reduce the notification speed to the detected speed.
2.55
ENG_UD54780_1
Alerte de survitesse (HFE - Renault)
OVERSPEED ALERT
(3/3)
Operating fault
The system cannot detect the speed limit if:
– the windscreen is not clean;
– the camera is blinded by the sun;
– there is insufficient visibility (night, fog, etc.);
– the signs are not legible (snow, etc.) or are hidden (by another vehicle or by trees);
– the information taken from the navi- gation system is not up to date.
This function is an additional driving aid. However, this function is not under any circumstances intended to replace the due care and attention of the driver, who should at all times be in control of the vehicle.
The driver should always adapt their speed to the traffic conditions, re- gardless of the system indications.
The system enables maximum speed signs to be detected and does not detect other traffic signage.
The driver should not, however, ignore signs which are not detected by the system and should as a priority comply with the traffic signage and the highway code.
In the event of poor visibility (fog, snow, frost, etc.), it is possible that the system may not indicate the correct speed to the driver.
The driver should always adapt their speed to the traffic conditions, regardless of the system indications.
2.56
ENG_UD54780_1
Alerte de survitesse (HFE - Renault)
CRUISE CONTROL
(1/4) a
3
2 b
4
1
The cruise control function helps you to maintain your driving speed at a speed that you choose, called the
cruising speed.
This cruising speed may be set at any speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).
Controls
1
Main “On/Off” switch.
2
Controls for:
a
cruising speed activation, storage and increase (+);
b
decreasing cruising speed (-).
3
Activation with recall of saved cruis- ing speed (R).
4
Switch the function to standby (with cruising speed saved) (O).
This function is an addi- tional driving aid. The func- tion does not take the place of the driver. Therefore, it can under no circumstances replace the driver’s responsibility to respect speed limits and to be vigilant (the driver must always be ready to brake). Cruise control must not be used in heavy traffic, on winding or slippery roads (black ice, aquaplan- ing, gravel) and during bad weather
(fog, rain, side winds etc.).
There is a risk of accidents.
The cruise control function is in no way linked to the braking system.
2.57
ENG_UD68352_3
Régulateur-limiteur de vitesse : fonction régulateur (HFE - Renault)
Cruise control driving ........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) cruise control .............................................
(up to the end of the DU) cruise control-speed limiter........................
(up to the end of the DU)
CRUISE CONTROL
(2/4)
1
Switching on
Press switch
1
on side
.
Indicator light
comes on, lit green, and the message “Cruise control” ap- pears on the instrument panel, accom- panied by dashes to indicate that the cruise control function is activated and waiting to store a cruising speed.
Activating cruise control
At a steady speed (above approx.
20 mph (30 km/h)), press the switch
2
on side
a
(+): the function is activated and the current speed is saved.
The cruising speed replaces the dashes and cruise control is confirmed by the appearance of the message “Cruise control” and the warning light
.
If you try to activate the function below
19 mph (30 km/h), the message “Invalid speed” will be displayed and the func- tion will remain inactive.
2 a
Driving
Once a cruising speed is memorised and the cruise control function is active, you may lift your foot off the accelera- tor pedal.
gency.
Please note that you are strongly advised to keep your feet close to the pedals in order to react in an emer-
2.58
ENG_UD68352_3
Régulateur-limiteur de vitesse : fonction régulateur (HFE - Renault)
CRUISE CONTROL
(3/4)
2 a b
Adjusting the cruising speed
The cruising speed can be changed by pressing the switch
2
repeatedly:
– side (+) to increase the speed;
– side (-) to reduce the speed.
Exceeding the cruising speed
The cruising speed may be exceeded at any time by depressing the accelera- tor pedal. While overtaking, the cruis- ing speed flashes red on the instrument panel.
Then, release the accelerator: after a few seconds, the vehicle will automati- cally return to its set cruising speed.
Cruising speed cannot be maintained
If driving up or down a steep gradi- ent, the system is unable to maintain the cruising speed: the stored speed is flashes red on the instrument panel to inform you of this situation.
The cruise control function is in no way linked to the braking system.
ENG_UD68352_3
Régulateur-limiteur de vitesse : fonction régulateur (HFE - Renault)
2.59
CRUISE CONTROL
(4/4)
2 a 3
4
Putting the function on standby
The function is set to standby if you:
– use the switch
4
(O);
– the brake pedal;
– depress the clutch pedal or the shift into neutral if the vehicle has an au- tomatic gearbox.
In these three cases, the cruising speed remains stored and the mes- sage “Memorised” accompanied by this speed appears on the instrument panel.
Standby is confirmed by the display of the cruising speed in grey and the mes- sage “Memorised”.
Returning to the cruising speed
If a speed is stored, it can be recalled, once you are sure that the road con- ditions are suitable (traffic, road sur- face, weather conditions, etc.). Press switch
3
(R) if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (30 km/h).
When the stored speed is recalled, activation of the cruise control is con- firmed by the illumination of the cruis- ing speed in green, along with the mes- sage “Check cruise control”.
NB:
if the speed previously stored is much higher than the current speed, the vehicle will accelerate more rapidly to reach this threshold.
When the cruise control function is put on standby, pressing the switch
2
on side
a
(+) reactivates the cruise control function with- out taking into account the stored speed: it is the speed at which the vehicle is moving that is taken into account.
2.60
1
Switching off the function
The cruise control function is deacti- vated if you press switch
1
: in this case a speed is no longer stored. The green
warning light and message on the instrument panel goes out to confirm that the function is deactivated.
Putting the cruise control on standby or switching it off does not cause a rapid reduction in speed: you must brake by depressing the brake pedal.
ENG_UD68352_3
Régulateur-limiteur de vitesse : fonction régulateur (HFE - Renault)
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
(1/7)
When traffic conditions permit (large free-flowing road or motorway), the adaptive cruise control gives you the option of maintaining a chosen speed, known as the cruising speed, which can be set from 31 mph to 87 mph (50 and
140 km/h), or 93 mph (150 km/h) de- pending on the vehicle, while keeping a following distance from the vehicle in front in the same lane.
The sensor has a range of 120 metres.
Note:
The driver should take into ac- count the maximum speed limit in the country where they are driving.
Note:
the adaptive cruise control can brake the vehicle up to a third of the braking capacity. Depending on the situation, the driver may need to brake harder.
This function is an addi- tional driving aid. This func- tion does not take the place of the driver.
Therefore, it can under no circum- stances replace the driver’s respon- sibility to respect speed limits and to be vigilant (the driver must always be ready to brake).
The adaptive cruise control should not be used in heavy traffic, on winding or slippery roads (black ice, aquaplaning, gravel) and during bad weather (fog, rain, side winds etc.).
There is a risk of accidents.
1
Sensor location
Make sure that the sensor
1
is not ob- scured (by dirt, mud, snow, etc.).
2.61
Adaptive cruise control adaptive cruise control...............................
(up to the end of the DU) driving ........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) adaptive cruise control...............................
(up to the end of the DU) driving aids ................................................
(up to the end of the DU) driver assistance........................................
(up to the end of the DU)
ENG_UD63860_1
Régulateur de vitesse à contrôle de distance (HFE - Renault)
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
(2/7) a
3
2 b
4
6
Controls
5
Main “On/Off” switch.
2
Controls for:
–
a
cruising speed activation, storage and increase (+);
–
b
decreasing cruising speed (-).
3
Activation with recall of saved cruis- ing speed (R).
4
Switch the function to standby (with cruising speed saved) (O).
6
Adjusting following distance.
5
Switching on
Press switch
5
. Indicator light
comes on, lit green, and the message
“Adaptive cruise ctrl” appears on the instrument panel, accompanied by dashes to indicate that the cruise con- trol function is activated and waiting to store a cruising speed.
Activating cruise control
At a steady speed (above approxi- mately 31 mph (50 km/h)), press the switch
2
on the
a
(+) side: the function is activated and the current speed is stored.
The cruising speed replaces the dashes and cruise control is confirmed by the appearance of the message “Adaptive cruise ctrl” and the warning light
.
If you try to activate the function while driving below around 31 mph (50 km/h) or above around 87 mph (140 km/h) or
93 mph (150 km/h) on some vehicles, the message “Invalid speed” is dis- played and the function will remain in- active.
Adjusting the following distance
Pressing switch
6
multiple times ad- justs the following distance.
2.62
ENG_UD63860_1
Régulateur de vitesse à contrôle de distance (HFE - Renault)
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
(3/7)
Driving
Once a cruising speed is memorised and the cruise control function is active, you may lift your foot off the accelera- tor pedal.
If a following distance is stored and a vehicle travelling slower than yours is detected by the system in your lane, your vehicle will brake (with the brake lights on) and adapt its speed to that of the vehicle in front, respecting the fol- lowing distance selected previously.
2 b a
Overtaking
If your speed is lower than the cruise control and you wish to perform an overtaking manoeuvre, activating the direction indicator will provide acceler- ation enabling the overtaking manoeu- vre.
6
A
Adjusting the cruising speed
The cruising speed can be changed by pressing the switch
2
repeatedly:
– side
a
(+) to increase the speed;
– side
b
(-) to reduce the speed.
Varying the following distance
You can vary the following distance from the vehicle in front at any time by pressing switch
6
repeatedly.
Horizontal following bars will be dis- played on the instrument panel, indicat- ing the following distance selected:
– one bar for a short distance (cor- responding to a following time of around one second);
– two bars for a medium distance;
– three bars for a long distance (corresponding to a following time of around two seconds).
Choosing the distance should depend on the traffic, the laws in your country, and on the weather conditions.
If a vehicle is detected by the system in your lane, an outline
A
of a vehicle will appear above the following bars.
Please note that you must keep your feet close to the pedals in order to react in an emergency.
2.63
ENG_UD63860_1
Régulateur de vitesse à contrôle de distance (HFE - Renault)
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
(4/7)
2 a 3
4
Exceeding the cruising speed
The cruising speed may be exceeded at any time by depressing the accelera- tor pedal.
When exceeding this speed, the cruis- ing speed and the following bars show red and the cruising speed flashes on the instrument panel: the distance con- trol function is no longer activated.
Then, release the accelerator: cruise and distance control will automatically reactivate unless the function has been set to standby.
Putting the function on standby
The function is set to standby if:
– you press switch
4
(O);
– you depress the brake pedal;
– you depress the clutch pedal;
– you use the gear lever;
– the vehicle speed is lower than
25 mph (40 km/h) or over 100 mph
(160 km/h);
– certain driver correction devices and aids are triggered (ABS, ESC, etc.)
In the latter two cases, the message
“Adaptive cruise ct disconnected” is displayed on the instrument panel when the function is set to standby.
Standby is confirmed by the display of the cruising speed in grey and the mes- sage “Adaptive cruise ctrl”.
Returning to the cruising speed
If a speed is stored, it can be recalled, once you are sure that the road con- ditions are suitable (traffic, road sur- face, weather conditions, etc.). Press switch
3
(R) if the vehicle speed is above around 30 mph (50 km/h).
When the stored speed is recalled, activation of the cruise control is con- firmed by the illumination of the cruis- ing speed in green, along with the mes- sage “Adaptive cruise ctrl”.
When the cruise control is set to standby, pressing switch
2
side
a
(+) reactivates the cruise control function without taking into account the stored speed – it is the speed at which the vehicle is moving that is taken into ac- count.
2.64
ENG_UD63860_1
Régulateur de vitesse à contrôle de distance (HFE - Renault)
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
(5/7)
Note:
if the speed previously stored is much higher than the current speed, the vehicle will accelerate to reach this threshold.
Under certain conditions (coming up behind a vehicle moving more slowly, rapid change of lane of vehicles in front etc.), the system may not have time to respond and may emit a beep along- side the alert
B
when the situation re- quires the driver’s attention, or the alert
C
when the situation requires im- mediate action from the driver.
React accordingly and perform the ap- propriate manoeuvres.
B
C
Please note that you must keep your feet close to the pedals in order to react in an emergency.
Putting the cruise control on standby or switching it off does not cause a rapid reduction in speed: you must brake by depressing the brake pedal.
5
Switching off the function
The cruise control function is deactivated if you press switch
5
: in this case a speed is no longer stored. The green
indicator light and the message
”Adaptive cruise ctrl” on the instrument panel go out to confirm that the function is deactivated.
2.65
ENG_UD63860_1
Régulateur de vitesse à contrôle de distance (HFE - Renault)
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
(6/7)
Operating faults
When the system detects an operating fault, the
warning light lights up on the instrument panel, with the mes- sage “Check cruise control”.
There are two possibilities:
– the system is temporarily disrupted
(for example: radar obscured by dirt, mud, snow etc.). In this case, park the vehicle and switch off the engine. Clean the detection zone of the radar. When you next start the engine, the warning light and the message go out;
– otherwise, this may be caused by another fault. Consult an approved dealer.
This function is an additional driving aid. This function is not under any circumstances intended to replace the due care and attention of the driver, who should at all times be in control of the vehicle.
The driver should always adapt their speed to the traffic conditions, re- gardless of the system indications.
The system should under no circumstances be taken to be an obstacle detector or an anti-collision system.
System servicing/repairs
– In the event of an impact, the sensor alignment may become changed, and its operation will consequently be affected. Deactivate the function, then consult an authorised dealer.
– Any work in the area where the radar is located (repairs, replacements, touch- ing up of paintwork) must be carried out by a qualified professional.
System disturbance
In a complex environment (metal bridge, etc.), the system may be affected.
Risk of inadvertent braking.
2.66
ENG_UD63860_1
Régulateur de vitesse à contrôle de distance (HFE - Renault)
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
(7/7)
Limitation of the system operation
– A vehicle travelling in the opposite direction will not trigger any alert or any action on the system operation.
– The sensor area should be kept clean and free of any modifications in order to ensure the proper operation of the system.
– Fixed obstacles (stationary vehicles, traffic jams, toll booths etc.) or objects travelling at low speed or of a small size (motor- bikes, bicycles, pedestrians etc.) may not be detected by the system.
– A vehicle entering the same lane will only be detected once it has entered the detection zone. Sudden or late braking may then take place.
– When entering a bend or curve, the sensor may temporarily no longer detect the vehicle in front, and this may lead to ac- celeration.
– When exiting a curve, the detection of the vehicle in front may be affected or delayed. Sudden or late braking may then take place.
– A slower vehicle travelling in an adjacent lane may be detected and cause a slowing down if one of the two vehicles is trav- elling too close to the lane of the other.
– The system is deactivated below around 20 mph (40 km/h). Drivers must react accordingly.
– Sudden changes in situation are not instantly taken into account by the system. Drivers must remain vigilant at all times and under all circumstances.
Deactivating the function
You must disable the function if:
– the brake lights are not functioning;
– the front of the vehicle has undergone an impact or been damaged;
– the vehicle is being towed (breakdowns);
– traffic is heavy;
– the vehicle is travelling in a tunnel;
– the vehicle is travelling on a windy road;
– the vehicle is travelling on a slippery road or in poor weather conditions (fog, snow, rain, side winds etc.).
In the event of the system behaving abnormally, deactivate it and consult an authorised dealer.
2.67
ENG_UD63860_1
Régulateur de vitesse à contrôle de distance (HFE - Renault)
PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL
(1/5)
Operating principle
Ultrasonic sensors in the rear bumper measure the distance between the ve- hicle and an obstacle.
This measurement is indicated by beeps which become more frequent the closer you come to the obstacle, until they become a continuous beep when the vehicle is approximately 20 to
30 centimetres from the obstacle.
The system detects obstacles to the front, the rear and the sides of the ve- hicle.
The parking distance control system is only activated when the vehicle is driven at a speed below approximately
6 mph (10 km/h).
The parking distance control system does not take into account towing and load carrying systems etc.
1
Special features
Ensure that the ultrasonic sensors indi- cated by arrows
1
are not obscured (by dirt, mud, snow, etc.).
This function is an addi- tional aid that indicates the distance between the vehi- cle and an obstacle whilst reversing, using sound signals.
Under no circumstances should it replace the driver’s care or respon- sibility whilst reversing.
The driver should always be ready for sudden incidents while driv- ing: always ensure that there are no small, narrow moving obstacles
(such as a child, animal, pushchair, bicycle, stone, post, etc.) in the blind spot when manoeuvring.
2.68
Parking distance control parking distance control.............................
(up to the end of the DU) driving ........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) reversing sensor ........................................
(up to the end of the DU)
ENG_UD64428_2
Aide au parking (HFE - Renault)
PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL
(2/5)
2
C
A B
Note:
the display
2
shows the vehicle surroundings and emits beeps.
It is necessary to travel a few metres before the side detection is activated.
If all areas have a grey background, the whole area around the vehicle is being monitored:
–
A
: analysis of the vehicle surround- ings in progress;
–
B
: analysis of the vehicle surround- ings carried out
Operation
Most objects located less near the front, rear and sides of the vehicle are detected.
Depending on the distance of the obstacle, the frequency of the beep will be higher while approaching it, and will become a continuous beep around
20 cm away for obstacles to the sides, and around 30 cm for obstacles to the front or rear. Green, orange and red zones will be displayed on the display
C
.
ENG_UD64428_2
Aide au parking (HFE - Renault)
2.69
PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL
(3/5)
D
3
If a side obstacle is detected:
– the beeps become faster and then sound continuously as the obstacle gets nearer. Green, orange and red zones will be displayed on the dis- play
D
;
– if there is no risk of collision, no beep will sound when approaching the ob- stacle. Green, orange and red zones will be displayed interspersed on the display
D
.
Note:
in the event of a change in tra- jectory during a manoeuvre, the risk of collision with an obstacle may be sig- nalled late.
Detection of obstacles to the side
Depending on the direction of the wheels, the system determines the tra- jectory of the vehicle and notifies the driver of any risk or otherwise of a col- lision with an obstacle
3
to the side of the vehicle.
An impact to the under- side of the vehicle while manoeuvring (e.g. strik- ing a post, raised kerb or other street furniture) may result in damage to the vehicle (e.g. defor- mation of an axle).
To avoid any risk of accident, have your vehicle checked by an approved Dealer.
2.70
ENG_UD64428_2
Aide au parking (HFE - Renault)
PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL
(4/5)
System sound
Enables the system sound to be se- lected from a choice of 3.
4
Deactivating the system sound
Activate or deactivate the parking dis- tance control sound.
Note:
If you deactivate the sound, you will no longer be notified with beeps when approaching an obstacle.
Deactivating the system
Activate or deactivate parking distance control.
Adjustment
You can adjust certain settings from the multifunction screen
4
. Please see the equipment instructions for further infor- mation.
Vehicles fitted with a navigation system
Select “Vehicle”, “PARKING ASSIST”,
“Obstacle detection”.
Parking distance control audio volume
Adjust the volume of the parking dis- tance control by pressing
+
or
-
.
Vehicles not fitted with a navigation system
Vehicle stationary:
– press and hold the switch
5
OK
to access the settings menu;
– repeatedly press the control
6
up or down until you reach the “Driving as- sistance” menu;
– press the switch
5
OK
;
– repeatedly press the control
6
up or down until you reach the “Parking distance control settings” menu;
5
6
– press the switch
5
OK
;
– using the control
6
, select the set- tings to be changed;
– press the switch
5
OK
.
When the vehicle is being driven at a speed below approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h), certain noises (motorcy- cle, lorry, pneumatic drill, etc.) may trigger the beeping sound of the parking distance control.
2.71
ENG_UD64428_2
Aide au parking (HFE - Renault)
PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL
(5/5)
Automatic deactivation of the parking distance control
The system deactivates:
– when the vehicle speed is above approximately 6 mph (10 km/h);
– depending on the model, when the vehicle is stationary for more than approximately 5 seconds and an ob- stacle is detected (such as when in a traffic jam, etc.);
– when the vehicle is in neutral for manual gearboxes, or in position
N
or
P
for automatic gearboxes.
Operating faults
When the system detects an operating fault, a beep sounds for approximately
3 seconds each time reverse gear is se- lected and is accompanied by the mes- sage “Check parking sensor” shown on the instrument panel. Consult an ap- proved dealer.
2.72
ENG_UD64428_2
Aide au parking (HFE - Renault)
REVERSING CAMERA
(1/2)
2
A
B
3
C
4
3
4
1
Operation
When the vehicle is reversing, the camera
1
on the tailgate transmits a view of the area surrounding the rear of the vehicle to the multimedia display
2
accompanied by one of two guide lines
4
and
3
(mobile and fixed).
This system is initially used with the aid of several gauges (mobile for trajectory and fixed for distance). When the red zone is reached, use the bumper image to stop accurately.
Fixed gauge 3
The fixed clearance gauge comprises coloured markers
A
,
B
and
C
, indicat- ing the distance behind the vehicle:
–
A
(red) approximately 30 centimetres from the vehicle;
–
B
(yellow) approximately 70 centimetres from the vehicle;
–
C
(green) approximately 150 centimetres from the vehicle.
This gauge remains fixed and indicates the vehicle trajectory if the wheels are in line with the vehicle.
4
moving guide line:
This is shown in blue on the multime- dia screen
2
. It indicates the vehicle tra- jectory according to the position of the steering wheel.
Special feature
Make sure that the camera is not ob- scured (by dirt, mud, snow, condensa- tion etc.).
2.73
ENG_UD59470_2
Caméra de recul (HFE - Renault)
Reversing camera rear view camera .......................................
(up to the end of the DU) driving aids ................................................
(up to the end of the DU) driver assistance........................................
(up to the end of the DU) driving ........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) parking distance control.............................
(up to the end of the DU) assisted parking.........................................
(up to the end of the DU) parking assistance: assisted parking .........
(up to the end of the DU) screens multimedia screen ................................
(up to the end of the DU)
REVERSING CAMERA
(2/2)
You can also adjust the camera image settings (brightness, contrast, etc.)
2
Activating, deactivating the reversing camera
From the multimedia screen
2
, select
“Vehicle”, “Settings”, “Parking as- sistance”, then “Rear view camera”.
Activate or deactivate the reversing camera and confirm your choice.
The screen shows a reverse mirror image.
The frames are a representation projected onto flat ground; this in- formation must not be taken into account when superimposed on a vertical object or an object on the ground.
Objects which appear on the edge of the screen may be deformed.
In very bright light (snow, vehicle in sunshine, etc.), the camera vision may be adversely affected.
If the boot is open or poorly closed, the message “Boot open” appears and the camera display disappears.
This function is an additional aid. It cannot, therefore, under any circumstances replace the vigilance or the responsibility of the driver.
The driver should always be ready for sudden incidents while driv- ing: always ensure that there are no small, narrow moving obstacles
(such as a child, animal, pushchair, bicycle, stone, post, etc.) in the blind spot when manoeuvring.
2.74
ENG_UD59470_2
Caméra de recul (HFE - Renault)
ASSISTED PARKING
(1/4)
2
1
2
3
This function assists with parking ma- noeuvres.
Take your hands off the steering wheel.
You only control the pedals and the gear lever.
You can retake control at any time by operating the steering wheel.
Switching on
With the vehicle at a standstill or driving at less than approximately 18.6 mph
(30 km/h), press switch
1
. The warn- ing light integrated on switch
1
lights up and the
2
screen appears on the multi- function screen.
Special features
Ensure that the ultrasonic sensors indi- cated by arrows
3
are not obscured (by dirt, mud, snow, etc.).
2.75
Assisted parking parking assistance: assisted parking .........
(up to the end of the DU) assisted parking.........................................
(up to the end of the DU)
ENG_UD54784_1
Parking mains libres (HFE - Renault)
ASSISTED PARKING
(2/4)
Choice of manoeuvre
The system can perform four types of manoeuvres:
– parallel parking;
– perpendicular parking;
– angle parking;
– moving out of a parallel parking space.
From the multifunction screen, select the manoeuvre to be performed.
Note:
When starting the vehicle, or after successfully completed parallel parking using the system, the default manoeuvre proposed by the system is assistance in exiting a parallel parking space. In other cases, the default ma- noeuvre can be set from the multifunc- tion screen.
Operation
Parking
As long as the vehicle speed is less than 20 mph (30 km/h), the system looks for available parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.
Once a space has been found, it is dis- played on the multifunction screen, indi- cated by a small letter “P”. Drive slowly, with the indicators activated on the side of the space, until the message “Stop” is displayed, alongside a beep.
The space is then indicated on the mul- tifunction screen by a capital “P”.
– Stop the vehicle;
– select reverse gear.
Warning light
lights up on the in- strument panel, along with a beep.
– release the steering wheel;
– follow the system instructions pro- vided on the multifunction screen.
Your speed should not exceed around
4 mph (7 km/h).
on the Once the warning light instrument panel goes off and a beep sounds, the manoeuvre has been com- pleted.
2.76
ENG_UD54784_1
Parking mains libres (HFE - Renault)
ASSISTED PARKING
(3/4)
1
Exiting a parallel parking space
– Select “exit parallel parking space” mode;
– activate the direction indicator on the side you wish to go out of;
– press and hold switch
1
(around
2 seconds).
lights up on the in- Warning light strument panel, along with a beep.
– release the steering wheel;
– go forwards and backwards using the parking distance control system alerts.
Your speed should not exceed around
4 mph (7 km/h).
Once in position to exit the space, the system will notify you of the end of the manoeuvre.
on the Once the warning light instrument panel goes off and a beep sounds, the manoeuvre has been com- pleted.
Suspending the manoeuvre
The manoeuvre is suspended in the fol- lowing circumstances:
– you take control of the wheel;
– a door or the boot is opened;
– the vehicle is at a standstill for too long;
– an obstacle in the direction of move- ment prevents the manoeuvre from being completed;
– the engine will stop.
Once the warning light
on the instrument panel goes off and a beep sounds, the manoeuvre has been sus- pended. Then to resume the manoeu- vre, press and hold the system activa- tion switch.
In this case, the reason for suspending the manoeuvre will be displayed on the multifunction screen.
Make sure:
– you have released the steering wheel and;
– that all doors and the boot are closed, and;
– that no obstacles are in the way of the direction of movement, and;
– that the engine is started.
Cancelling the manoeuvre
The manoeuvre can be stopped in the following cases:
– by pressing the system activation switch;
– the vehicle speed has exceeded
4 mph (7 km/h);
– You have performed more than ten forwards/backwards movements in one manoeuvre;
– the parking distance control sensors are dirty or blocked;
– the vehicle wheels have skidded.
Once the warning light
on the instrument panel goes off and a beep sounds, the manoeuvre has been ended.
2.77
ENG_UD54784_1
Parking mains libres (HFE - Renault)
ASSISTED PARKING
(4/4)
This function is an additional driving aid. However, this function is not under any circumstances intended to replace the due care and attention of the driver, who should at all times be in control of the vehicle.
Make sure that the manoeuvre complies with the applicable traffic regulations at your location.
– The driver should always look out for sudden hazards during driving: always ensure that there are no moving obstacles
(such as a child, animal, pram, bicycle, etc.) or small, narrow objects such as stones or posts in your path when manoeu- vring.
– The system cannot detect objects located in the sensor blind spots.
– When manoeuvring, the steering wheel may turn quickly: do not put your hands inside, and make sure that nothing is caught inside.
– Always visually check that the parking space proposed by the system is still available and contains no obstacles.
– The system should be deactivated when towing a trailer.
2.78
ENG_UD54784_1
Parking mains libres (HFE - Renault)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
(1/3)
2
1
Selector lever
1
P:
park
R:
reverse
N:
Neutral
D:
automatic mode
M:
manual mode
Note:
Press button
2
to go from posi- tion D or N to R or P.
3
:
displays the gear engaged in manual mode.
3
Operation
With the selection lever
1
in position
P
, switch on the ignition.
To move out of position
P
, you must de- press the brake pedal before pressing the unlocking button
2
.
With your foot on the brake pedal
(warning light goes out), move the lever out of posi- tion
P
.
Ó
on the display
3
Only engage D or R when the vehi- cle is stopped, with your foot on the brake and the accelerator pedal re- leased.
Driving in automatic mode
Move lever
1
to position
D
.
In most road conditions you will en- counter, you will not need to touch your lever again: the gears will change au- tomatically at the right time and at the most suitable engine speed because the automatic system takes into ac- count the vehicle load and road contour and adjusts itself to the particular driv- ing style you have chosen.
Economical driving
When driving, always leave the lever in position
D
, keeping the accelerator pedal lightly depressed to ensure auto- matic gear changes at a lower engine speed.
Accelerating and overtaking
Depress the accelerator pedal firmly and fully (so that it goes beyond the kickdown point).
This will enable you to change down to the optimum gear within the engine range.
2.79
ENG_UD59144_5
Boîte de vitesses automatique (HFE - Renault)
Automatic gearbox automatic gearbox (use) ............................
(up to the end of the DU) automatic gearbox selector lever...............
(up to the end of the DU) changing gear ............................................
(up to the end of the DU) driving ........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) operation....................................................
(current page)
Shift Paddle ...............................................
(current page) gear lever...................................................
(current page)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
(2/3)
1
Special cases
In certain driving conditions (result- ing in, for example, engine protection, operation of the Electronic Stability
Control programme: ESC etc.) the au- tomated system may change the gear automatically.
Likewise, to prevent incorrect manoeu- vres, a gear change may be refused by the automatic system: in this case the gear display flashes for a few seconds as a warning.
Special circumstances
–
If the bends and road surface
do not allow you to stay in automatic mode (e.g. in the mountains), we recommend that you change to manual mode. This will prevent the automatic gearbox from changing gear repeatedly when climbing, and permit engine braking on long de- scents.
–
In cold weather
, start the engine and wait a few seconds before moving the selector lever from posi- tion
P
or
N
and engaging it in
D
or
R
to prevent the engine stalling.
Driving in manual mode
With the selection lever
1
in position
D
, move the lever to the left.
Shifting the lever repeatedly allows you to change gears manually:
– to move up through the gears, push the lever forwards;
– to move down through the gears, push the lever backwards.
The gear selected is displayed on the instrument panel.
When facing uphill, to remain stopped, do not keep your foot on the accelerator.
Risk of overheating the automatic gearbox.
2.80
ENG_UD59144_5
Boîte de vitesses automatique (HFE - Renault)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
(3/3)
Parking the vehicle
When the vehicle is stopped, move the lever to position
P
while keeping your foot on the brake pedal: the gearbox is in neutral and the drive wheels are me- chanically locked by the driveshaft.
Apply the handbrake or, depending on the vehicle, ensure that the elec- tronic parking brake is applied.
Maintenance period
Refer to the maintenance document for your vehicle or consult an Approved
Dealer to check whether the automatic gearbox requires scheduled mainte- nance.
If it does not need to be serviced, there is no need to top up the oil.
An impact to the under- side of the vehicle while manoeuvring (e.g.: strik- ing a post, raised kerb or other street furniture) may result in damage to the vehicle (e.g.: defor- mation of an axle).
To avoid any risk of accident, have your vehicle checked by an approved Dealer.
Operating faults
–
when driving
, if the message
“Check auto gearbox” appears on the instrument panel, it indicates a failure.
Contact your approved Dealer as soon as possible;
–
when driving,
if the message
“Gearbox overheating” appears on the instrument panel, stop as soon as possible to let the gearbox cool down and wait for the message to disappear;
–
If a vehicle with an automatic gearbox breaks down
, refer to the information on “Towing” in Section 5.
4
When setting off,
if the lever is locked in position
P
even though you are pressing the brake pedal, the lever can be released manually. To do this, insert a tool (with a hard rod) into the slot
4
to unlock the lever.
Contact an authorised dealer as soon as possible.
For safety reasons, do not switch off the ignition before the vehicle has come to a complete standstill.
2.81
ENG_UD59144_5
Boîte de vitesses automatique (HFE - Renault) operating faults accidents ..............................................
(current page) operating faults ..........................................
(current page)
2.82
ENG_UD36645_1
Filler NU (HFE - Renault)
Section 3: Your comfort
3.1
ENG_UD68666_6
Sommaire 3 (HFE - Renault)
AIR VENTS, air outlets
(1/2)
2
2
3
1
4
6
4
7
5
1
left-hand air vent
2
windscreen demisting vents
3
centre air vents
4
side window demister outlets
5
right-hand air vent
6
multifunction screen
7
footwell heater outlets for front pas- sengers
8
footwell heater outlets for rear pas- sengers (depending on the vehicle)
8
7
8
3.2
Air Vents air vents .....................................................
(up to the end of the DU) ventilation ..................................................
(up to the end of the DU)
ENG_UD54787_1
Aérateurs (sorties air) (HFE - Renault)
AIR VENTS, air outlets
(2/2)
9
10
11
12
Centre air vents.
Air flow
Move the control knob
10
(beyond the resistance point).
Upwards: closed.
Down: maximum air flow.
Direction
Move the cursors
9
to the desired po- sition.
Side air vents
Air flow
Move the control knob
11
(beyond the resistance point).
Upwards: closed.
Down: maximum air flow.
Direction
Move the cursors
12
to the desired po- sition.
Do not add anything to the vehicle’s ventilation circuit
(for example, to remove bad odours).
There is a risk of damage or of fire.
3.3
ENG_UD54787_1
Aérateurs (sorties air) (HFE - Renault)
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING
(1/3)
A B C D
1
2 3 4
The controls
1
Adjusting the air temperature.
2
Air recirculation.
3
“Clear View” function.
4
Adjusting the ventilation speed.
5
Stopping the system.
6
De-icing/demisting of the rear screen and, depending on the vehicle, the door mirrors.
7
Air conditioning.
8
Adjusting air distribution in the pas- senger compartment.
5 6 7 8
Indicators
A
Air temperature.
B
Air recirculation.
C
Fan speed.
D
Distribution of air in the passenger compartment.
Switching air conditioning on or off
The air conditioning is switched on (in- dicator light on) or off (indicator light off) using the button
7
.
The air conditioning system is used for:
– lowering the temperature inside the passenger compartment;
– eliminating condensation more quickly.
Clear View function
Press button
3
– the integrated indica- tor light comes on.
This function quickly demists and de- ices the windscreen, the rear screen, the front side windows, and the door mirrors (depending on the vehicle). The air conditioning and rear screen de-ic- ing functions must be activated.
Press button
6
to stop the heated rear screen operating, and the integrated in- dicator goes out.
To exit this function,
press button
3
again.
3.4
Manual air conditioning and heating system
ENG_UD36706_1
Air conditionné manuel (HFE - Renault) air conditioning ..........................................
(up to the end of the DU) heating system ..........................................
(up to the end of the DU) air conditioning ..........................................
(up to the end of the DU) ventilation ..................................................
(up to the end of the DU) heating and air conditioning system ..........
(up to the end of the DU) demisting windscreen ...........................................
(up to the end of the DU) demisting rear screen ...........................................
(up to the end of the DU)
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING
(2/3)
Distribution of air in the passenger compartment
There are five air distribution options.
Turn control
8
to choose the distribution option.
The air distribution is displayed on the indicator
D
.
õ
The air flow is directed to the windscreen and the front side window demisting vents.
÷
The air flow is distributed between all the air vents, the front side window demisting vents, the windscreen demisting vents and the footwells.
ó
The air flow is directed mainly towards the footwells.
G
The air flow is directed towards the dashboard air vents, the front footwells and, depending on the vehicle, the second row footwells.
J
All the air flow is directed to the dashboard vents.
2
B
Switching the air recirculation on
Press the button
2
: the warning light
B
comes on. In these conditions, air is taken from the passenger compartment and is recycled, with no air being taken from outside the vehicle.
D
6 8
Air recirculation is for:
– isolating the vehicle from the exter- nal atmosphere (driving in polluted areas, etc.);
– lowering the passenger compartment temperature as quickly as possible.
Prolonged use of air recirculation can lead to condensation forming on the side windows and windscreen, and discomfort due to the use of non-renewed air in the passenger compartment. We therefore advise you to return to normal mode
(external air) as soon as the air recirculation function is no longer required, by pressing the button
6
again.
3.5
ENG_UD36706_1
Air conditionné manuel (HFE - Renault)
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING
(3/3)
A C
1
4
Varying the ventilation speed
You can adjust the fan speed by press- ing the buttons
4
to increase or reduce the fan speed.
The fan speed is displayed on the in- dicator
C
.
The system is stopped (OFF): the venti- lation speed is zero (vehicle stationary).
You can, however, still feel a slight flow of air when the vehicle is moving.
5 6 7
Adjusting the air temperature
Turn the control
1
to obtain the de- sired temperature. The more bars dis- played
A
, the higher the temperature.
When the air conditioning system is used for long periods, it may begin to feel cold. To increase the temperature, turn control
1
to the right.
The air temperature is displayed on the indicator
A
.
Rear screen de-icing/ demisting
With the engine running,
press button
6
. The operating tell-tale comes on.
This function permits rapid demisting/ de-icing of the rear screen and de-icing of the door mirrors (on equipped vehicles).
To exit this function,
press button
6
again.
Demisting automatically stops.
Stopping the system
To stop the system, press the button
5
OFF (the integrated warning light comes on).
The de-icing function cannot be used with the air recirculation mode to avoid any risk of condensation forming on the windscreen and trig- gers the air conditioning to come on.
The integrated light in button
7
does not come on.
3.6
ENG_UD36706_1
Air conditionné manuel (HFE - Renault)
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: control A
(1/6)
A
B C D E F
1 2 3 4 5 6
7
The controls
1
Stopping the system or, depending on the vehicle, de-icing/demisting the windscreen.
2
and
10
air temperature.
3
“Clear View” function.
4
and
5
Passenger compartment air distribution.
6
Fan speed and, depending on the ventilation, stopping the system.
7
Automatic programme.
8
Air conditioning.
8 9 10 11 12
9
Air recirculation.
11
De-icing/demisting of the rear screen and, depending on the vehicle, the door mirrors.
12
DUAL function.
Indicators
B
Left-hand side air temperature.
C
Distribution of air.
D
Fan speed.
E
Automatic air recirculation warning light.
F
Right-hand side air temperature.
Automatic mode
The automatic climate control system guarantees comfort in the passen- ger compartment and good visibility
(except in the event of extreme condi- tions), while optimising consumption.
The system controls the ventilation speed, air distribution, air recirculation, and starting and stopping the air condi- tioning and air temperature.
AUTO:
allows the selected com- fort level to be best attained, depend- ing on the exterior conditions. Press button
7
. The integrated indicator light on button
7
comes on.
Varying the ventilation speed
In automatic mode, the system uses the most suitable amount of air to reach and maintain the desired comfort level.
You can still adjust the fan speed by pressing the buttons
6
to increase or reduce the fan speed.
In this case, the integrated indicator light on button
7
goes out and the ven- tilation speed selected is displayed on the indicator
D
.
3.7
ENG_UD59835_2
Air conditionné automatique (HFE - Renault)
Automatic climate control air conditioning ..........................................
(up to the end of the DU) heating system ..........................................
(up to the end of the DU) air conditioning ..........................................
(up to the end of the DU) heated windscreen ....................................
(up to the end of the DU) temperature regulation ..............................
(up to the end of the DU) ventilation ..................................................
(up to the end of the DU) heating and air conditioning system ..........
(up to the end of the DU) demisting rear screen ...........................................
(up to the end of the DU) demisting windscreen ...........................................
(up to the end of the DU) windscreen de-icing/demisting ..................
(up to the end of the DU)
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: control A
(2/6)
2
Temperature adjustment
There are two types of settings:
– uniform passenger compartment setting;
– adjustment in DUAL function to inde- pendently adjust the left and/or right- hand side of the passenger compart- ment.
Uniform passenger compartment setting
Use control
2
.
10
12
DUAL function setting
Press button
12
to activate.
Use the control
2
to adjust the left side and control
10
for the right side.
The displayed temperature values show a comfort level.
When starting the engine, increas- ing or decreasing the value dis- played will not allow the com- fort level to be reached any more quickly. The system will always op- timise the temperature increase or decrease (the ventilation system does not start instantly at maximum speed: it gradually increases). This may take several minutes.
Generally speaking, unless there is a particular reason not to, the dash- board air vents should remain open.
3.8
ENG_UD59835_2
Air conditionné automatique (HFE - Renault)
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: control A
(3/6)
13
3 6
Switching air conditioning on or off
In automatic mode, the system switches the air conditioning system on or off, depending on the climate conditions.
Press the switch
8
to force activation
(the integrated warning light comes on) or stop the air conditioning (the inte- grated warning light goes out).
7
8
11
Preferably, use automatic mode.
In automatic mode (warning light
7
is on), all climate control functions are controlled by the system.
You can always modify the choice of system; in this case, the warning light in the button
7
goes out.
To return to automatic mode, press programme
AUTO
.
Vehicles fitted with the ECO mode (button
13
): Once activated, the ECO mode may reduce the ef- fective performance of the air con- ditioning. Please refer to the infor- mation on “Eco-driving” in Section 2.
3.9
ENG_UD59835_2
Air conditionné automatique (HFE - Renault)
ECO mode .................................................
(current page) equipment multimedia ...........................................
(current page)
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: control A
(4/6)
Clear View function
This function quickly demists and deices the windscreen, the rear screen, the front side windows, and the door mirrors (depending on the vehicle). The air conditioning and rear screen de-icing functions must be activated.
Press button
3
– the integrated indica- tor light comes on.
To stop the operation of the rear screen, press the de-icer button
11
. The inte- grated warning light will go out.
You can change the fan speed: press the button
6
.
To exit this function,
press button
3
again.
3 4 5
C
6
Adjusting the distribution of air in the passenger compartment
There are five air distribution options.
Press switches
4
and
5
to scroll through them. The arrows located on the indica- tor
C
combine to show you the distribu- tion selected:
õ
All the air is then directed to the windscreen and front side window demisting vents.
11
÷
The air flow is distributed be- tween front side window de- misting vents, the windscreen demist- ing vents and the footwells.
ó
The air flow is directed mainly towards the footwells.
G
The air flow is directed to the dashboard vents and the foot- wells.
J
All the air flow is directed to the dashboard vents.
Some buttons have an operating tell-tale which indicates the operating status.
3.10
ENG_UD59835_2
Air conditionné automatique (HFE - Renault)
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: control A
(5/6)
1
De-icing or demisting the windscreen
With the engine running, press the button
1
– the integrated indicator will come on.
This function enables quick electric de- icing/demisting.
11
Rear screen de-icing/ demisting
Press button
11
– the integrated indi- cator light comes on. This function en- ables rapid demisting or de-icing of the rear screen and de-icing of the door mirrors (on equipped vehicles).
To exit this function,
press button
11
again. Demisting automatically stops.
ENG_UD59835_2
Air conditionné automatique (HFE - Renault)
3.11
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: control A
(6/6)
Recycling
This function is managed automati- cally (operation is confirmed by warn- ing light
E
), but you can also activate it manually.
Note:
– during recirculation, air is taken from the passenger compartment and is recycled, with no air being taken from outside the vehicle;
– air recirculation allows the external atmosphere to be cut off (when driving in polluted areas, etc.);
– lowering the passenger compartment temperature as quickly as possible.
1 6
Manual use
Pressing the button
9
allows air recir- culation to be forced. In this case, the integrated warning light comes on and the indicator
E
goes out.
Prolonged use of this position may lead to odours, caused by non-renewal of air, and the formation of condensation on the windows.
We therefore advise you to return to au- tomatic mode as soon as air recircula- tion is no longer needed, by pressing button
9
.
7
E
9
Stopping the system
To stop the system, press the button
1
OFF (the integrated warning light comes on) or, depending on the ve- hicle, reduce the fan speed down to a minimum by pressing the button
6
marked by OFF as many times as is necessary.
To start, press the switch
7
.
The demisting/de-icing will still take priority over the air recirculation.
3.12
ENG_UD59835_2
Air conditionné automatique (HFE - Renault)
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: control B
(1/4)
B
1
10
2
9
3
The controls
1
Adjusting the driver’s air tempera- ture.
2
“Clear View” function.
3
Adjusting the ventilation fan speed.
4
Distribution of air in the passenger compartment.
5
Air conditioning control.
6
Adjusting the passenger’s air tem- perature.
7
Synchronising the driver’s and front passenger’s temperature.
8
Air recirculation.
9
De-icing/demisting of the rear screen and, depending on the vehicle, the rear view mirrors.
10
Automatic mode.
4 5
8 7
6
Automatic mode
The automatic climate control system guarantees comfort in the passenger compartment and good visibility
(except in the event of extreme conditions), while optimising consumption.
The system controls the ventilation speed, air distribution, air recirculation, and starting and stopping the air conditioning and air temperature.
AUTO:
allows the selected comfort level to be best attained, depending on the exterior conditions. Press button
10
.
Varying the ventilation speed
In automatic mode, the system uses the most suitable amount of air to reach and maintain the desired comfort level.
You can still adjust the ventilation speed by turning control
3
to increase or reduce the ventilation speed.
Adjusting the air temperature
Turn control
1
to increase or decrease the temperature on the left.
Turn control
6
to increase or decrease the temperature on the right.
Pressing button
7
sets the passenger’s temperature to the driver’s tempera- ture.
3.13
ENG_UD59835_2
Air conditionné automatique (HFE - Renault)
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: control B
(2/4)
Clear View function
Press the
2
button: the integrated indi- cator light comes on.
This function quickly demists and de- ices the windscreen, the rear screen, the front side windows, the door mir- rors (depending on the vehicle) and the heated windscreen (depending on the vehicle). The air conditioning and rear screen de-icing functions must be ac- tivated.
Press button
9
to stop the heated rear screen operating, and the integrated in- dicator goes out.
To exit this function,
press button
2
or turn control
3
.
2
9
3
Adjusting the distribution of air in the passenger compartment
Press the button
4
.
õ
All the air is then directed to the windscreen and front side window demisting vents.
÷
The air flow is distributed be- tween front side window de- misting vents, the windscreen demist- ing vents and the footwells.
4
ö
The air flow is directed towards the dashboard air vents, the front footwells and, depending on the vehicle, the second row footwells.
ô
The air flow is mainly directed to the dashboard air vents.
ó
The air flow is directed mainly towards the footwells.
Some buttons have an operating tell-tale which indicates the operating status.
3.14
ENG_UD59835_2
Air conditionné automatique (HFE - Renault)
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: control B
(3/4)
5
11
9
Rear screen de-icing/ demisting
Press the
9
button: the integrated in- dicator light comes on. This function enables rapid demisting or de-icing of the rear screen and de-icing of the rear view mirrors (on equipped vehicles).
To exit this function,
press button
9
again. Demisting automatically stops.
Switching air conditioning on or off
In automatic mode, the system switches the air conditioning system on or off, depending on the climate conditions.
Press the button
5
to force the air con- ditioning to stop. The integrated warn- ing light will go out.
Vehicles fitted with ECO mode
(switch
11
or, depending on the vehicle, from the multime- dia screen):
once activated, ECO mode may reduce the performance of the automatic air conditioning.
Please refer to the information on
“Eco-driving” in Section 2
3.15
ENG_UD59835_2
Air conditionné automatique (HFE - Renault)
ECO mode .................................................
(current page) equipment multimedia ...........................................
(current page)
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: control B
(4/4)
3
Stopping the system
Turn the control
3
to “
OFF
” to stop the system. To start it, turn control
6
to adjust the fan speed.
Air recirculation (isolation of the passenger compartment)
This function is managed automatically
(operation is confirmed by a warning light on button
8
), but you can also acti- vate it manually.
8
Manual use
Press the
8
button: the integrated indi- cator light comes on.
Prolonged use of this position may lead to odours, caused by non-renewal of air, and the formation of condensation on the windows.
We therefore advise you to return to au- tomatic mode as soon as air recircula- tion is no longer needed, by pressing button
8
.
The demisting/de-icing will still take priority over the air recirculation.
3.16
Fuel consumption increases when the air conditioning is being used
(switch it off when it is not required).
ENG_UD59835_2
Air conditionné automatique (HFE - Renault)
AIR CONDITIONING: information and operating instructions
(1/2)
Advice on use
In some situations (air conditioning off, air recirculation activated, ventilation speed at zero or low etc.), you may notice that condensation starts to form on the windows and windscreen.
If there is condensation, use the
“Clear
View”
function to remove it, then use the air conditioning in automatic mode to stop it forming again.
Fuel consumption
You will normally notice an increase in fuel consumption (especially in town) when the air conditioning is operating.
For vehicles fitted with air conditioning with no automatic mode, switch off the system when it is not required.
Advice for reducing consumption and helping to preserve the environ- ment
Drive with the air vents open and the windows closed.
If the vehicle has been parked in the sun, open the doors for a few moments to let the hot air escape before starting the engine.
Vehicles equipped with mode ECO
Once activated, ECO mode may reduce air conditioning perform- ance. Please refer to the informa- tion on “Driving advice, Eco-driving” in Section 2.
Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Document for your vehicle for the inspection fre- quency.
Operating faults
As a general rule, contact your ap- proved dealer in the event of an oper- ating fault.
– Reduction in de-icing, demisting or air conditioning performance.
This may be caused by the passen- ger compartment filter cartridge be- coming clogged.
–
No cold air is being produced
.
Check that the controls are set cor- rectly and that the fuses are sound.
Otherwise, switch off the system.
Presence of water under the vehicle
After prolonged use of the air condi- tioning system, it is normal for water to be present under the vehicle. This is caused by condensation.
Do not add anything to the vehicle’s ventilation circuit
(for example, to remove bad odours).
There is a risk of damage or of fire.
Use the air conditioning system reg- ularly, even in cold weather, running it at least once a month for approxi- mately 5 minutes.
Do not open the refriger- ant fluid circuit.
The fluid may damage eyes or skin.
ENG_UD68643_5
Air conditionné : informations et conseils d’utilisation (X61 - X62 - X10 - X98 - X87 - X82 - JFC - HFE - BFB - KFB - XFD - KFD - LFD Douai - XFA - Renault)
3.17
Air conditioning: information and advice on use air conditioning ..........................................
(up to the end of the DU) air conditioning ..........................................
(up to the end of the DU) heating and air conditioning system ..........
(current page)
AIR CONDITIONING: information and operating instructions
(2/2)
A
A
A
Ñ
Type of refrigerant fluid
Type of oil in the air condi- tioning circuit
Inflammable product
Consult the driver’s hand- book
Maintenance
The refrigerant fluid circuit (of which some components are hermetically sealed) may contain fluorinated green- house gases.
Depending on the vehicle, you will find the following information on label
A
af- fixed inside the engine compartment.
The presence and location of the infor- mation on label
A
depends on the ve- hicle.
Do not open the refriger- ant circuit.
The fluid may damage eyes or skin.
x.xxx kg
Quantity of refrigerant fluid present in the ve- hicle.
GWP xxxxx
Global Warming
Potential (CO2 equi- valent).
CO2 eq x.xx t
Quantity in weight and in CO2 equivalent.
Before performing any action in the engine com- partment, the ignition must be switched off (please see the information on “Starting, stop- ping the engine” in Section 2).
3.18
ENG_UD68643_5
Air conditionné : informations et conseils d’utilisation (X61 - X62 - X10 - X98 - X87 - X82 - JFC - HFE - BFB - KFB - XFD - KFD - LFD Douai - XFA - Renault)
OUTSIDE AIR QUALITY AND DEODORISATION FUNCTION
Air quality
A
Deodorization cycle
With the air conditioning switched on, from the screen
A
, select Menu,
Vehicle, Take care.
Outside air quality
The quality of the air in the vehicle is shown by an explanatory text and ani- mation on the multimedia screen.
Deodorisation function
This reduces unpleasant odours in the passenger compartment.
Deodorization cycle
– ON: helps to reduce the unpleasant odour more quickly in the passenger compartment,
– OFF: stop the function.
Note:
The function is on a timer. It stops auto- matically after a few minutes.
Please refer to the multimedia in- structions for further information.
3.19
ENG_UD59507_3
Fonction qualité de l’air extérieur (HFE - Renault)
Outside air quality and deodorisation functions deodourising function ................................
(up to the end of the DU) exterior air quality ......................................
(up to the end of the DU)
ELECTRIC WINDOWS, FIXED SUNROOF (1/3)
These systems operate:
– with the engine running;
– with the ignition off until one of the front doors is opened (limited to ap- proximately twelve minutes);
– with the engine off, front doors closed, after pressing the start button.
Press the window switch down or pull it up to lower or raise the window to the desired height: the rear windows do not open fully.
5
4
1
3
2
6
Passenger safety
The driver can prevent all occupants from operating the rear passenger electric windows by pressing switch
4
.
Driver’s responsibility
Never leave your vehicle with the card or key inside when there is a child, de- pendent adult or a pet in it, even for a short while. They may pose a risk to them- selves or to others by starting the engine or activating equipment (such as the gear lever or electric windows). If any part of the body becomes trapped, reverse the direction of the window immediately by pressing the relevant switch.
Risk of serious injury.
From the driver’s seat, use switch:
1
for the driver’s side;
2
for the front passenger side;
3
and
5
for the rear passenger windows.
From the passenger seats, use switch
6
.
Avoid resting any objects against a half-open window: there is a risk that the electric window winder could be damaged.
3.20
ENG_UD64379_3
Lève-vitres électriques / Lève-vitres impulsionnels / Lève-vitres manuels (HFE - Renault)
Electric windows children ......................................................
(up to the end of the DU) child safety.................................................
(up to the end of the DU) electric windows ........................................
(up to the end of the DU)
ELECTRIC WINDOWS, FIXED SUNROOF (2/3)
One-touch mode
This mode works in addition to the ope- ration of the electric windows described previously.
Briefly press or pull a window switch as far as it will go: the window will be raised or lowered fully. Pressing the switch again stops the window moving.
Impossible to operate the one-touch electric window
The one-touch electric window is equipped with heat protection: if you press the switch for the window more than sixteen consecutive times it goes into protection mode (locking the window).
You can:
– use the electric window switch briefly and with intervals of approximately
30 seconds;
– with the engine running, the window will be unlocked after approximately
20 minutes of inaction on the electric window switch.
Note:
if the window detects resistance when closing (e.g.: branch of a tree, etc.) it stops and then lowers again by a few centimetres.
Remote control window closing
(vehicles with 4 one-touch electric win- dows).
When the doors are locked from the outside:
–
if you press the driver’s door lock button twice,
or
–
if you press the locking button on the card twice in succession while in hands-free mode,
all the windows and, depending on the vehicle, the sunroof will close automati- cally.
It is recommended that the user only operates the system when the vehi- cle can be seen clearly and no one is inside.
When closing the windows, ensure that no part of the body (arm, hand, etc.) is protruding from the vehicle.
Risk of serious injury.
3.21
ENG_UD64379_3
Lève-vitres électriques / Lève-vitres impulsionnels / Lève-vitres manuels (HFE - Renault) faults operating faults ....................................
(current page) operating faults ..........................................
(up to the end of the DU)
ELECTRIC WINDOWS, FIXED SUNROOF (3/3)
Operating faults
In case of a fault when closing a window, the system reverts to normal mode: pull the switch concerned up as often as necessary to fully close the window
(the window will close gradually), hold the switch (still on the closure side) for one second then lower and raise the window fully to reinitialise the system.
If necessary, contact your authorised dealer.
7
Fixed glass roof
Opening the blind
Pull the switch
7
and put it to the de- sired position.
Closing the blind
Push the switch
7
and put it to the de- sired position.
Automatic operation
Quickly pull or push the switch
7
as far as it will go: the blind closes or opens fully. Using the switch stops the blind function in place.
Driver’s responsibility when parking or stopping the vehicle
Never leave an animal, child or adult who is not self-suffi- cient alone in your vehicle, even for a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves or to others by starting the engine, activating equipment such as the electric windows or locking the doors, for example.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather, please remember that the tempera- ture inside the passenger compart- ment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY
.
3.22
ENG_UD64379_3
Lève-vitres électriques / Lève-vitres impulsionnels / Lève-vitres manuels (HFE - Renault)
Fixed glass roof fixed sunroof ..............................................
(current page)
INTERIOR LIGHTING
(1/2)
1
1
Map reading lights
Press switch
1
to get:
– permanent lighting;
– immediate switching off.
Interior lighting lighting: interior ..................................................
(up to the end of the DU) courtesy light .............................................
(up to the end of the DU) map reading lights .....................................
(up to the end of the DU)
Note:
for vehicles fitted with a naviga- tion system, you can use the multime- dia screen to deactivate/activate the courtesy lights which come on when the doors or boot are opened. To do this, please refer to “Vehicle settings customisation menu” in Section 1.
When the doors or boot are un- locked and opened, the reading and footwell lights come on temporarily.
ENG_UD59471_2
Eclairage intérieur (HFE - Renault)
With the doors properly shut, lock- ing or starting the engine makes the interior lights and the courtesy lights go out.
3.23
INTERIOR LIGHTING
(2/2)
2
3
4
Glove box light
Light
2
comes on when the cover is opened.
Central console lights
The light
3
comes on when the engine is started.
Boot lights
The lights
4
come on when the boot lid is opened.
3.24
ENG_UD59471_2
Eclairage intérieur (HFE - Renault)
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE, FITTINGS
(1/5)
2
4 3
1
Front door storage pockets
1
They can hold a 1.5-litre bottle.
Nothing should be placed on the floor area in front of the driver as such objects may slide under the pedal during braking manoeuvres, thus obstructing its use.
Front sun visor
Lower sun visor
2
.
Sun visor storage
3
This can be used for storing motorway tickets, cards, etc.
Courtesy mirrors
Lift the cover
4
.
5
Centre console storage compartment
5
When driving, ensure the courtesy mirror cover is closed.
Risk of injury.
Ensure that no hard, heavy or pointed objects are placed in the “open” storage compartments in such a way that they may fall onto passengers during sudden turning, braking or in the event of an accident.
3.25
ENG_UD64449_3
Rangements / Aménagements habitacle (HFE - Renault)
Passenger compartment storage, fittings storage compartments ...............................
(up to the end of the DU) storage compartment.................................
(up to the end of the DU) fittings ........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) courtesy mirrors .........................................
(current page) sun visor ....................................................
(current page)
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE, FITTINGS
(2/5)
7
7
6
8
A
9
Cup holders
6
This can be used for storing a mobile ashtray, cup holder, etc.
This storage compartment has two re- movable carpets for easy cleaning.
When turning corners, accelerating or braking, ensure that the receptacle being held by the cup holder is not dislodged.
There is a risk of injury if hot liquid escapes.
Front central elbow rest
7
To move the centre console forwards or backwards (movement
A
), press button
8
and slide the console. Once in position, release the button and check that it is correctly locked.
Storage compartment under the front central armrest
B
Lift up the armrest
7
.
Front centre armrest storage compartment
C
Lift the control
9
and slide the arm- rest
7
.
3.26
ENG_UD64449_3
Rangements / Aménagements habitacle (HFE - Renault)
7
C
B
armrest: front ......................................................
(current page) cup holder ..................................................
(current page)
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE, FITTINGS
(3/5)
10
11
Glovebox
To open the glovebox, lift the catch
10
.
Grab handle
11
This offers support and can be held when the vehicle is being driven.
Do not use it for getting into or out of the vehicle.
Clothes hooks
12
11
12
glove box ...................................................
(current page) grab handle................................................
(current page) hooks clothing hooks ......................................
(current page)
ENG_UD64449_3
Rangements / Aménagements habitacle (HFE - Renault)
3.27
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE, FITTINGS
(4/5)
14
13
Storage
13
Front seat storage pockets
14
3.28
ENG_UD64449_3
Rangements / Aménagements habitacle (HFE - Renault)
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE, FITTINGS
(5/5)
15
16
Rear armrest with cup holder
Lower armrest
15
.
Rear door storage compartment
16
When turning corners, accelerating or braking, ensure that the receptacle being held by the cup holder is not dislodged.
There is a risk of injury if hot liquid escapes.
Ensure that no hard, heavy or pointed objects are placed in the “open” storage compartments in such a way that they may fall onto passengers during sudden turning, braking or in the event of an accident.
ENG_UD64449_3
Rangements / Aménagements habitacle (HFE - Renault) armrest: front ......................................................
(current page)
3.29
ASHTRAY, CIGARETTE LIGHTER, ACCESSORIES SOCKET
2
2
1
Ashtray
1
To open, lift the cover. To empty, pull the ashtray towards you and it will be released from its housing.
Accessories sockets
2
They are provided for connecting ac- cessories approved by our Technical
Department.
If your vehicle is not fitted with a cigar lighter and an ashtray, these can be obtained from an approved
Dealer.
3.30
Connect accessories with a maximum power of
120 watts (12 V) only.
When several accessory sockets are used at the same time, the total power of the connected accessories must not exceed
180 watts.
Fire hazard.
ENG_UD54795_1
Cendrier - Allume-cigares - Prise accessoires (HFE - Renault)
Ashtray/cigarette lighter cigar lighter ................................................
(up to the end of the DU) ashtray .......................................................
(up to the end of the DU) accessories socket ....................................
(up to the end of the DU)
REAR HEAD RESTS
1
2
A
The headrests
2
on the rear side seats cannot be adjusted.
Position for using the central headrest
Raise the central headrest
1
as far as possible to use it in the high posi- tion. Check that the bonnet is correctly locked.
Centre seat headrest storage position
Press the button
A
and lower the cen- tral headrest
1
completely.
When the headrest is set at the lowest position, this is for storage only
. It should not be in this position when a seat is occupied.
To remove a headrest
Raise the headrest as far as it will go, then press button
A
and remove the headrest.
To refit a headrest
Insert the rods in the holes, press the button
A
and lower the headrest. Check that it is correctly locked in place.
The headrest is a safety component; check that it is fitted and in the correct position. The top of the headrest should be as close as possible to the top of the head.
3.31
ENG_UD64193_3
Appuis-tête arrière (HFE - Renault) headrest.....................................................
(up to the end of the DU) adjusting your driving position ...................
(up to the end of the DU)
REAR BENCH SEAT
(1/2)
1
A
2
B
To manually fold down the seatbacks
Ensure that the front seats are far enough forward.
Lower the headrests fully.
Depending on the vehicle, put the seat belt in the belt guide
2
to avoid damag- ing it before folding down the seatback.
Pull the control
1
and lower the seat- back
A
.
To replace the seatback,
proceed in the reverse order to removal.
Refit the seatback and click it back into place.
When refitting the seatback
, make sure it is correctly locked in place.
If seat covers are fitted
, make sure these do not prevent the seatback latch from locking in.
Make sure that the seat belts are positioned correctly.
Reposition the headrests.
For safety reasons, carry out any adjustments when the vehicle is not being driven.
3.32
The configuration of the two-seat bench with the small seatback
B
pulled down, does not allow the central seat to be used as it would be impossible to buckle the seat belt
(belt buckles inaccessible).
When moving the rear seats, ensure that nothing obstructs the anchorage points (passenger’s arm or leg, a pet, gravel, cloth, toys, etc.).
ENG_UD47629_2
Banquette arrière : fonctionnalités (HFE - Renault)
SLIDING REAR BENCH SEAT rear bench seat..........................................
(up to the end of the DU) rear seats functions ..............................................
(up to the end of the DU)
REAR BENCH SEAT
(2/2)
3
To automatically fold down the seatbacks (flat position)
From the boot, pulling the control
3
en- ables you to automatically unlock the rear bench seatbacks to get a flat floor.
Conditions of use
– Vehicle stationary;
– boot lid open;
– rear seat belts unlocked.
Operating fault
If all user conditions have been ful- filled and the folding action still fails to operate, please contact an authorised dealer.
When moving the rear seats, ensure that nothing obstructs the anchorage points (passenger’s arm or leg, a pet, gravel, cloth, toys, etc.).
Use restriction
It is forbidden to drive with a seatback or a front seat folded down when there is a passenger occupying a rear seat.
For safety reasons, carry out any adjustments when the vehicle is not being driven.
3.33
ENG_UD47629_2
Banquette arrière : fonctionnalités (HFE - Renault)
BOOT
2
3
1
To open
Press button
1
and lift the tailgate.
To close
Lower the tailgate using the handles
2
inside the tailgate to help you.
Opening the doors manually from the inside
If it is impossible to unlock the tailgate, it can be done manually from inside:
– access the luggage compartment by tilting the rear bench seatback(s),
– insert a pencil or similar object in recess
3
and slide the unit as shown in the illustration;
– push the tailgate to open it.
3.34
Luggage compartment tailgate .......................................................
(up to the end of the DU)
ENG_UD57468_2
Coffre à bagages (HFE - Renault)
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT COVER
1
2
3
A
4
5
2
5
To remove the flexible section of the luggage cover
Pull then lift the hook
3
gently.
Guide the luggage cover onto the roller
2
.
Removing the luggage cover
Hold the right-hand side of the luggage compartment cover
2
and press the side
1
(movement
A
), raise the right- hand side of the luggage compartment cover and then the rest of it.
Refitting the luggage compartment cover
Position the side
1
of the luggage com- partment cover in its housing, press the side
1
and position the opposite side into its housing, pressing downwards.
Luggage compartment cover storage
Version without emergency spare wheel
Lift the false floor
4
, then position the luggage cover roller
2
. Attach it using the elastic cords
5
on each side of the luggage compartment.
Do not place any heavy or solid objects on the luggage cover. These may pose a risk to the vehicle occu- pants if the driver has to brake sud- denly or if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
3.35
ENG_UD59836_4
Tablette arrière (HFE - Renault)
Luggage cover rear parcel shelf .........................................
(up to the end of the DU) luggage compartment cover ......................
(current page) towing rings ...............................................
(up to the end of the DU) mobile floor ................................................
(up to the end of the DU) fascias and steering wheel controls...........
(up to the end of the DU)
BOOT FITTINGS
(1/2)
1 2
3
1
A
B 1
Mobile floor
1
(depending on the vehicle)
It is made up of two independent and interchangeable parts,
A
and
B
. The smooth side is easy to clean.
Flat position
It allows you to have a flat floor by fold- ing down the back of the rear bench seat.
The mobile floor is positioned on sup- ports
3
.
Intermediate position
This enables you to compartmentalise the boot into two separate spaces.
– Remove the part
B
of the mobile floor;
– place it in the boot using the runners provided
2
.
Storage position
This allows for more space to store things in the boot.
– Remove part
B
then part
A
of the mobile floor
1
;
– place part
A
in the luggage com- partment under the supports
3
then part
B
.
Maximum load allowed on the mobile floor when flat: 50 kg evenly distributed.
3.36
ENG_UD57636_3
Aménagements coffre à bagages (HFE - Renault)
Luggage compartment storage tailgate .......................................................
(up to the end of the DU) mobile floor ................................................
(current page)
BOOT FITTINGS
(2/2)
4
5
Bag hooks
4
Maximum weight per hook: 5 kg.
Anchorage points
Attachment points
5
If your vehicle is not equipped with anchorage points, you can get them from an authorised dealer.
ENG_UD57636_3
Aménagements coffre à bagages (HFE - Renault)
3.37
TRANSPORTING OBJECTS IN THE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
Always position the objects transported so that the largest surface is against:
– The rear bench seatback for normal loads (example
A
).
A
– The front seatbacks with the rear seatbacks folded down, the mobile floor in the flat-floor position (exam- ple
B
).
B
– The front seatbacks with the rear seatbacks folded down, the mobile floor in the stored-away position, as is the case for maximum loads (exam- ple
C
).
C
If you have to place objects on the folded seatback, it is necessary that you lower the headrests before folding the seatback so that it can be folded as flat as possible against the seat.
3.38
Transporting objects in the boot
ENG_UD36718_1
Transport d’objets dans le coffre (HFE - Renault)
1
Always position the heaviest items directly on the floor. Use the lashing points
1
on the boot floor, if these are fitted to the vehicle. The luggage should be loaded in such a way that no items will be thrown forward and strike the occupants if the driver has to brake suddenly. Fasten the rear seat belts, even if the seats are not occupied.
tailgate .......................................................
(up to the end of the DU) transporting objects in the luggage compartment ................
(up to the end of the DU) towing rings ...............................................
(up to the end of the DU)
TRANSPORTING OBJECTS towbar
A
Permissible nose weight, maxi- mum permissible towing weight, braked and unbraked:
refer to the information on “Weights” in
Section 6.
Choice and fitting of towing equipment
Maximum weight of towing equip- ment: 32 kg
For fitting and conditions of use, refer to the equipment’s fitting in- structions.
Please keep these instructions with the rest of the vehicle documenta- tion.
Maximum dimension
A
: 1036 mm.
Any towing device must not ob- struct any lighting component or the number plate when not in use.
Towing devices (ball, hook, etc.) which can be removed without tools and retractable objects must be re- moved or repositioned when they are not in use.
In all cases, you must comply with the regulations of the particular country you are in.
ENG_UD68353_3
Transport d’objets : remorquage, attelage (HFE - Renault)
Transporting objects: towing equipment fitting ....................................................
(up to the end of the DU) towing a caravan .......................................
(up to the end of the DU) towing towing equipment .................................
(up to the end of the DU)
3.39
LUGGAGE NET
(1/2)
A
1
2
3
B
5
4
Depending on the vehicle, this may be used when transporting animals or luggage to isolate them from the passenger section.
It can be positioned:
– behind the rear seats
A
;
– behind the front seats
B
.
Fitting the luggage net behind the front seats
Inside the vehicle on each side:
– slide the cover
1
to gain access to the anchoring points for the top part of the luggage net;
– insert the top rod of net
2
into the anchoring points;
– attach the two hooks
5
of the net straps
3
on the anchoring points
4
located under the carpet;
– adjust the net strap
3
so that it is taut.
The luggage net is designed to retain a maximum weight of 10 kg.
Risk of injury.
Do not install the luggage net in this position when a passenger is occupying a rear seat
3.40
ENG_UD59508_2
Filet de séparation (HFE - Renault)
Luggage net transporting objects luggage net ..........................................
(up to the end of the DU) luggage retaining net .................................
(up to the end of the DU)
LUGGAGE NET
(2/2)
6
6
7
Fitting the luggage net behind the rear seats
Inside the vehicle on each side:
– slide the cover
6
to access the lug- gage net upper mounting rail;
– insert upper rod
7
for the net into the rail;
– fix the net belt hook
9
onto the an- choring points
10
;
– adjust net strap
8
so that it is taut.
The seatbacks must not touch the luggage net.
8
9
10
3.41
towing rings ...............................................
(current page)
ENG_UD59508_2
Filet de séparation (HFE - Renault)
ROOF BARS, SPOILER (1/2)
1
Accessing the mounting points
Vehicles not fitted with longitudinal roof bars
Open the doors to access the mount- ing points
1
.
The attachment of any car- rying device (bike rack, lug- gage box etc.) resting on the luggage compartment lid is prohibited. For the installation of a carrying device on your vehicle, contact an approved Dealer.
If original roof bars, approved by our Technical
Department, are supplied with screws, only use these screws for attaching the roof bars to the vehicle.
3.42
ENG_UD59150_3
Barres de toit / Becquet (HFE - Renault)
Roof bars roof bars ....................................................
(up to the end of the DU) roof rack roof bars ...............................................
(up to the end of the DU)
ROOF BARS, SPOILER
(2/2)
Precautions during use
Handling the tailgate
Before handling the tailgate, check the objects and/or accessories (bike rack, roof box, etc.) fitted to the roof bars: these must be correctly positioned and secured, so as not to hinder the operation of the tailgate.
A
For information on the range of equipment adapted to your vehi- cle, we advise you to consult an ap- proved Dealer.
Refer to the fitting instructions for information on how to fit roof bars and conditions of use.
Please keep these instructions with the rest of the vehicle documentation.
Maximum permissible load on roof rack:
refer to the information on “Weights” in Section 6.
Spoiler
A
It is forbidden to fix objects and/or accessories (bike racks, etc.) to the spoiler.
ENG_UD59150_3
Barres de toit / Becquet (HFE - Renault)
Spoiler spoiler ........................................................
(current page)
3.43
MULTIMEDIA EQUIPMENT
1
2
3
Multimedia systems
1
Multimedia screen;
2
Multimedia sockets;
3
Steering column controls;
4
Steering wheel controls;
5
Microphone.
4
Hands-free telephone integrated control
For equipped vehicles, use the steering wheel controls
4
.
Refer to the equipment instructions for information on how to operate this equipment.
3.44
Using the telephone
We remind you of the need to conform to the legislation in force concerning the use of such equipment.
ENG_UD59509_2
Equipement multimédia (HFE - Renault)
Multimedia equipment hands-free telephone integrated control ....
(up to the end of the DU) multimedia equipment ...............................
(up to the end of the DU) telephone ...................................................
(up to the end of the DU) navigation system ......................................
(up to the end of the DU) radio...........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) navigation ..................................................
(up to the end of the DU) display .......................................................
(current page) multimedia (equipment) .............................
(up to the end of the DU) screen navigation screen .................................
(up to the end of the DU) screen navigation display ................................
(up to the end of the DU) steering wheel controls ..............................
(up to the end of the DU) screens multimedia screen ................................
(up to the end of the DU) controls steering wheel ......................................
(up to the end of the DU) accessories socket ....................................
(current page)
USB socket ................................................
(current page)
5
Section 4: Maintenance
4.1
ENG_UD68667_6
Sommaire 4 (HFE - Renault)
BONNET
(1/2)
2
5
4
1
3
To open, press the control
1
.
Before performing any action in the engine com- partment, the ignition must be switched off (please see the information on “Starting, stop- ping the engine” in Section 2).
Unlocking the bonnet catch
To open, raise the bonnet slightly, then lift the paddle
2
at the centre point of the bonnet.
When working in the engine compartment, ensure that the windscreen wiper stalk is in the park position.
Risk of injury.
Opening the bonnet
Lift the bonnet up and release the stay
4
from its holder
5
. For your own safety, it is
very important
to fit the stay into its retainer
3
.
Please note when work- ing close to the engine that it may be hot. The engine cooling fan may also start at any moment. The minds you of this.
warning light in the engine compartment re-
Risk of injury.
4.2
ENG_UD54808_1
Capot moteur (HFE - Renault)
Bonnet bonnet........................................................
(up to the end of the DU)
BONNET
(2/2)
5
4
Closing the bonnet
Before closing the bonnet, make sure that nothing has been left in the engine compartment.
To close the bonnet, replace the stay
4
in its holder
5
. Hold the middle of the bonnet and guide it down to one foot
(30 cm) above the closed position, then release. It will latch automatically under its own weight.
After carrying out any work in the engine compartment, check that nothing has been left behind (cloth, tools, etc.).
These may damage the engine or cause a fire.
Ensure that the bonnet is properly locked.
Check that nothing is preventing the catch from locking (gravel, cloth, etc.).
In the event of even a slight impact involving the radiator grille or bonnet, have the bonnet lock checked by an approved dealer as soon as possible.
ENG_UD54808_1
Capot moteur (HFE - Renault)
4.3
ENGINE OIL LEVEL: general information
(1/2)
It is normal for an engine to use oil for lubrication and cooling of moving parts and it is normal to top up the level be- tween oil changes.
However, contact your approved
Dealer if more than 0.5 litres is being consumed every 620 miles (1,000 km) after the running in period.
Oil change frequency: check the oil level from time to time and certainly before any long journey to avoid the risk of damaging your engine.
Adding engine oil.
Use a funnel or protect the filling neck area to avoid engine oil escaping onto a hot part of the engine compartment or a sensitive part (e.g. electrical components).
Fire hazard.
Before performing any action in the engine com- partment, the ignition must be switched off (please see the information on “Starting, stop- ping the engine” in Section 2).
Exceeding the maximum engine oil level
Under no circumstances should maximum filling level
B
be exceeded: this could damage the engine and the anti- pollution system.
If the level exceeds the maximum level,
do not start your vehicle
and contact an authorised dealer.
4.4
ENG_UD64378_5
Niveau huile moteur : généralités (HFE - Renault)
Engine oil level: general information maintenance: mechanical ...........................................
(up to the end of the DU) engine oil level ...........................................
(up to the end of the DU) engine oil ...................................................
(up to the end of the DU) dipstick.......................................................
(up to the end of the DU)
ENGINE OIL LEVEL: general information
(2/2)
A
A
B
B
C
– Remove the dipstick and wipe with a clean, lint-free cloth;
– push the dipstick in as far as it will go (for vehicles equipped with a cap- type dipstick
C
, screw the cap in as far as it will go);
– take out the dipstick again;
– read the level: it should never fall below the “minimum” mark
A
or exceed the “maximum” mark
B
.
Once the operation has been com- pleted, ensure that the dipstick is pushed in as far as it will go or that the “cap-type dipstick” is completely screwed in.
Reading the oil level
The oil level should be read with the ve- hicle on level ground, after the engine has been switched off for some time.
The dipstick must be used to read the exact oil level and make sure that the maximum level has not been exceeded (risk of engine damage).
Refer to the following pages.
The instrument panel display only alerts the driver when the oil level is at its minimum.
ENG_UD64378_5
Niveau huile moteur : généralités (HFE - Renault)
4.5
ENGINE OIL LEVEL: topping up, filling
(1/3)
1
1
1
2
2
2
Topping up/filling
The vehicle must be parked on level ground and the engine should be stopped and cold (for instance, before the engine is started up for the first time in the day).
Before performing any action in the engine com- partment, the ignition must be switched off (please see the information on “Starting, stop- ping the engine” in Section 2).
– Unscrew cap
1
;
– top up the level (as a guide, the capacity between the minimum and maximum reading on the dipstick
2
is between 1.5 and 2 litres, depending on the engine);
– wait for approximately 10 minutes to allow the oil to flow into the engine;
– check the level using the dipstick
2
(as described above).
Once the operation has been com- pleted, ensure that the dipstick is pushed in as far as it will go or that the “cap-type dipstick” is completely screwed in.
Do not exceed the
“Maxi”
level and do not forget to refit the cap
1
and the dipstick
2
.
4.6
ENG_UD64374_3
Niveau huile moteur : appoint, remplissage (HFE - Renault)
Engine oil level: topping up, filling engine oil ...................................................
(up to the end of the DU) oil change ..................................................
(up to the end of the DU) engine oil level ...........................................
(up to the end of the DU) engine oil capacity .....................................
(up to the end of the DU) filter oil filter .................................................
(up to the end of the DU)
ENGINE OIL LEVEL: topping up, filling
(2/3)
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
Adding engine oil.
Use a funnel or protect the filling neck area to avoid engine oil escaping onto a hot part of the engine compartment or a sensitive part (e.g. electrical components).
Fire hazard
.
Do not exceed the
“Maxi”
level and do not forget to refit the cap
1
and the dipstick
2
.
Before performing any action in the engine com- partment, the ignition must be switched off (please see the information on “Starting, stop- ping the engine” in Section 2).
4.7
ENG_UD64374_3
Niveau huile moteur : appoint, remplissage (HFE - Renault)
ENGINE OIL LEVEL: topping up, filling
(3/3)/
OIL CHANGE
Oil change
Service interval:
refer to the
Maintenance Service Booklet for your vehicle.
Engine oil grade
Refer to the maintenance document for your vehicle.
Oil change capacity
Please refer to the maintenance docu- ment for your vehicle, or contact an au- thorised dealer.
Always check the engine oil level using the dipstick, as explained previously (it should never fall below the minimum level, or be over the maximum level on the dipstick).
Consult your approved dealer at once if you notice an abnormal or repeated drop in any of the fluid levels.
When working in the engine compartment, ensure that the windscreen wiper stalk is in the park position.
Risk of injury.
Exceeding the maximum engine oil level
Under no circumstances should the maximum fill- ing level be exceeded: this could damage the engine and the emis- sion control system.
If the level exceeds the maximum level,
do not start your vehicle
and contact an authorised dealer.
Please note when work- ing close to the engine that it may be hot. The engine cooling fan may also start at any moment. The minds you of this.
Risk of injury.
warning light in the engine compartment re-
Filling:
take care when topping up the oil that no oil drips onto engine components - risk of fire.
Remember to refit the cap securely as there is a risk of fire if oil splashes onto hot engine components.
Never run the engine in an enclosed space as exhaust gases are poisonous.
Engine oil change:
if you are changing the oil when the engine is hot, be care- ful not to scald yourself as the oil drains.
4.8
ENG_UD64374_3
Niveau huile moteur : appoint, remplissage (HFE - Renault)
Oil change
LEVELS
(1/3)
1
1
2
Top this level up
when cold
before it reaches the MINI mark.
Frequency of checking coolant level
Check the coolant level regularly
(very severe damage is likely to be caused to the engine if it runs out of coolant).
If the level needs to be topped up, only use products approved by our Technical
Department which ensure:
– protection against freezing;
– an anti-corrosion protection for the cooling system.
Replacement interval
Refer to the Maintenance Document for your vehicle.
Coolant
With the engine switched off and on level ground, the level
when cold
must be between the “MINI” and “MAXI” marks on the reservoir
1
and, depend- ing on the vehicle, on the reservoir
2
.
When working in the engine compartment, ensure that the windscreen wiper stalk is in the park position.
Risk of injury.
Before performing any action in the engine com- partment, the ignition must be switched off (please see the information on “Starting, stop- ping the engine” in Section 2).
Consult your approved dealer at once if you notice an abnormal or repeated drop in any of the fluid levels.
No operations should be carried out on the cooling circuit when the engine is hot.
Risk of burns.
4.9
ENG_UD54811_1
Niveau / Filtres (HFE - Renault)
Levels engine coolant levels .........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) engine coolant ...........................................
(current page) tanks and reservoirs coolant .................................................
(current page) levels: coolant .................................................
(current page)
LEVELS
(2/3)
3
Brake fluid
The level should be read with the engine switched off and on level ground.
This should be checked frequently, and immediately if you notice even the slightest loss in braking efficiency.
Level
3
It is normal for the level to drop as the brake shoes become worn, but it must never drop lower than the “
MINI
" warning line.
If you wish to check the disc and drum wear yourself, you should obtain the document explaining the checking pro- cedure from the manufacturer’s net- work or website.
Topping up
After any operation on the hydraulic circuit, a specialist must replace the brake fluid.
Only use fluids approved by our
Technical Department (and taken from a sealed container).
Replacement interval
Refer to the Maintenance Document for your vehicle.
Consult your approved dealer at once if you notice an abnormal or repeated drop in any of the fluid levels.
Please note when work- ing close to the engine that it may be hot. The engine cooling fan may also start at any moment. The minds you of this.
warning light in the engine compartment re-
Risk of injury.
4.10
ENG_UD54811_1
Niveau / Filtres (HFE - Renault)
Brake fluid brake fluid ..................................................
(current page) levels: brake fluid ............................................
(current page) tanks and reservoirs brake fluid ............................................
(current page)
LEVELS
(3/3)
/FILTERS
4
5
Filters
The replacement of filter components
(air filter, cabin filter, diesel filter, etc.) is scheduled in the maintenance operations for your vehicle.
Replacement intervals for filter elements:
refer to the Maintenance
Document for your vehicle.
Windscreen washer reservoir
Topping up
With the engine switched off, open the cap
4
. Fill until you can see the fluid, then replace the cap.
When working in the engine compartment, ensure that the windscreen wiper stalk is in the park position.
Risk of injury.
Liquid
Screen wash product (product with antifreeze in winter).
Checking the level
Use the “dropper cap”. To do this, plug the hole
5
with your finger, remove the cap then read the gauge built into the cap.
Note:
Regularly check the reservoir level by topping up the liquid before taking a trip.
Jets
To adjust the windscreen washer jets, please consult an authorised dealer.
Before performing any action in the engine com- partment, the ignition must be switched off (please see the information on “Starting, stop- ping the engine” in Section 2).
Please note when work- ing close to the engine that it may be hot. The engine cooling fan may also start at any moment. The minds you of this.
warning light in the engine compartment re-
Risk of injury.
4.11
ENG_UD54811_1
Niveau / Filtres (HFE - Renault)
Filters windscreen washer reservoir filter air filter .................................................
(current page) tanks and reservoirs: windscreen washer ..............................
(current page) levels: windscreen washer reservoir ...............
filter
(current page) passenger compartment filter ..............
(current page)
TYRE PRESSURE
(1/2)
A
A
B
C
C
D
E
E
E
G
F
F
F
Label
A
Open the driver’s door to read it.
Tyre pressures should be checked when the tyres are cold.
If the tyre pressures cannot be checked when the tyres are
cold
, increase the pressures from
0.2
to
0.3
bar (or
3 PSI
).
Never deflate a hot tyre.
B
: dimension of the tyres fitted to the vehicle.
C
: intended driving speed.
D
: recommended pressure for optimising fuel consumption.
NB:
driving comfort may be altered.
E
: front tyre pressure.
F
: rear tyre pressure.
G
: tyre pressure for the emergency spare wheel.
Vehicle fitted with a tyre pressure monitoring system
In cases of under-inflation (puncture, low pressure, etc.), warning light
lights up on the instrument panel.
Please refer to the information on the
“Tyre pressure monitoring system” in
Section 2.
4.12
Tyre pressures tyre pressure..............................................
(up to the end of the DU) tyre pressures ............................................
(up to the end of the DU) tyres ...........................................................
(up to the end of the DU)
ENG_UD36728_1
Pressions de gonflage des pneumatiques (HFE - Renault)
TYRE PRESSURES (2/2)
Special note concerning fully laden vehicles
(Maximum Permissible All-Up
Weight)
and towing a trailer:
the maximum speed must be limited to
60 mph
(100 kph) and the tyre pressure increased by
0.2 bar.
Please refer to the information on
“Weights” in Section 6.
Tyre safety and use of snow chains:
Refer to the information on “Tyres” in
Section 5 for the servicing conditions and, depending on the version, the use of chains.
For your safety, please re- spect the speed limit.
When they need to be re- placed, only tyres of the same make, size, type and profile should be used on a single axle.
They must: either have a load ca- pacity and speed rating at least equal to those of the original tyres, or conform to those recom- mended by an authorised dealer.
Failure to heed these instructions could endanger your safety and affect your vehicle’s roadworthi- ness.
Risk of loss of control of the ve- hicle.
ENG_UD36728_1
Pressions de gonflage des pneumatiques (HFE - Renault)
4.13
BATTERY
(1/2)
1
Battery
1
does not require any mainte- nance.
You should not open it or add any fluid.
Handle the battery with care as it contains sulphuric acid which must not come into contact with the eyes or skin. If it does, wash the affected area with plenty of cold water. If necessary, consult a doctor.
Ensure that naked flames, red hot objects and sparks do not come into contact with the battery as there is a risk of explosion.
Depending on the vehicle, a system continuously checks the battery charge status. If this decreases, the message
“Battery low start engine” is displayed on the instrument panel. In this case, start the engine. The message will go off.
The charge status of your battery can decrease especially if you use your vehicle:
– for short journeys;
– for driving in town;
– when the temperature drops;
– after extended use of energy-con- suming devices (radio, etc.) with the engine switched off.
Before performing any action in the engine com- partment, the ignition must be switched off (please see the information on “Starting, stop- ping the engine” in Section 2).
Please note when work- ing close to the engine that it may be hot. The engine cooling fan may also start at any moment. The minds you of this.
Risk of injury.
warning light in the engine compartment re-
4.14
ENG_UD64375_5
Batterie (HFE - Renault)
Battery battery........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) maintenance: mechanical ...........................................
(up to the end of the DU)
BATTERY
(2/2)
A
2
7
3
6
4
5
Label
A
Observe the indications on the battery:
–
2
Naked flames and smoking are for- bidden;
–
3
eye protection required;
–
4
keep away from children;
–
5
explosive materials;
–
6
refer to the handbook;
–
7
corrosive materials.
Replacing the battery
For your safety and the proper operation of the ve- hicle’s electrical equipment
(lights, windscreen wipers, braking assistance, etc.), any work on the battery (removal, disconnec- tion, etc. )
must
be carried out by a specialist professional.
Risk of serious burns or electric shocks.
Respect
categorically
the replace- ment intervals (without exceeding them) as stated in the maintenance document.
The battery is a specific type.
Please ensure it is replaced with the same type.
Call an approved Dealer.
ENG_UD64375_5
Batterie (HFE - Renault)
4.15
BODYWORK MAINTENANCE
(1/3)
A well-maintained vehicle will last longer. It is therefore recommended to maintain the exterior of the vehicle regularly.
Your vehicle has been treated with very effective anti-corrosion products. It is nevertheless subject to various outside influences.
Corrosive agents in the atmosphere
– atmospheric pollution (built-up and industrial areas);
– saline atmospheres (near the sea, particularly in hot weather);
– seasonal and damp weather condi- tions (e.g. road salt in winter, water from road cleaners, etc.).
Minor impacts
Abrasive action
Dust and sand in the air, mud, road grit thrown up by other vehicles, etc.
You should take a number of minor pre- cautions in order to safeguard your ve- hicle against such risks.
You should
Wash your car frequently,
with the engine off
, with cleaning products recommended by the manufacturer (never use abrasive products). Rinse thoroughly beforehand with a jet:
– spots of tree resin and industrial grime;
– mud in the wheel arches and under- neath the body which forms damp patches;
– , which cause a chemical reaction with the paint that
rapidly discolours paintwork and may even cause the paint to peel off;
wash the vehicle
immediately
to remove these marks since it is im- possible to remove them by polish- ing;
– salt, particularly in the wheel arches and underneath the body after driv- ing in areas where the roads have been gritted.
Remove any plant matter (resin, leaves, etc.) from the vehicle regularly.
Respect local regulations about washing vehicles (e.g. do not wash your vehicle on a public highway).
Observe the vehicle stopping distances when driving on gravelled surfaces to prevent paint damage.
Repair, or have repaired quickly, areas where the paint has been damaged, to prevent corrosion spreading.
Remember to visit the body shop periodically in order to maintain your anti-corrosion warranty. Refer to the
Maintenance Document.
If it is necessary to clean mechanical components, hinges, etc., spray them with products approved by our
Technical Department to protect them after they have been cleaned.
We have selected special products to care for your vehicle and you can obtain these from the manufactur- er’s accessory outlets.
4.16
ENG_UD68356_2
Entretien de la carrosserie (peinture mate) (HFE - BFB - KFB - Renault)
Bodywork maintenance maintenance: bodywork .............................................
(up to the end of the DU) washing .....................................................
(up to the end of the DU) paint maintenance ........................................
(up to the end of the DU) anti-corrosion protection ............................
(current page)
BODYWORK MAINTENANCE
(2/3)
What you should not do
Wash the vehicle in bright sunlight or freezing temperatures.
Do not scrape off mud or dirt without pre-wetting.
Allow dirt to accumulate on the exterior.
Allow rust to form following minor impacts.
Do not use solvents not approved by our Technical Department to remove stains as this could damage the paint- work.
Do not drive in snow or muddy condi- tions without washing the vehicle, par- ticularly under the wheel arches and body.
Degrease or clean using high-pressure cleaning equipment or by spray- ing on products not ap- proved by our Technical
Department: mechanical components (e.g.: engine compartment);
– wheels (e.g. braking system compo- nents such as brake callipers);
– underbody;
– parts with hinges (e.g.: inside the doors);
– painted plastic external fittings (e.g.: bumpers).
Doing this could give rise to corrosion or operational faults.
ENG_UD68356_2
Entretien de la carrosserie (peinture mate) (HFE - BFB - KFB - Renault)
4.17
BODYWORK MAINTENANCE
(3/3)
Vehicles with a matte paint finish
This type of paint requires certain pre- cautions.
You should do the following
Wash the vehicle by hand using plenty of water, using a soft cloth or a gentle sponge.
Do not do the following
Use wax-based products (polishing).
Rub too hard.
Wash the vehicle in a roller-type car wash.
Attach stickers to the paintwork (risk of leaving marks).
Using a roller type car wash
Return the windscreen wiper stalk to the Park position (refer to the information on the “Windscreen washer, wiper” in Section 1). Check the mounting of external accessories, additional lights and mirrors, and ensure that the wiper blades are secured with adhesive tape.
Remove the radio aerial mast if your vehicle is fitted with this equipment.
Remember to remove the tape and refit the antenna after washing.
Cleaning the headlights, sensors and cameras
Use a soft cloth or cotton wool.
If this does not clean them properly, moisten the cloth with soapy water, then wipe clean with a soft damp cloth or cotton wool.
Finally, carefully dry off with a soft dry cloth.
Do not use cleaning products con- taining alcohol or utensils (e.g.: a scraper).
Wash the vehicle using a high-pressure cleaning device.
4.18
ENG_UD68356_2
Entretien de la carrosserie (peinture mate) (HFE - BFB - KFB - Renault)
INTERIOR TRIM MAINTENANCE
(1/2)
A well-maintained vehicle will last longer. It is therefore recommended to maintain the interior of the vehicle regularly.
A stain should always be dealt with swiftly.
Whatever type of stain is on the trim, use
cold
(or warm)
soapy water with natural soap
.
Detergents (washing-up liquid, powdered products, alcohol-based products) should not be used.
Use a soft cloth.
Rinse and wipe up excess water.
Glass instrument panel
(e.g. instrument panel, clock, exterior temperature display etc.)
Use a soft cloth (or cotton wool).
If this does not clean them properly, use a soft cloth (or cotton wool) slightly moistened with soapy water and then wipe clean with another soft damp cloth or cotton wool.
Finally,
carefully
dry off with a soft dry cloth.
Do not use products containing alco- hol and/or spray fluids on the area.
Multimedia screen
Maintenance of the screen may depend on the type of multimedia equipment.
Please refer to the multimedia instruc- tions for further information.
Seat belts
These must be kept clean.
Use products selected by our Technical
Department (Approved outlets) or warm, soapy water and a sponge and wipe with a dry cloth.
Detergents or dyes must not be used under any circumstances.
Textiles (seats, door trim, etc)
Vacuum-clean the textiles
regularly
.
Liquid stain
Use soapy water.
Dab lightly (never rub) with a soft cloth, rinse and remove the excess.
Solid or pasty stain
Carefully remove the excess solid or pasty material
immediately
with a spatula (working from the edges to the centre to avoid spreading the stain).
Clean as for a liquid stain.
Special instructions for sweets or chewing gum
Put an ice cube on the stain to solidify it, then proceed as for a solid stain.
Interior trim maintenance
For further recommendations for maintaining the interior, and/or for any unsatisfactory results, please see an authorised dealer.
4.19
ENG_UD62625_6
Entretien des garnitures intérieures (X61 - X38 - X62 - X67 - X92 - X10 - X98 - X52 - X87 - H79 Ph2 - X82 - X07 - JFC - HFE - BFB - KFB - XFD - XHA - XFA - X52 Ph2 - maintenance: interior trim ...........................................
(up to the end of the DU) interior trim maintenance ........................................
(up to the end of the DU) cleaning: inside the vehicle .................................
(up to the end of the DU)
INTERIOR TRIM MAINTENANCE
(2/2)
Removal/replacing removable equipment originally fitted in the vehicle
If you need to remove equipment in order to clean the passenger compartment (for example, mats), always ensure that they are correctly refitted and are the right way around (the driver’s mat should be fitted on the driver’s side, etc.) and fit them with the components supplied with the equipment (for example, the driver mat should always be fixed using the pre-fitted mounting components).
With the vehicle stationary, always ensure that nothing will impede driving
(anything obstructing the pedals, heel wedged by the mat etc.).
You should not:
Position objects such as deodorants, scents etc. near air vents as this could damage your dashboard trim.
Using high-pressure cleaning equipment or sprays inside the pas- senger compartment: without careful use, this equipment could impair the correct functioning of the electrical or electronic compo- nents in the vehicle, or have other detrimental effects.
4.20
ENG_UD62625_6
Entretien des garnitures intérieures (X61 - X38 - X62 - X67 - X92 - X10 - X98 - X52 - X87 - H79 Ph2 - X82 - X07 - JFC - HFE - BFB - KFB - XFD - XHA - XFA - X52 Ph2 -
Section 5: Practical advice
5.1
ENG_UD68668_6
Sommaire 5 (HFE - Renault)
PUNCTURE, EMERGENCY SPARE WHEEL
(1/2)
In case of puncture
Depending on the vehicle, a tyre infla- tion kit or emergency spare wheel is provided (refer to the following pages).
Special note
The Tyre Pressure Monitor function does not check the emergency spare wheel (the wheel replaced by the emergency spare wheel disappears from the instrument panel display).
Refer to the information on the “Tyre pressure monitoring system” in
Section 2.
If the emergency spare wheel has been stored for several years, have it checked by your Dealer to ensure that it is safe to use.
Vehicles fitted with an emergency spare wheel smaller than the four other wheels:
– Never fit more than one emergency spare wheel to the same vehicle.
– As the punctured wheel is wider than the emergency spare wheel, the vehicle’s ground clearance is reduced.
– Replace the emergency spare wheel as soon as possible with a wheel with the same dimensions as the original.
– When this is fitted to the vehicle, which must only be a temporary measure, the driving speed must not exceed the speed indicated on the label on the wheel.
– Fitting an emergency spare wheel may alter the way the vehicle usually runs.
Avoid sudden acceleration or deceleration and reduce your speed when cornering.
– If you need to use snow chains, fit the emergency spare wheel to the rear axle and check the tyre pressure.
5.2
Puncture, emergency spare wheel
ENG_UD54818_1
Crevaison, roue de secours (HFE - Renault) puncture.....................................................
(up to the end of the DU) emergency spare wheel ............................
(up to the end of the DU)
PUNCTURE, EMERGENCY SPARE WHEEL
(2/2)
A
B
Emergency spare wheel
A
To get to it:
– open the tailgate;
– Depending on the vehicle, lift up the mobile floor;
– lift the boot carpet;
– remove the cover from the emer- gency spare wheel;
– unscrew the central mounting;
– remove the emergency spare wheel
A
.
Emergency spare wheel
B
Vehicle fitted with a subwoofer below the luggage compartment carpet
To access it:
– open the tailgate;
– depending on the vehicle, lift up the mobile floor;
– lift the boot carpet;
– remove the cover from the emer- gency spare wheel;
– unscrew the central mounting;
– remove the subwoofer and place it on the right of the boot;
– remove the emergency spare wheel
B
.
Note:
Store the punctured wheel in the storage bag provided, along with the tool kit and put them in the boot.
If the vehicle is parked on the hard shoulder, you must warn other road users of your vehicle’s presence with a warning triangle or with other devices as per the legislation apply- ing to the country you are in.
5.3
ENG_UD54818_1
Crevaison, roue de secours (HFE - Renault)
TYRE PRESSURE KIT
(1/3)
B
A
The kit repairs tyres when tread
A
has been damaged by objects smaller than 4 mm. It cannot repair all types of puncture, such as cuts larger than 4 mm, or cuts in tyre sidewall
B
.
Ensure also that the wheel rim is in good condition.
Do not pull out the foreign body causing the puncture if it is still in the tyre.
Do not attempt to use the inflation kit if the tyre has been damaged as a result of driving with a puncture.
You should therefore carefully check the condition of the tyre sidewalls before any operation.
Driving with underinflated, flat or punctured tyres can be dangerous and may make the tyre impossible to repair.
This repair is temporary.
A tyre which has been punctured should always be inspected (and repaired, where possible) as soon as possible by a specialist.
When taking a tyre which has been repaired using this kit to be replaced, you must inform the specialist.
When driving, vibration may be felt due to the presence of the repair product injected into the tyre.
The kit is only approved for inflating the tyres of the vehicle originally equipped with the kit.
It must never be used to inflate the tyres of another vehicle, or any other inflatable object (rubber ring, rubber boat, etc.).
Avoid spillage on skin when han- dling the repair product bottle. If droplets do leak out, rinse them off with plenty of water.
Keep the repair kit away from children.
Do not dispose of the empty bottle in the countryside. Return it to your approved dealer or to a recycling organisation.
The bottle has a limited service life which is indicated on its label.
Check the expiry date.
Contact an approved dealer to re- place the inflation tube and repair product bottle.
5.4
Tyre inflation kit tyre inflation kit...........................................
(up to the end of the DU)
ENG_UD54819_1
Kit de gonflage des pneumatiques (HFE - Renault)
TYRE PRESSURE KIT
(2/3)
1
2
In the event of a puncture, use the kit located in the boot, underneath the boot carpet.
If the vehicle is parked on the hard shoulder, you must warn other road users of your vehicle’s presence with a warning triangle or with other devices as per the legislation apply- ing to the country you are in.
With the engine running and the parking brake applied,
– Disconnect any accessories from the vehicle’s accessories sockets;
–
refer to the information on the in- flation kit compressor
located in the boot of the vehicle and follow the instructions;
– inflate the tyre to the recommended pressure (please refer to the infor- mation in the section on “Tyre pres- sures”);
– after a maximum of
10
minutes, stop inflating and read the pressure (on pressure gauge
1
).
Note:
while the bottle is emptying
(approximately 30 seconds), the pressure gauge
1
will indicate briefly a pressure of up to
6
bars, then the pressure drops.
– Adjust the pressure: to increase it, continue inflation with the kit. To reduce it, press the button
2
.
If the recommended pressure of
1.8 bar cannot be achieved after
10 minutes, repair is impossible. Do not drive the vehicle. Consult an authorised dealer.
Before using this kit, park the vehicle at a sufficient distance from traffic, switch on the hazard warning lights, apply the handbrake, ask all passengers to leave the vehicle and keep them away from traffic.
5.5
ENG_UD54819_1
Kit de gonflage des pneumatiques (HFE - Renault)
TYRE PRESSURE KIT
(3/3)
3
Once the tyre is correctly inflated, remove the kit: slowly unscrew the in- flation end piece
3
to prevent any prod- uct spatter and store the container in plastic packaging to prevent product leaks.
– Affix the driving recommendation label to the dashboard where it can easily be seen by the driver;
– Put the kit away;
– At the end of this initial inflation op- eration, air will still escape from the tyre. You must drive a short distance in order to seal the hole;
– Start immediately and drive at between 12 and 37 mph (20 and
60 km/h) in order to distribute the product evenly in the tyre; after driving a distance of 2 miles (3 km), stop and check the pressure.
– If the pressure is higher than 1.3 bar but lower than the recommended pressure (refer to the label affixed to the edge of the driver’s door), adjust it. Otherwise, contact an approved dealer: the tyre cannot be repaired.
Precautions when using the kit
The kit should not be operated for more than 10 consecutive minutes.
The container must be replaced after the first use even if liquid remains inside.
Please be aware that a poorly tightened or missing valve cap can make the tyres less airtight and may lead to pressure loss.
Always use valve caps identical to those fitted originally and tighten them fully.
Following repair with the kit, do not travel further than
120 miles (200 km). In addition, reduce your speed and under no circumstances exceed
48 mph (80 km/h). The sticker, which you must affix in a prominent position on the dashboard, reminds you of this.
Depending on the country or local legislation, a tyre repaired with the inflation kit may need to be replaced.
5.6
ENG_UD54819_1
Kit de gonflage des pneumatiques (HFE - Renault)
TOOLS
1
3
2
The presence of the tools depends on the vehicle.
The tools are located in a tray under the boot carpet.
Lift the cover and remove them.
5
4
Wheelbrace
1
Locks or unlocks the wheel bolts and tow eye
5
.
Jack
2
Fold it correctly before refitting it in its housing (ensure that the wheelbrace is correctly positioned).
Lever
3
This tightens or releases the tow eye
5
.
Hubcap tool
4
This tool is used to remove the wheel trims.
Tow eye
5
Please see “Towing: breakdown recovery” in Section 5.
Do not leave the tools unsecured inside the vehicle as they may come loose under braking. After use, check that all the tools are correctly clipped into the tool kit, then position it correctly in its housing: there is a risk of injury.
If wheel bolts are supplied in the tool kit, you must use these bolts only for the emergency spare wheel: refer to the label affixed to the emergency spare wheel.
The jack is designed for wheel changing purposes only. Under no circumstances should it be used for carrying out repairs underneath the vehicle or to gain access to the underside of the vehicle.
5.7
ENG_UD54820_1
Outils (HFE - Renault)
Tools tool kit ........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) hubcap tool ................................................
(up to the end of the DU) jack ............................................................
(up to the end of the DU) wheelbrace ................................................
(up to the end of the DU) towing hitch................................................
(up to the end of the DU) wheelbrace ................................................
(up to the end of the DU) puncture.....................................................
(up to the end of the DU)
WHEEL TRIMS - WHEEL
1
B
D
A
2
C
Remove the wheel trim using hubcap tool
1
(located in the tool kit) by engaging the hook in the opening near valve
2
.
To refit it, align it with valve
2
. Push the retaining hooks in fully, starting with side
A
near the valve, followed by
B
and
C
, finishing at
D
opposite the valve.
Do not leave the tools unsecured inside the vehicle as they may come loose under braking. After use, check that all the tools are correctly clipped into the tool kit, then position it correctly in its housing: risk of injury.
5.8
ENG_UD36737_1
Enjoliveur - Roue (HFE - Renault)
Wheel trims - wheel hubcap tool ................................................
(up to the end of the DU) trims ...........................................................
(up to the end of the DU)
CHANGING A WHEEL
(1/2)
2
3
Continue to crank the jack so that the baseplate is correctly positioned (it should be underneath the vehicle and aligned with the jack head).
1
Switch on the hazard warning lights.
Keep the vehicle away from traffic and on a level surface where it will not slip.
Apply the parking brake and engage a gear (first or reverse, or
P
for automatic transmissions).
Ask all the passengers to leave the vehicle and keep them away from traffic.
Vehicles equipped with a jack and wheelbrace
If necessary, remove the wheel trim.
Use the wheelbrace
1
to slacken off the wheel bolts. Position it so as to be able to push from above.
Crank up the jack
3
by hand to align the jack head between the 2 jacking points
2
closest to the relevant wheel.
If the vehicle is parked on the hard shoulder, you must warn other road users of your vehicle’s presence with a warning triangle or with other devices as per the legislation applying to the country you are in.
5.9
ENG_UD64377_3
Changement de roue (HFE - Renault)
Changing a wheel changing a wheel.......................................
(up to the end of the DU) lifting the vehicle changing a wheel .................................
(up to the end of the DU) puncture.....................................................
(up to the end of the DU)
CHANGING A WHEEL
(2/2)
Turn it a few times to lift the wheel off the ground.
Undo the bolts and take off the wheel.
Fit the emergency spare wheel on the central hub and turn it to locate the mounting holes in the wheel and the hub.
Tighten the bolts, checking that the wheel is correctly positioned on its hub.
Lower the jack.
With the wheel on the ground, tighten the bolts fully and have the tightness of the bolts checked and the emergency spare wheel pressure checked as soon as possible.
If you have a puncture, replace the wheel as soon as possible.
A tyre which has been punctured should always be inspected
(and repaired, where possible) by a specialist.
Do not leave the tools unsecured inside the vehicle as they may come loose under braking. After use, check that all the tools are correctly clipped into the tool kit, then position it correctly in its housing: risk of injury.
If wheel bolts are supplied in the tool kit, only use these bolts for the emergency spare wheel: refer to the label affixed to the emergency spare wheel.
The jack is designed for wheel changing purposes only. Under no circumstances should it be used for carrying out repairs underneath the vehicle or to gain access to the underside of the vehicle.
5.10
ENG_UD64377_3
Changement de roue (HFE - Renault)
TYRES
(1/3)
The tyres are the only contact between the vehicle and the road, so it is essential to keep them in good condition.
You must make sure that your tyres conform to local road traffic regulations.
1
2
When the tread has worn down to the wear warning strips,
these strips will become visible
2
: it is then necessary to replace your tyres because the tread rubber is now
only 1.6 mm deep at most, resulting in poor road holding on wet roads
.
An overloaded vehicle, long journeys by motorway, particularly in very hot weather, or continual driving on poorly surfaced minor roads will lead to more rapid tyre wear and affect safety.
Maintaining the tyres
The tyres must be in good condition and the tread form must have sufficient depth; tyres approved by our Technical
Department have tread wear indicators
1
which are
indicators moulded into the tread at several points
.
ENG_UD47720_3
Pneumatiques (HFE - Renault)
Incidents which occur when driving, such as striking the kerb, may damage the tyres and wheel rims, and could also lead to misalignment of the front or rear axle geometry. In this case, have the condition of these checked by an approved dealer.
5.11
Tyres (tyre and wheel safety, use in winter) tyres ...........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) wheels (safety) ..........................................
(up to the end of the DU)
TYRES
(2/3)
Tyre pressures
Adhere to the tyre pressures (including the emergency spare wheel). The tyre pressures should be checked at least once a month and additionally before any long journey (refer to the label affixed to the edge of the driver’s door).
The pressures should be checked cold: ignore higher pressures which may be reached in hot weather or following a high speed journey.
If the tyre pressures cannot be checked when the tyres are
cold
, increase the pressures from
0.2
to
0.3
bar (or
3 PSI
).
Never deflate a hot tyre.
Special note
Depending on the vehicle, there may be an adapter which needs to be positioned on the valve before air is added.
Incorrect tyre pressures
lead to abnormal tyre wear and unusually hot running.
These are factors which may seriously affect safety and lead to:
– poor road holding,
– risk of bursting or tread separation.
The pressure depends on the load and the speed of use. Adjust the pressure according to the conditions of use (refer to the label affixed to the edge of the driver’s door).
Please be aware that a poorly tightened or missing valve cap can make the tyres less airtight and lead to pressure loss.
Always use valve caps identical to those fitted originally and tighten them fully.
Vehicle fitted with a tyre pressure monitoring system
In cases of under-inflation (puncture, low pressure, etc.), warning light
lights up on the instrument panel.
Please refer to the information on the
“Tyre pressure monitoring system” in
Section 2.
Emergency spare wheel
Refer to the information on “Puncture” and “Changing a wheel” in Section 5.
Changing a wheel
As the tyre pressure moni- tor may take several min- utes to correctly determine the positions of the wheels and the pressure values after driving, check the tyre pressures following any op- eration.
5.12
ENG_UD47720_3
Pneumatiques (HFE - Renault) tyre pressure..............................................
(current page)
TYRES
(3/3)
Fitting new tyres
For your safety, please re- spect the speed limit.
When they need to be re- placed, only tyres of the same make, size, type and profile should be used on a single axle.
They must: either have a load ca- pacity and a speed capacity at least equal to the original tyres, or correspond to those recom- mended by your authorised dealer.
Failure to heed these instructions could endanger your safety and affect your vehicle’s roadworthi- ness.
Risk of loss of control of the ve- hicle.
Use in winter
Chains
For safety reasons, fitting snow chains to the rear axle is strictly forbidden.
Chains cannot be fitted
to tyres which are larger than those originally fitted to the vehicle.
Snow or Winter tyres
We would recommend that these be fitted to all
four wheels
to ensure that your vehicle retains maximum adhesion.
Warning
: These tyres sometimes have a specific direction of rotation and a maximum speed index which may be lower than the maximum speed of your vehicle.
Studded tyres
This type of equipment may only be used for a limited period and as laid down by local legislation. It is necessary to observe the speed specified by current legislation.
These tyres must, at a minimum, be fitted to the two front wheels.
In all cases, we would recommend that you contact an authorised dealer who will be able to advise you on the choice of equipment which is most suitable for your vehicle.
Snow chains may only be fitted to tyres of the same size as those originally fitted to
your vehicle
.
18” wheels and larger cannot be fitted with chains.
If you wish to use
special equipment
, consult an approved dealer.
5.13
ENG_UD47720_3
Pneumatiques (HFE - Renault)
FRONT HEADLIGHTS: changing bulbs
(1/3)
After replacing the bulbs, you must put the air duct
A
back into position. To do this, perform the above operation in re- verse.
1
2
A
4
3
Accessing the bulbs
On the left-hand side of the vehicle, you will need to remove the air duct
A
to access the bulbs. To do this:
– remove the clips
3
;
– unscrew the bolt
2
;
– press the upper part of the fastening clips
1
to release the air duct
A
;
– slide the air duct
A
towards the front of the vehicle to release it.
Before performing any action in the engine com- partment, the ignition must be switched off (please see the information on “Starting, stop- ping the engine” in Section 2).
On the right-hand side of the vehicle, you will need to remove the filler neck
4
for the windscreen washer tank to access the bulbs. To do this:
– unscrew the funnel
4
;
– pull the funnel
4
.
Please note when work- ing close to the engine that it may be hot. The engine cooling fan may also start at any moment. The minds you of this.
warning light in the engine compartment re-
Risk of injury.
5.14
ENG_UD59154_4
Projecteurs avant : remplacement des lampes (HFE - Renault)
Headlights (changing bulbs) bulbs changing ..............................................
(up to the end of the DU) changing a bulb .........................................
(up to the end of the DU) lights: dipped beam headlights .......................
(up to the end of the DU) lights: direction indicators ...............................
(up to the end of the DU) lights: side lights .............................................
(up to the end of the DU) bulbs changing ..............................................
(up to the end of the DU) lights front ......................................................
(up to the end of the DU) indicators ...................................................
(up to the end of the DU) lights changing bulbs .....................................
(up to the end of the DU) lights: main beam headlights ..........................
(up to the end of the DU)
FRONT HEADLIGHTS: changing bulbs
(2/3)
B
C
6
7
5
Direction indicator lights
Turn the bulb holder
5
a quarter of a turn and take out the bulb.
Bulb type: PY21W.
Once the bulb has been replaced, check that it is properly secured.
Halogen dipped beam headlight
To change the bulb:
– remove cover
B
;
– turn the bulb holder a quarter turn
6
;
– remove the bulb.
Bulb type: H7.
Halogen main beam headlight
To change the bulb:
– remove cover
C
;
– turn the bulb holder a quarter turn
7
;
– remove the bulb.
Bulb type: H7.
It is
essential
to use anti-U.V. 55W bulbs so as not to damage the plastic on the headlights.
Do not touch the bulb glass. Hold it by its base.
When the bulb has been changed, make sure you refit the cover correctly.
The bulbs are under pressure and can break when replaced.
Risk of injury.
5.15
ENG_UD59154_4
Projecteurs avant : remplacement des lampes (HFE - Renault)
FRONT HEADLIGHTS: changing bulbs
(3/3)
9
Halogen front fog lights
10
The front bumper needs to be removed; consult an approved Dealer.
Type of bulb: H11.
8
LED front fog lights
10
Consult an approved dealer.
Additional lights
If you wish to fit fog lights to your vehicle, please see an authorised dealer.
10
LED dipped beam/main beam headlights
9
Please see an authorised dealer.
Daytime running lights and side lights
8
Please see an authorised dealer.
To comply with local legislation, or as a precaution, you can obtain an emergency kit containing a set of spare bulbs and fuses from an approved dealer.
The bulbs are under pressure and can break when replaced.
Risk of injury.
5.16
ENG_UD59154_4
Projecteurs avant : remplacement des lampes (HFE - Renault)
Any operation on (or modification to) the electrical system must be performed by an approved dealer since an incorrect connection might damage the electrical equipment
(harness, components and in particular the alternator). In addition, your Dealer has all the parts required for fitting these units.
REAR LIGHTS AND SIDE LIGHTS: replacing the bulbs
(1/2)
1
3
2
Side lights and brake lights
1
Consult an approved Dealer.
LED direction indicators
2
Consult an approved Dealer.
4
High level brake light
3
Consult an approved dealer.
Rear fog lights and reversing lights
4
Consult an approved Dealer.
Rear lights and side lights (replacing bulbs) bulbs changing ..............................................
(up to the end of the DU) changing a bulb .........................................
(up to the end of the DU) bulbs changing ..............................................
(up to the end of the DU) brake lights changing bulbs .....................................
(current page) lights: reversing lights .....................................
(current page) lights: side lights .............................................
(current page) lights: fog lights ..............................................
(current page) lights: direction indicators ...............................
(current page)
ENG_UD54825_1
Feux arrière et latéraux : remplacement des lampes (HFE - Renault)
5.17
REAR LIGHTS AND SIDE LIGHTS: replacing the bulbs
(2/2)
5
6
Number plate lights
5
– Unclip the light
5
(using a tool such as a flat-blade screwdriver).
– remove the light cover to gain access to the bulb.
Bulb type: W5W.
Indicator lights
6
The wing mirror needs to be removed; consult an authorised dealer.
Bulb type: W5W.
The bulbs are under pressure and can break when replaced.
Risk of injury.
5.18
ENG_UD54825_1
Feux arrière et latéraux : remplacement des lampes (HFE - Renault) rear lights number plate lights ..............................
(current page)
INTERIOR LIGHTING: changing bulbs
(1/2)
4
1
Map reading lights
1
Please consult an authorised dealer.
2
Lights
2
(depending on vehicle)
Consult an approved dealer.
3
Lights
3
(depending on vehicle)
Please consult an authorised dealer.
Glove box light
4
Please consult an authorised dealer.
5.19
Interior lighting (changing bulbs) bulbs changing ..............................................
(up to the end of the DU) changing a bulb .........................................
(up to the end of the DU) lighting: interior ..................................................
(up to the end of the DU) bulbs changing ..............................................
(up to the end of the DU) courtesy light .............................................
(current page) map reading lights .....................................
(current page)
ENG_UD59155_2
Eclairage intérieur : remplacement des lampes (HFE - Renault)
INTERIOR LIGHTING: changing bulbs
(2/2)
5
6
Boot lights
5
Please consult an authorised dealer.
Central console lights
6
Please consult an authorised dealer.
5.20
ENG_UD59155_2
Eclairage intérieur : remplacement des lampes (HFE - Renault)
CARD: battery
(1/2)
1
A
2
Replacing the battery
When the message “Keycard battery low” appears on the instrument panel, replace the battery in the card:
– slide the rear casing
1
downwards while pressing on zone
A
;
– remove the battery cover
2
;
– remove the battery by pressing on one side and lifting the other;
– replace it according to the direc- tion and template shown inside the cover.
When refitting, proceed in the reverse order, then press one of the buttons on the card four times, close to the vehicle: the message will disappear.
Check that the cover is clipped shut.
The batteries are available from ap- proved Dealers, and their service life approximately two years. Check that there is no dye on the battery: risk of an incorrect electrical contact.
Dealer).
If they need to be replaced, be sure to use the same or equivalent type of bat- tery (consult an Approved
When replacing:
– make sure that the batter- ies are correctly inserted.
There is a risk of explo- sion.
– if the flap does not close cor- rectly, do not use and keep out of reach of children.
5.21
ENG_UD54827_1
Carte RENAULT : pile (HFE - Renault)
Card: battery card: battery...............................................
(up to the end of the DU)
»hands-free» card: battery ........................
(up to the end of the DU) remote control card: battery.......................
(up to the end of the DU)
CARD: battery
(2/2)
Operating faults
If the battery is too weak to ensure cor- rect operation, you can still start and lock/unlock the vehicle (please refer to the information on “Locking/unlocking the opening elements” in Section 1).
Precautions relating to batteries:
– keep (new or used) bat- teries out of reach of children;
– not to swallow the batteries.
Risk of chemical burns which may led to death.
– if ingested or inserted into any part of the body, consult a doctor as soon as possible.
Do not throw away your used bat- teries; give them to an organisation responsible for collecting and recy- cling batteries.
5.22
ENG_UD54827_1
Carte RENAULT : pile (HFE - Renault)
RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL: batteries
(1/2)
1
1
Replacing the battery
Open the case at slot
1
using a flat- blade screwdriver or similar, and re- place the battery
2
, observing the po- larity shown on the back of the cover.
2
Note:
It is not advisable to touch the electronic circuit in the key cover when replacing the battery.
Ensure that the cover is correctly clipped on and the screw tightened.
The batteries are available from approved Dealers, and their service life approximately two years.
Check that there is no dye on the battery: risk of an incorrect electrical contact.
Dealer).
If they need to be replaced, be sure to use the same or equivalent type of bat- tery (consult an Approved
When replacing:
– make sure that the batter- ies are correctly inserted.
There is a risk of explo- sion.
– if the flap does not close cor- rectly, do not use and keep out of reach of children.
5.23
ENG_UD54828_1
Télécommande à radiofréquence : piles (HFE - Renault)
Radio frequency remote control: batteries remote control door locking batteries ...............................................
(up to the end of the DU) radio frequency remote control/key battery ..................................................
(up to the end of the DU) keys replacing the battery ............................
(up to the end of the DU)
RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL: batteries
(2/2)
Operating faults
If the battery is too weak to ensure cor- rect operation, you can still start and lock/unlock the vehicle (please refer to the information on “Locking/unlocking the doors” in Section 1).
Precautions relating to batteries:
– keep (new or used) bat- teries out of reach of children;
– not to swallow the batteries.
Risk of chemical burns which may led to death.
– if ingested or inserted into any part of the body, consult a doctor as soon as possible.
Do not throw away your used bat- teries; give them to an organisation responsible for collecting and recy- cling batteries.
5.24
ENG_UD54828_1
Télécommande à radiofréquence : piles (HFE - Renault)
FUSES
(1/3)
A
C
B
If any electrical component does not work, check the condition of the fuses.
Fuses in passenger compartment
A or
B
on the left-hand side of the vehicle
Unclip the cover
A
using a screwdriver or similar.
Open the glovebox and unclip the flap
B
.
In accordance with local legislation or as a precautionary measure: obtain an emergency kit containing a set of spare bulbs and fuses from an approved Dealer.
Fuses in passenger compartment C on the right-hand side of the vehicle
Unclip the cover
C
using a screwdriver or similar.
5.25
ENG_UD36744_1
Fusibles (HFE - Renault)
Fuses fuses ..........................................................
(up to the end of the DU)
FUSES
(2/3)
Use the fuse allocation label in the stor- age compartment
A
,
B
or
C
to identify the fuses.
Certain fuses should only be replaced by a qualified professional. These fuses are not listed on the label.
Only change the fuses represented on the label.
1
Check the fuse in question and
replace it,
if necessary,
by a fuse of the same rating
.
If a fuse is fitted where the rating is too high, it may cause the electrical circuit to overheat (risk of fire) in the event of an item of equipment using an excessive amount of current.
Clip
1
Remove the fuse using tweezers
1
, lo- cated on the fuse plate.
To remove the fuse from the tweezers, slide the fuse to the side.
It is not advisable to use the free fuse locations.
Do not touch the wiring harnesses or the connectors.
5.26
ENG_UD36744_1
Fusibles (HFE - Renault)
FUSES
(3/3)
Allocation of fuses
(the presence of certain fuses depends on the vehicle equipment level)
Symbol
D
Indicators
Allocation Symbol Allocation
Steering column controls
ß
Brake light
Audio amplifier
N
Door locking/unlocking f
Wipers
ñ
Heated seats
C
Heated rear screen
Electric door mirror
ë
Accessories sockets
Z
Interior lighting, courtesy mirror, rain and light sensor, electric rear view mirrors, air conditioning, ECO mode
Passenger compartment central unit, speed limiter/cruise control, diagnostics socket, electric windows, 4-wheel drive transmission (4WD)
î
Radio, multifunction screen, multimedia sockets
5.27
ENG_UD36744_1
Fusibles (HFE - Renault)
BATTERY: troubleshooting
(1/2)
To avoid all risk of sparks:
– Ensure that any consumers (courtesy lights, etc.) are switched off before disconnecting or reconnecting the battery;
– when charging, stop the charger before connecting or disconnecting the battery;
– to avoid creating a short circuit between the terminals, do not place metal objects on the battery;
– always wait at least one minute after the engine has been switched off before disconnecting a battery;
– make sure that you reconnect the battery terminals after refitting.
Connecting a battery charger
The battery charger must be compatible with a battery with nominal voltage of 12 volts.
Do not disconnect the battery when the engine is running.
Follow the instructions given by the manufacturer of the battery charger you are using.
Handle the battery with care as it contains sulphuric acid, which must not come into contact with eyes or skin. If it does, wash the affected area with plenty of cold water. If necessary, consult a doctor.
Keep naked flames, red hot objects and sparks away from the battery components as there is a
risk of explosion
.
Before performing any action in the engine com- partment, the ignition must be switched off (please see the information on “Starting, stop- ping the engine” in Section 2).
5.28
Special procedures may be required to charge some batteries. Contact your approved dealer.
Avoid all risk of sparks which may cause an immediate explosion, and charge the battery in a well venti- lated area.
Risk of serious injury.
ENG_UD49799_3
Batterie : dépannage (HFE - Renault)
Please note when work- ing close to the engine that it may be hot. The engine cooling fan may also start at any moment. The minds you of this.
warning light in the engine compartment re-
Risk of injury.
Battery battery........................................................
(up to the end of the DU) battery troubleshooting ....................................
(up to the end of the DU)
BATTERY: troubleshooting
(2/2)
Starting the vehicle using the battery from another vehicle
If you have to use the battery from another vehicle to start, obtain suitable jump leads (with a large cross section) from an approved dealer or, if you already have jump leads, ensure that they are in perfect condition.
The two batteries must have an identical nominal voltage of 12 volts.
The battery supplying the current should have a capacity (amp-hours, Ah) which is at least the same as that of the discharged battery.
Ensure that there is no risk of contact between the two vehicles (risk of short circuiting when the positive terminals are connected) and that the discharged battery is properly connected. Switch off your vehicle ignition.
Start the engine of the vehicle supplying the current and run it at a moderate speed.
1
2
Lift the cover and then the red terminal cap
1
(+).
Connect the positive cable
A
to the ter- minal
1
(+), then to the
terminal
4
(+) of the battery supplying the current.
Connect the negative cable
B
to the
terminal
3
(–) of the battery supplying the current and then to the terminal
2
(–)
.
Start the engine, and as soon as it starts running, disconnect cables
A
and
B
in reverse order
(
2
-
3
-
4
-
1
).
1
1 2
A
4
B
3
Check that there is no contact between leads
A
and
B
and that the positive lead
A
is not touching any metal parts on the vehicle supplying the current.
Risk of injury and/or damage to the vehicle.
5.29
ENG_UD49799_3
Batterie : dépannage (HFE - Renault)
ACCESSORIES
Electrical and electronic accessories
Before installing this type of accessory (particularly for transmitters/receivers: frequency bandwidth, power level, po- sition of the aerial, etc.), make sure it is compatible with your vehicle. You can get advice from an authorised dealer.
Connect accessories with a maximum power of 120 Watts only.
Fire hazard.
When several accessory sockets are used at the same time, the total power of the connected accessories must not exceed 180 watts.
No work may be carried out on the vehicle’s electrical or radio circuits, except by authorised dealers: an incorrectly connected system may result in damage being caused to the electrical equipment and/or the components connected to it.
If the vehicle is fitted with any aftermarket electrical equipment, make sure that the installation is correctly protected by a fuse.
Establish the rating and position of this fuse.
Using the diagnostic socket
The use of electronic accessories on the diagnostic socket may cause serious disturbance to the vehicle’s electronic systems.
For your safety we recommend that you use only electronic accessories approved by the manufacturer, consult an Approved
Dealer.
Serious accident risk
.
Use of transmitting/receiving devices (telephones, CB equipment etc.).
Telephones and CB equipment with integrated aerials may cause interference to the electronic systems originally fitted to the vehicle: it is advisable only to use equipment with an external aerial.
Furthermore, we remind you of the need to conform to the legislation in force concerning the use of such equipment.
Fitting aftermarket accessories
If you wish to install accessories on the vehicle: please contact an authorised dealer. Also, to ensure the correct operation of your vehicle, and to avoid any risk to your safety, we recommend that you use only accessories specifically designed for your vehicle, which are the only accessories for which the manufacturer will provide a warranty.
If you are using an anti-theft device, only attach it to the brake pedal.
Obstructions to the driver
On the driver’s side, only use mats suitable for the vehicle, attached with the pre-fitted components, and check the fitting regu- larly. Do not lay one mat on top of another.
There is a risk of wedging the pedals.
5.30
Accessories accessories................................................
(up to the end of the DU)
ENG_UD38349_1
Accessoires (JFC - BFB - Renault)
WINDSCREEN WIPER BLADES: replacement (1/2)
3
2
1
Refitting
Slide the blade along the arm until it clips on. Check that it is correctly locked in place. Lower the windscreen wiper arm carefully.
With the ignition on, return the wind- screen wiper stalk to the stop position.
NB
: Before restarting your vehicle, lower the windscreen wiper blades onto the windscreen to avoid any risk of damaging the bonnet or the wipers.
Windscreen wiper blades
1
With the ignition on or the engine running
, lower the windscreen wiper stalk fully: the wipers stop slightly away from the bonnet.
Lift the wiper arm
3
, press the tab
2
and push the blade to release it.
– In frosty weather, make sure that the wiper blades are not stuck by ice (to avoid the risk of the motor overheating or damaging the blades).
– Check the condition of the wiper blades.
Replace the wiper blades as soon as they begin to lose efficiency
(approximately once a year).
Whilst changing the blade, take care not to drop the arm onto the window after it has been removed as this may break the window.
Do not activate the wipers on a dry screen. This will lead to premature wear or damage to the blades.
5.31
ENG_UD59156_3
Balais d essuie-vitres (HFE - Renault)
Wipers (replacing blades) wiper blades ..............................................
(up to the end of the DU) wipers blades ..................................................
(up to the end of the DU) screen wash/wipe replacing blades ...................................
(up to the end of the DU) windscreen washer/wiper ..........................
(up to the end of the DU)
WINDSCREEN WIPER BLADES: replacement (2/2)
4
A
To refit
To refit the wiper blade, proceed in re- verse order to removal. Make sure that the blade is correctly locked in position.
B
5
6
Rear screen wiper blade
4
Stalk in stop position (deactivated):
– Lift the wiper arm
6
;
– pivot wiper blade
4
until some resist- ance is met (movement
B
);
– depending on the vehicle, press tab
5
, then remove the wiper blade by pulling it (movement
A
).
Keep monitoring the condition of the wiper blades. How long they last de- pends on you:
– clean the blades, windscreen and rear screen regularly with soapy water;
– do not use them when the windscreen or rear screen are dry;
– free them from the windscreen or rear screen when they have not been used for a long time.
Before changing the rear wiper blade, make sure the stalk is in the stop position
(deactivated).
Risk of injury.
5.32
ENG_UD59156_3
Balais d essuie-vitres (HFE - Renault)
TOWING: breakdown recovery
(1/2)
Before towing, put the gearbox in neu- tral, unlock the steering column and re- lease the parking brake.
For vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox, if it is not possible to put the gear lever into position
N
, please con- sult an authorised dealer.
The speed specified by current legislation for towing must always be observed. If your vehicle is the towing vehicle, do not exceed the maximum towing weight for your vehicle (refer to the information on “Weights” in Section
6).
Steering column unlocking
Insert the key into the ignition or, de- pending on the vehicle, with the card in the passenger compartment, press the engine start button for approximately
two seconds
.
Reposition the lever to neutral (posi- tion
N
for vehicles fitted with an auto- matic gearbox).
The steering column unlocks, the ac- cessory functions are powered: you can use the vehicle’s lights (direction indicators, brake lights, etc.). At night the vehicle must have its lights on.
Depending on the vehicle, once you have finished towing, press the engine start button twice (risk of running down the battery).
Towing a vehicle with an automatic gearbox
Transport the vehicle on a trailer or tow it with the front wheels off the ground.
In exceptional circumstances
, you may tow it with all four wheels on the ground, only in a forward gear, with the gear lever in neutral position
N
over a maximum distance of 50 miles (80 km) and at a maximum speed of 16 mph
(25 km/h).
Do not remove the key from the ignition switch, or leave the card in the vehi- cle during towing (depend- ing on the vehicle).
Risk of the steering column lock- ing
.
1
2
If the lever is stuck in
P
, even though you are depressing the brake pedal, the lever can be released manually. To do this, insert a tool (with a hard rod to it) into the slot
1
and press the button
2
at the same time to unlock the lever.
Contact an authorised dealer as soon as possible.
When the engine is stopped, steering and braking assistance are not operational.
5.33
ENG_UD64195_2
Remorquage : dépannage (HFE - Renault)
Towing towing hitch................................................
(up to the end of the DU) towing breakdown ...........................................
(up to the end of the DU)
TOWING: breakdown recovery
(2/2)
3
A
B
3
7
4
C
D
6
5
6
8
Only use the front
5
and rear
8
towing points
(never use the drive shafts or any other part of the vehicle).
These towing points may only be used for towing: never use them for lifting the vehicle directly or indirectly.
Access to towing points
Front towing point
Press zone
A
then zone
B
to open flap
4
.
Rear towing point
Press zone
C
then zone
D
to open flap
7
.
Tighten the tow eye
6
fully:
as much as possible by hand at first, then finish tightening it using the wheelbrace or, depending on the vehicle, the lever.
Only use the towing eye
6
and the wheelbrace
3
included in the tool kit
(please refer to the information under
“Tools” in Section 5).
Ensure that the towing eye is bolted correctly.
Risk of losing the towed object.
– Use a rigid towing bar.
If a rope or cable is used
(where the law allows this), the vehicle being towed must be able to brake.
– A vehicle must not be towed if it is not fit to be driven.
– Avoid accelerating or braking suddenly when towing, as this may result in damage being caused to the vehicle.
– In any case, it is advisable not to exceed
16 mph (25 km/h)
.
– Do not push the vehicle if the steering column is locked.
Do not leave the tools unsecured inside the vehicle as they may come loose under braking.
5.34
ENG_UD64195_2
Remorquage : dépannage (HFE - Renault)
OPERATING FAULTS
(1/7)
The following advice will enable you to carry out quick, temporary repairs. For safety reasons you should always contact an approved Dealer as soon as possible.
Using the card
The card does not lock or unlock the doors.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Card battery is flat.
WHAT TO DO
Replace the battery. You can still lock/ unlock and start your vehicle (refer to the in- formation on “Locking, unlocking the open- ing elements” in Section 1 and “Starting, stopping the engine” in Section 2).
Use of appliances operating on the same frequency as the card (mobile phone, etc.).
Stop using the equipment or use the in- tegrated key (refer to the information on
“Locking, unlocking the opening elements” in Section 1).
Vehicle located in a high electromagnetic radiation zone.
Vehicle battery flat.
Use the key integrated in the card (refer to the information on “Locking, unlocking the opening elements” in Section 1).
The vehicle is started.
With the engine running, the card’s locking/ unlocking device is blocked. Turn off the ig- nition.
5.35
ENG_UD54834_1
Anomalies de fonctionnement (HFE - Renault)
Operating faults operating faults ..........................................
(up to the end of the DU) faults operating faults ....................................
(up to the end of the DU)
OPERATING FAULTS
(2/7)
The following advice will enable you to carry out quick, temporary repairs. For safety reasons you should always contact an approved dealer as soon as possible.
Using the remote control POSSIBLE CAUSES ACTION REQUIRED
The remote control does not lock or unlock the doors.
The remote control battery is flat.
Use the emergency key.
Use of appliances operating on the same frequency as the remote control (mobile phone, etc.).
Stop using the devices or use the key.
Vehicle located in a high electromagnetic radiation zone.
Discharged battery.
Replace the battery. You can still lock/ unlock and start your vehicle (refer to the information on “Locking/unlocking the doors” in Section 1 and “Starting/Stopping the engine” in Section 2).
The vehicle is started.
With the engine running, the key’s locking/ unlocking device is blocked. Turn off the ignition.
5.36
ENG_UD54834_1
Anomalies de fonctionnement (HFE - Renault)
OPERATING FAULTS
(3/7)
The starter is activated
The instrument panel indicator lights are weak or fail to light up and the starter does not turn.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Battery terminals not tight, bat- tery terminals disconnected or oxidised.
Discharged battery or not op- erational.
ACTION REQUIRED
Retighten or reconnect the terminals, or clean them if they are oxidised.
Connect another battery to the faulty battery. Refer to the paragraph “Battery: troubleshooting” in section 5 or replace the battery if necessary.
Do not push the vehicle if the steering column is locked.
The engine will not start.
With the vehicle stationary, engine cold, the engine’s idle speed is high.
Faulty circuit.
Starting conditions are not ful- filled.
The “hands-free” card does not work.
Consult an approved dealer.
Please refer to the information on “Starting, stopping the engine” in Section 2.
Place the card in the recess provided for this purpose on the centre console.
Please refer to the information on “Starting, stopping the engine” in Section 2.
The engine’s idle speed should decrease after about Petrol version, this is not nec- essarily a fault. This may be caused by the increase in the engine temperature.
one minute. Otherwise, this may be caused by an- other fault. Call an approved Dealer.
The engine cannot be switched off.
Card not detected.
The steering column remains locked.
Electronic fault.
Steering wheel locked.
Faulty electrical circuit.
Place the card in the recess provided for this purpose on the centre console.
Press and hold the start button.
Press the start button 3 times quickly or press and hold.
Move the steering wheel while pressing the engine start button or, depending on the vehicle, while turning the key (refer to the information on “Starting, stopping the engine” in Section 2).
Consult an approved dealer.
5.37
ENG_UD54834_1
Anomalies de fonctionnement (HFE - Renault)
OPERATING FAULTS
(4/7)
On the road
Vibrations.
White smoke from the exhaust.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Tyres not inflated to correct pressures, incorrectly balanced or damaged.
In the diesel version, this is not neces- sarily a fault. Smoke may be caused by particle filter regeneration.
WHAT TO DO
Check the tyre pressures: if this is not the problem, have them checked by an approved Dealer.
Refer to the information on “Special fea- tures of diesel versions” in Section 2.
Smoke under the bonnet.
Petrol version, this is not necessarily a fault. Depending on the climate con- ditions (cold, humidity etc.), smoke may be produced under hard vehicle acceleration.
Reduce the engine speed and avoid sudden acceleration to gradually make the smoke disappear. Otherwise, this may be caused by another fault. Consult an ap- proved dealer.
Short-circuit or cooling system leak.
Stop, switch off the ignition, stand away from the vehicle and contact an approved dealer.
The oil pressure warning light comes on: while cornering or braking The level is too low.
is slow to go out or remains lit under acceleration
5.38
Loss of oil pressure.
Top up the engine oil level (refer to the in- formation on “Engine oil level: topping up/ filling” in Section 4).
Stop the vehicle and contact an approved
Dealer.
ENG_UD54834_1
Anomalies de fonctionnement (HFE - Renault)
OPERATING FAULTS
(5/7)
On the road
Steering becomes heavy.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Assistance overheating.
Fault with the electric assistance motor.
Fault in the assistance system.
WHAT TO DO
Drive carefully at reduced speed, be aware of the level of force on the steering wheel needed to turn the wheels. Consult an ap- proved dealer.
The engine is overheating. The coolant temperature indicator is in the warning zone and warning light
®
comes on.
Engine cooling fan not working.
Coolant leaks.
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and contact an approved dealer.
Check the coolant reservoir: it should contain fluid. If there is no coolant, consult an approved dealer as soon as possible.
Coolant boiling in the coolant reservoir.
Mechanical fault: damaged cylinder head gasket.
Stop the engine.
Contact an approved dealer.
Radiator:
If there is a significant lack of coolant, remember that it must never be topped up using cold coolant while the engine is very warm. After any procedure on the vehicle which has involved even partial draining of the cooling system, it must be refilled with a new mixture prepared in the correct proportions. Reminder: only products approved by our Technical Department may be used for this purpose.
5.39
ENG_UD54834_1
Anomalies de fonctionnement (HFE - Renault)
OPERATING FAULTS
(6/7)
Electrical equipment
The wipers do not work.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Wiper blades stuck.
Faulty electrical circuit.
Fuse damaged.
The wiper does not stop.
Direction indicators flashing more quickly.
Faulty electrical controls.
Blown bulb.
The direction indicators do not work.
Faulty electrical circuit or control.
Fuse damaged.
The lights do not come on or go off.
Faulty electrical circuit or control.
Fuse damaged.
WHAT TO DO
Free the blades before using the wipers.
Consult an approved dealer.
Replace the fuse or have it replaced; refer to the information on “Fuses” in section 5.
Consult an approved dealer.
See information on “Headlights: changing bulbs” or “Rear and side lights: changing bulbs”.
Consult an approved dealer.
Replace the fuse or have it replaced; refer to the information on “Fuses” in section 5.
Consult an approved dealer.
Replace the fuse or have it replaced; refer to the information on “Fuses” in section 5.
5.40
ENG_UD54834_1
Anomalies de fonctionnement (HFE - Renault)
OPERATING FAULTS
(7/7)
Electrical equipment
Traces of condensation in the head- lights or rear lights.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Traces of condensation may be a nat- ural phenomenon caused by varia- tions in temperature and humidity.
In this case, the traces will disappear slowly once the lights are switched on.
WHAT TO DO
The front seat belt reminder light comes on when the seat belts are fastened.
An object is stuck between the floor and the seat and is disrupting the operation of the sensor.
Remove all objects from underneath the front seats.
ENG_UD54834_1
Anomalies de fonctionnement (HFE - Renault)
5.41
5.42
ENG_UD49537_2
Filler NU (X61 - X62 - X10 - X98 - X82 - HFE - XFD - XFA - XEF - Renault)
Section 6: Technical specifications
6.1
ENG_UD68669_6
Sommaire 6 (HFE - Renault)
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION PLATES
A
B
A
10
9
8
3
4
5
6
1
2
7
The information shown on the vehicle identification plate should be quoted on all correspondence or orders.
The presence and location of the information depends on the vehicle.
Vehicle identification plate
A
1
Manufacturer name.
2
EC design number or approval number.
3
Identification number.
Depending on the vehicle, this information is also given on marking
B
.
4
MAM (Maximum Authorised
Mass).
5
GTW (Gross train weight: vehicle fully loaded, with trailer).
6
MPAW (Maximim Permissible
Weight) for front axle.
7
MPAW on rear axle.
8
Reserved for related or additional entries.
9
Not used.
10
Paint reference (colour code).
6.2
Vehicle identification plate
ENG_UD52679_3
Plaques d’identification véhicule (HFE - Renault) vehicle identification plates ........................
(up to the end of the DU)
ENGINE IDENTIFICATION PLATES
(1/2)
A
1 2
3
A
Please quote the information on the engine plate or label
A
in all correspondence or orders.
(Location varies depending on engine)
1
Engine type.
2
Engine suffix.
3
Engine number.
A
ENG_UD57476_2
Plaques d’identification moteur (HFE - Renault)
Engine identification plate engine specifications .................................
(up to the end of the DU) vehicle identification plates ........................
(up to the end of the DU)
A
6.3
ENGINE IDENTIFICATION PLATES
(2/2)
A
1 2
3
A
Please quote the information on the engine plate or label
A
in all correspondence or orders.
(Location varies depending on engine)
1
Engine type.
2
Engine suffix.
3
Engine number.
A
6.4
ENG_UD57476_2
Plaques d’identification moteur (HFE - Renault)
A
DIMENSIONS (in metres)
0,913
* Unladen, with or without longitudinal roof bar
Dimensions technical specifications ..............................
(up to the end of the DU) dimensions ................................................
(up to the end of the DU)
2,647
4,489
0,930
1,611-1,623*
1,556
1,542
2,058
ENG_UD54838_1
Dimensions (en mètres) (HFE - Renault)
6.5
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
(1/3)
Versions
Engine type
(see engine plate)
1.2 Tce
H5F Turbo
Cubic capacity
(cc)
Type of fuel
Octane rating
1.3 Tce
H5H Turbo
1.6 Tce
M5M Turbo
1.5 dCi
K9K
1.6 dCi
R9M
1.7 dCi
R9N
1 197 1 333 1 618 1 461 1 598 1 749
Petrol
It is
essential
that you use unleaded petrol of the octane rating stated on the label inside the fuel filler flap.
Refer to «Fuel tank» in Section 1.
Diesel
The label located in the fuel filler flap indicates the authorised fuels.
6.6
Engine specifications technical specifications ..............................
(up to the end of the DU) engine specifications .................................
(up to the end of the DU) engine technical specifications ........................
(up to the end of the DU)
ENG_UD57478_2
Caractéristiques moteurs (HFE - Renault)
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
(2/3)
Versions
Engine type
(see engine plate)
1.2 Tce
H5F Turbo
1 197
Cubic capacity
(cc)
Fuel types that meet
European standards and are compatible with the engines of vehicles sold in Europe
(in any other case, contact an
Approved Dealer).
1.3 Tce
H5H Turbo
1 333
1.6 Tce
M5M Turbo
1 618
Unleaded petrol compliant with standard
EN 228
contains up to
5 % ethanol in volume.
1.5 dCi
K9K
1 461
1.6 dCi
R9M
1 598
1.7 dCi
R9N
1 749
Diesel fuel compliant with stand- ard
EN 590
contains up to 7 % fatty acid methyl ester in volume.
Unleaded petrol compliant with standard
EN 228
contains up to
10 % ethanol in volume.
Diesel fuel compliant with standard
EN 16734
contains up to 10 % fatty acid methyl ester in volume.
ENG_UD57478_2
Caractéristiques moteurs (HFE - Renault)
Diesel fuel compliant with stand- ard
EN 15940
contains up to 7% acid methyl ester in volume.
6.7
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
(3/3)
1.2 Tce 1.3 Tce Versions
Engine type
(see engine plate)
H5F Turbo H5H Turbo
1.6 Tce
M5M Turbo
Cubic capacity
(cc)
Spark plugs
1 197 1 333 1 618
Only use the spark plugs specified for your vehi- cle’s engine.
The type should be marked on a label affixed inside the engine compartment. If it is not then contact an approved Dealer.
Fitting spark plugs which are not to specification may damage the engine.
1.5 dCi
K9K
1 461
1.6 dCi
R9M
1 598
–
1.7 dCi
R9N
1 749
6.8
ENG_UD57478_2
Caractéristiques moteurs (HFE - Renault)
WEIGHTS (in kg)
The weights indicated for a basic vehicle without options: they vary depending on the your vehicle’s equipment. Consult your approved Dealer.
Maximum permissible all-up weight (MMAC)
Maximum permissible all-up weight (MMTA)
Gross Train Weight (MTR)
Weights are indicated on the vehicle identification plate (refer to the information on “Vehicle identification plates” in Section 6)
Braked Trailer Weight*
Unbraked Trailer Weight*
Permissible nose weight*
found by calculating:
695
75
MTR - MMAC
Maximum permissible load on roof
75 kg (including carrying device)
* Towing weight (towing a caravan, boat, etc.)
Towing is prohibited when the MTR - MMAC calculation is equal to zero, or when the MTR is equal to zero (or is not listed) on the identification plate.
– It is important to comply with the towing weights, governed by local legislation in each country and, in particular, laid down in the Road Traffic Regulations. Contact an approved Dealer about any towing equipment.
– When towing, under no circumstances may
the total train weight (vehicle + trailer) be exceeded
. However the following is permitted:
– rear axle MMTA exceeded by no more than 15%,
– maximum MMAC exceeded by no more than 10% or 100 kg (whichever is reached first).
In either case, the maximum speed of the vehicle and trailer must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) and the tyre pressures must be increased by 0.2 bar (3 PSI).
– The engine output and climbing capability are reduced with altitude. We recommend that the maximum load be reduced by 10% at an altitude of 1,000 metres and by an additional 10% for each 1,000 metres thereafter.
6.9
ENG_UD68357_4
Masses (en kg) (HFE - Renault)
Towing weights
Weights technical specifications ..............................
(up to the end of the DU) towing a caravan .......................................
(up to the end of the DU) load permitted on the roof..........................
(up to the end of the DU) towing weights ...........................................
(up to the end of the DU) weights ......................................................
(up to the end of the DU) transporting objects on the roof ............................................
(up to the end of the DU)
REPLACEMENT PARTS AND REPAIRS
Original parts are based on strict specifications and are subject to highly-specialised tests. Therefore, they are of at least the same level of quality as the parts fitted originally.
If you always fit genuine replacement parts to your vehicle, you will ensure that it performs well. Furthermore, repairs carried out within the manufacturer’s Network using original parts are guaranteed according to the conditions set out on the reverse of the repair order.
6.10
Replacement parts and repairs technical specifications ..............................
(up to the end of the DU) replacement parts ......................................
(up to the end of the DU)
ENG_UD36758_1
Pièces de rechange et réparations (HFE - Renault)
SERVICE SHEETS
(1/6)
VIN:
..................................................................................
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number:
Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number:
Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number:
Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page
ENG_UD36759_1
Justificatif d’entretien (HFE - Renault)
Service sheets
Comments/miscellaneous
Comments/miscellaneous
Comments/miscellaneous
6.11
service sheets............................................
(up to the end of the DU) maintenance: mechanical ...........................................
(up to the end of the DU)
SERVICE SHEETS
(2/6)
VIN:
..................................................................................
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number:
Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number:
Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number:
Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page
6.12
ENG_UD36759_1
Justificatif d’entretien (HFE - Renault)
Comments/miscellaneous
Comments/miscellaneous
Comments/miscellaneous
SERVICE SHEETS
(3/6)
VIN:
..................................................................................
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number:
Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number:
Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number:
Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page
ENG_UD36759_1
Justificatif d’entretien (HFE - Renault)
Comments/miscellaneous
Comments/miscellaneous
Comments/miscellaneous
6.13
SERVICE SHEETS
(4/6)
VIN:
..................................................................................
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number:
Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number:
Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number:
Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page
6.14
ENG_UD36759_1
Justificatif d’entretien (HFE - Renault)
Comments/miscellaneous
Comments/miscellaneous
Comments/miscellaneous
SERVICE SHEETS
(5/6)
VIN:
..................................................................................
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number:
Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number:
Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number:
Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page
ENG_UD36759_1
Justificatif d’entretien (HFE - Renault)
Comments/miscellaneous
Comments/miscellaneous
Comments/miscellaneous
6.15
SERVICE SHEETS
(6/6)
VIN:
..................................................................................
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number:
Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number:
Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number:
Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page
6.16
ENG_UD36759_1
Justificatif d’entretien (HFE - Renault)
Comments/miscellaneous
Comments/miscellaneous
Comments/miscellaneous
ANTICORROSION CHECK
(1/6)
If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.
VIN:
..........................................................
Corrosion repair operation to be carried out:
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
Anticorrosion check anti-corrosion check ..................................
(up to the end of the DU)
ENG_UD57086_1
Contrôle anticorrosion (1/6) (X62 - BFB - KFB - Renault)
6.17
ANTICORROSION CHECK
(2/6)
If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.
VIN:
..........................................................
Corrosion repair operation to be carried out:
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
6.18
ENG_UD57086_1
Contrôle anticorrosion (1/6) (X62 - BFB - KFB - Renault)
ANTICORROSION CHECK
(3/6)
If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.
VIN:
..........................................................
Corrosion repair operation to be carried out:
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
ENG_UD57086_1
Contrôle anticorrosion (1/6) (X62 - BFB - KFB - Renault)
6.19
ANTICORROSION CHECK
(4/6)
If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.
VIN:
..........................................................
Corrosion repair operation to be carried out:
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
6.20
ENG_UD57086_1
Contrôle anticorrosion (1/6) (X62 - BFB - KFB - Renault)
ANTICORROSION CHECK
(5/6)
If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.
VIN:
..........................................................
Corrosion repair operation to be carried out:
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
ENG_UD57086_1
Contrôle anticorrosion (1/6) (X62 - BFB - KFB - Renault)
6.21
ANTICORROSION CHECK
(6/6)
If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.
VIN:
..........................................................
Corrosion repair operation to be carried out:
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
6.22
ENG_UD57086_1
Contrôle anticorrosion (1/6) (X62 - BFB - KFB - Renault)
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
(1/6)
4
4 wheel drive (4WD) ..............................................
A
ABS ..............................................................
accessories........................................................................ 5.30
accessories socket ................................................... 3.30, 3.44
adaptive cruise control...........................................
additional methods of restraint
side protection ............................................................. 1.34
to the front seat belts .......................................
to the rear seat belts .................................................... 1.33
additional methods of restraint .......................................... 1.35
adjusting your driving position ..
1.19 – 1.21, 1.23 → 1.26, 3.31
advice on antipollution ....................................................... 2.25
air bag
activating the front passenger air bags ........................ 1.47
air bag........
1.27 → 1.35, 1.41, 1.46 – 1.47, 1.49 → 1.51, 1.56
air conditioning ........................................................
air vents ...................................................................... 3.2 – 3.3
airbags
activation/deactivation of the front passenger airbag . 1.46,
anti-corrosion check ..............................................
anti-corrosion protection .................................................... 4.16
anti-lock braking system: ABS ...............................
antipollution
advice .......................................................................... 2.25
armrest
front ..................................................................... 3.26, 3.29
ashtray ............................................................................... 3.30
ASR (traction control) ............................................
assisted parking.....................................................
audible and visual signals.................................................. 1.86
automatic gearbox (use) ...............................
automatic gearbox selector lever...........................
automatic locking of the doors while driving ...................... 1.18
B
battery
breakdown recovery ......................................... 5.28 – 5.29
battery................................................. 4.14 – 4.15, 5.28 – 5.29
beep................................................................................... 1.73
blind spot warning signal .......................................
blind spot: warning signal ......................................
bonnet......................................................................... 4.2 – 4.3
brake fluid .......................................................................... 4.10
brake lights
changing bulbs ............................................................. 5.17
bulbs
changing ..........................................................
C
card: battery............................................................ 5.21 – 5.22
card: use ................................................
catalytic converter..................................................
central door locking .................
1.2 – 1.3, 1.5, 1.8 → 1.15, 1.18
changing a bulb .....................................................
changing a wheel...................................................... 5.9 – 5.10
changing gear ...............................................
child restraint/seat .............................
child safety...............
1.17, 1.32, 1.36 – 1.37, 1.39 → 1.49, 2.4,
child seats..........................................
1.6, 1.36 – 1.37, 1.41 – 1.42, 1.46 → 1.51,
children (safety) ................................................................... 1.6
cigar lighter ........................................................................ 3.30
cleaning:
inside the vehicle .............................................. 4.19 – 4.20
clock .................................................................................. 1.77
closing the doors ...................................................
7.1
FRA_UD68670_6
Index (HFE - Renault)
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
(2/6)
control instruments .......................................
controls
steering wheel .............................................................. 3.44
controls ..................................................................
courtesy light ................................................. 3.23 – 3.24, 5.19
courtesy mirrors ................................................................. 3.25
cruise control ................................................
cruise control-speed limiter..............
cup holder .......................................................................... 3.26
customised vehicle settings ................................... 1.74 – 1.75
customising the vehicle settings ............................ 1.74 – 1.75
D
dashboard..............................................................
deadlocking the doors ................................................ 1.5, 1.12
demisting
rear screen .........................................................
windscreen .........................................................
deodourising function ................................................... 3.19
dimensions .......................................................................... 6.5
dipstick........................................................................ 4.4 – 4.5
display ..........................................................
doors/tailgate ....................................................
driver assistance................................
driver’s position .....................................................
driving ......
2.2 → 2.6, 2.11 → 2.13, 2.16 → 2.24, 2.30 → 2.43,
2.51 → 2.53, 2.57 → 2.74, 2.79 → 2.81
driving aids ........................................
driving position settings ............................................................
driving recommendations ......................................
E
ECO driving ...........................................................
ECO mode .............................................. 2.21 – 2.22, 3.9, 3.15
electric beam height adjustment ............................. 1.87 – 1.88
7.2
electric windows ....................................................
electronic parking brake ........................................
electronic stability control: ESC .............................
emergency active braking......................................
emergency brake assist.........................................
emergency braking ................................................
emergency key ........................................................... 1.6 – 1.7
emergency spare wheel ............................................. 5.2 – 5.3
engine
technical specifications ........................................
engine coolant ..................................................................... 4.9
engine oil ...................................................................
engine oil capacity .....................................................
engine oil level ...........................................................
engine specifications .................................
engine standby ........................................................
engine start/stop button .............................................
environment ....................................................................... 2.26
equipment
fitting ............................................................................ 3.39
equipment
multimedia ............................................................ 3.9, 3.15
ESC: electronic stability control ....................
exterior air quality .............................................................. 3.19
F
fascias and steering wheel controls................................... 3.35
faults operating faults ..............................
filling with reagent ..............................................
filter
air filter ......................................................................... 4.11
oil filter .................................................................
particle filter ................................................................. 2.12
passenger compartment filter ...................................... 4.11
fittings ....................................................................
FRA_UD68670_6
Index (HFE - Renault)
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
(3/6)
fixed sunroof ...................................................................... 3.22
freewheel ........................................................................... 2.22
front seat adjustment .............................................. 1.20 – 1.21
front seats
adjustment ............................................... 1.19 – 1.21, 1.23
with electric controls .................................................... 1.22
fuel advice on fuel ...................................................
consumption ....................................................
filling ........................................................
quality ..............................................................
fuel consumption ...................................................
fuel economy .........................................................
fuel filler cap ..........................................................
fuel level ................................................................
fuel tank
capacity ........................................................................ 1.97
fuel tank capacity ...................................................
fuses ......................................................................
G
gear lever.................................................................. 2.14, 2.79
glove box ........................................................................... 3.27
grab handle........................................................................ 3.27
grip control ......................................................................... 2.34
H
handbrake............................................................... 2.15 – 2.16
«hands-free» card: battery ..................................... 5.21 – 5.22
«hands-free» card: use............................................
hands-free telephone integrated control ............................ 3.44
hazard warning lights signal .............................................. 1.86
headlight beam adjustment .................................... 1.87 – 1.88
headrest.................................................................... 1.19, 3.31
heated seats ...................................................................... 1.20
heated windscreen ..................................................
heating and air conditioning system ........................
heating system ........................................................
Hill Start Assist.......................................................
hooks
clothing hooks .............................................................. 3.27
horn ................................................................................... 1.86
horn:
flash ............................................................................. 1.86
hubcap tool ................................................................. 5.7 – 5.8
I
ignition switch ........................................................
indicators ......................................................
indicators:
direction indicators ....................................................... 1.86
instrument panel ........................
instrument panel ........................
instrument panel messages .......
interior trim
maintenance ..................................................... 4.19 – 4.20
Isofix .........................................
1.39 – 1.40, 1.42, 1.46 → 1.48
J
jack ...................................................................................... 5.7
K
keys
replacing the battery ......................................... 5.23 – 5.24
keys ...........................................................................
L
lane departure warning ..........................................
levels .......................................................................
levels:
brake fluid .................................................................... 4.10
coolant ........................................................................... 4.9
7.3
FRA_UD68670_6
Index (HFE - Renault)
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
(4/6)
windscreen washer reservoir ....................................... 4.11
lifting the vehicle
changing a wheel ................................................ 5.9 – 5.10
lighting: exterior .............................................................
instrument panel .......................................................... 1.80
interior ........................................... 3.23 – 3.24, 5.19 – 5.20
lights
adjustment ........................................................ 1.87 – 1.88
changing bulbs .................................................
front ..................................................................
lights:
adjusting ........................................................... 1.87 – 1.88
dipped beam headlights .................
direction indicators .........................
fog lights .................................................... 1.56, 1.83, 5.17
hazard warning ............................................................ 1.86
main beam headlights ....................
reversing lights ............................................................. 5.17
side lights ................................................
load permitted on the roof .............................................. 6.9
locking the doors ..............................................
luggage compartment cover .............................................. 3.35
luggage retaining net .............................................. 3.40 – 3.41
M
maintenance ...................................................................... 2.25
maintenance: bodywork .........................................................
interior trim ........................................................ 4.19 – 4.20
mechanical ...................
4.4 – 4.5, 4.14 – 4.15, 6.11 → 6.16
map reading lights ......................................... 3.23 – 3.24, 5.19
menu for customising the vehicle settings .............. 1.74 – 1.75
methods of restraint in addition to the seat belts ...
mobile floor ............................................................. 3.35 – 3.36
multimedia (equipment) ..................................................... 3.44
7.4
multimedia equipment ....................................................... 3.44
N
navigation .......................................................................... 3.44
navigation system .............................................................. 3.44
O
oil change ..................................................................
opening the doors ..................................................
operating faults
accidents ...................................................................... 2.81
operating faults ........
1.29, 1.51, 1.56 → 1.61, 1.73, 1.91, 2.19,
2.81, 3.21 – 3.22, 5.35 → 5.41
operation............................................................................ 2.79
overspeed warning ................................................
P
paint
maintenance ....................................................
parking assistance: assisted parking .....................
parking brake .........................................................
parking distance control.........................................
power-assisted steering..................................................... 1.76
precautions during use ..........................................
pretensioners .........................................................
puncture.................................... 1.73, 5.2 – 5.3, 5.7, 5.9 – 5.10
R
radio................................................................................... 3.44
radio frequency remote control/key
battery ............................................................... 5.23 – 5.24
use .......................................................................
reagent (tank) ..............................................
reagent quality ...................................................
reagent tank.......................................................
reagent tank cap ................................................
FRA_UD68670_6
Index (HFE - Renault)
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
(5/6)
reagent tank capacity ........................................
rear bench seat.............................................. 1.42, 3.32 – 3.33
rear lights
number plate lights ...................................................... 5.18
rear parcel shelf ........................................................ 1.42, 3.35
rear seats
functions ........................................................... 3.32 – 3.33
rear seats........................................................................... 1.25
rear view camera .................................................... 2.73 – 2.74
rear view mirrors ..................................................... 1.78 – 1.79
remote control card: battery.................................... 5.21 – 5.22
remote control card: use ..........................................
remote control door locking
batteries ............................................................ 5.23 – 5.24
remote control door locking unit ................................
replacement parts .............................................................. 6.10
reverse gear
selecting ....................................................................... 2.14
reversing sensor ....................................................
roof bars ................................................................. 3.42 – 3.43
roof rack
roof bars ............................................................ 3.42 – 3.43
running in ............................................................................. 2.2
S
SCR: selective catalytic reduction .....................
screen
navigation display ...................................................... 3.44
navigation screen ......................................................... 3.44
screen wash/wipe
replacing blades ....................................... 1.92, 5.31 – 5.32
screen wash/wipe .............................................................. 1.93
screens
multimedia screen .................................... 2.73 – 2.74, 3.44
seat belt pretensioners front seat belt ...................................................
seat belts ................................
1.23 → 1.32, 1.35, 1.46 → 1.48
service sheets........................................................
Shift Paddle ....................................................................... 2.79
side protection devices ...................................................... 1.34
sign detection: overspeed warning ........................
signals and lights ...................................................
special features of diesel versions..................................... 2.13
special features of petrol vehicles .......................... 2.11 – 2.12
speed limiter .................................................
spoiler ................................................................................ 3.43
starting the engine ...................................................
steering wheel
adjustment ................................................................... 1.76
steering wheel controls ...................................................... 3.44
Stop & Start ....................................................
Stop & Start function.......................................
stopping the engine .............................
storage compartment.............................................
storage compartments ...........................................
sun visor ............................................................................ 3.25
switching on the vehicle ignition ................................
T
tailgate ..........................................................
tank
Brake fluid .................................................................... 4.10
Coolant .......................................................................... 4.9
tanks and reservoirs:
windscreen washer ...................................................... 4.11
technical specifications ............................................
telephone ........................................................................... 3.44
temperature regulation ............................................
tool kit .................................................................................. 5.7
towing
breakdown ........................................................ 5.33 – 5.34
towing equipment ......................................................... 3.39
7.5
FRA_UD68670_6
Index (HFE - Renault)
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
(6/6)
towing a caravan ........................................................ 3.39, 6.9
towing hitch...................................................... 5.7, 5.33 – 5.34
towing rings ..................................................... 3.35, 3.38, 3.41
towing weights ..................................................................... 6.9
traction control: ASR ..............................................
transporting children ..........................
transporting objects
in the luggage compartment ........................................ 3.38
luggage net ....................................................... 3.40 – 3.41
on the roof ...................................................................... 6.9
trims ..................................................................................... 5.8
trip computer and warning system...
tyre inflation kit...........................................................
tyre pressure.............................
2.27 → 2.29, 4.12 – 4.13, 5.12
tyre pressure monitor.............................................
tyre pressures ......................................................... 4.12 – 4.13
tyres ....................
2.23, 2.27 → 2.29, 4.12 – 4.13, 5.11 → 5.13
U
unlocking the doors ...............................................
USB socket ........................................................................ 3.44
V
variable power-assisted steering ....................................... 1.76
vehicle identification plates ........................................
ventilation ................................................................
W
warning lights.........................................................
washing .................................................................
weights ................................................................................ 6.9
wheelbrace .......................................................................... 5.7
wheels (safety) ......................................................
windscreen de-icing/demisting ................................
windscreen washer ...................
1.89 → 1.94, 1.93, 1.95 – 1.96
windscreen washer/wiper ....................................... 5.31 – 5.32
7.6
wiper blades ......................................... 1.90, 1.93, 5.31 – 5.32
wipers
blades ............................................................... 5.31 – 5.32
wipers ....................................................................
FRA_UD68670_6
Index (HFE - Renault)
RENAULT S.A.S. SOCIÉTÉ PAR ACTIONS SIMPLIFIÉE AU CAPITAL DE 533 941 113 € / 13-15, QUAI LE GALLO
92100 BOULOGNE-BILLANCOURT R.C.S. NANTERRE 780 129 987 — SIRET 780 129 987 03591 / TÉL. : 0810 40 50 60
NU 1287-5 – 99 91 003 52S – 09/2020 – Edition anglaise
à999100352Sôïêä
CU
Atsisiųsti
Vieša nuoroda atnaujinta
Vieša nuoroda į jūsų pokalbį buvo atnaujinta. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Dokumento vieša nuoroda
Reklama